·Published by
Saokar Bhattacharya,
for Punthi Pustak,
136/4B, Cornwallis Street,
Calcutta-4
First Edition, Hertford, 1854
Second London, 1868
Third Calcutta, 1962
90
Printed by
Jogesh Chandra Sarkhel
Calcutta Onental Press Private Ltd.
9, Paochanan Ghosh Lane,
Calcutta-9.

·TO
HORACE HAYMAN WILSON
BODEN PROFESSOR OF SANSKRT IN THE UNIVERSITY
OF OXFORD.
IN GRATEFUL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF ALL THAT HE
OWBS TO HIM
AN OXFORD PUPIL
INSCRIBES
THIS VOLUME

·PUBLISHERS' NOTE This monograph is the third edition of E B Cowell's transla tion of a well known work on Prākrt Grammar of Vararuchi, the oldest known grammanan of the Prákrt dialects, le dia lects that are considered inferior to Sanskrt "In Sanskrt dramas, it is women, except fenjale religious characters, and subordinate male personages, who are made to speak in Prākrt languages, the use of Sanskrt being reserved for the higher characters of the play, and amongst the former, again the choice of the special Prákrt dialect is adapted by the poet to the rank which such a subordinate personage holds, the more refined dialect being appropriated, for instance to the wives of the king or hero of the play, an inferior Prakrt to his ministers; others less in degree to the sons of the minis ters, soldiers, town people, and the like, down to the lowest Prākrt, which is spoken only by servants or the lowest classes 1 Cowell nimself wrote in 1850 that. "The women use a different dialect in which Sanskrt is softened down by a similar series of changes to those which have melted Latin into the modern Italian, and these dialectical varieties are more or less regular and euphonjous according to the rank of the speaker, the domestics, both male and female, use dialects stil? more removed from the present Sanskıt'* The Sahitya Darpana enumerates fourteen Vararuchi four while Lassen two such dialects Here in this work Cowell edites with claborate commen tary, notes and translation the sūtras or grammational rules of Vararuchi and thus introduces students to the study of this most interesting dialect as to a new language, and enables them for the first time fully and thorcughly to under stand and appreciate the SanskȚt Dramas 1 Goldstucker, in Chambers' Encyclopaedia, 1862 2 "Hindu Drama: Westminister Quarterly Review, 1850

·CONTENTS
PAGE
Preface to Second Edition
Preface to First Edition
..
XV
...
9 to 6
101
106
.
Introduction to Prakṣt Grammar
The Prākęca-Prakāśa (Sanskrt text)
The English Translation of the Prakrta Prakāśa ...
Appendix A (spurious sūtras)
Appendix B (on Var. iv. 25)
Appendix C (Hemachandra's sūtras on the
Sauraseni dialect)
Appendix D (on Var. lii. 58)
Appendix E (Hemachandra's sūtras
on vowels in Sandhi)
Index of Prākst Words
..
...
IIO
...
*13
315
..
117

·PREFACE Prākst is the general term, under which are comprised the various dialects which appear to have arisen in India out of the corruption of the Sanskrc, during the centuries immediately preceding our era. Their investigation offers much to interest both the philological and the historical student ; for not only is a knowledge of Prākt (and cspecrally of the principal dialect usually understood by that name,) cssential to the explanation of many forms in the modern languages of India'-supplying, as it does, the connecting link between these and the ancient Sanskrtbut, while thus throwing light on the history of one branch of the Indo-Germanic family of languages, it affords many valuable illustrations of those faws of euphony, with whose effects we are ourselves familiar, in comparing the modern Italian and Spanish with the Lalın out of which they sprang. At the same time Prākst is closely connected with several deeply interesting historical questions. The sacred dialects of the Bauddhas and the Jainas are nothing else than Prākſt, and the period and circumstances of its transfer to Ceylon and Nepāl are connected with the rise and progress of thac religion which is professed by the principal nacions to the north and cast of Hindustan." When the Greeks, 1 For instance, cf. the Hindascău cbsudah, tetsb, bärah, with the Präkrit forms ta Vararuchi, u, 44. 1. 9. Wilson's "Hindu Drama," latroductos. p. Ixv. 2 i ·PRĀKRTAPRAKASA under Alexander, came in contact with India, Prākrt seems to have been the spoken dialect of the mass of the people. The language of the rock-inscriptions of King Asoka, which record the name of Antiochus and other Greek princes about 200 B C, is also a form of Prakrt, and similarly we find it on the bilingual coins of the Greek Kings of Bactria. It also plays an important part in all the ancient Hindu dramas, for while the heroes speak Sanskrt, the women and attendants use various forms of Prākrt, the dialectical variations being more or less regular and cuphonious according to the rank of the speaker. Varauchi appears to have been the first Grammarian who reduced these popular dialects to a system, and, if we may receive the Hindu tradition, he was one of the 'nine gems' who flourished at the court of Vikramāditya, King of Ujjain, whose grcat victory over the Saka, as they pressed onward towards India after overrunning Bactria, B C. 56, is the fraditional cpoch from which the Hindus still date their Samvat era The chronology of Sanskrt literature is extremely uncertain but there are several circumstances which, in thus instance, tend to confirm the popular account, if we may assume, as settled, the identity of Vararuchi and Kätyāyana. For this identification, our chief authorities are the universal popular beliet in India, and the direct testimony of Somadeva, a native of Kashmir in the twelfth century, Tlus author, in his cncyclopædia of legends, called the Katbāsant sagara, collected from various sources, and comprising a large portion of the mychological lore of the Hindus, expressly mentions them as the same person 11 ·PREFACE : and uses cither name indiscriminately. For the age of Kātyāyana, we have some independent cestimony, which, though not precise, yet certainly chrows his date far back into the past, and fixes it, at the latest, as anterior to our era. Kāryāyana has always been the reputed author of the Vārtikas, or supplemental remarks on the ancienc Grammar of Panini ; and both names are found in the accounts of the Chinese Buddhist Hiuan-chsang, who travelled in India in the first half of the seventh century of our era. Pāṇini is called Pho-ni-ni, and described as the founder of music, which appears to be the nearest Chinese expression for a grammar. ctie passage relaang co Kācyíyana is as follows:: "T chi na por ti (erigé par les Clinois), limite de l'Inde du Nord.... Au sud-est de la grande ville, á 500 li, monastère de Tbi mo sou fa ns (forêt obscure) ; lá a vécu le docteur Kis so yan nit, 300 ans aprés lc Nirvana. Monastèrc fondé par Asoha.' The Buddhise tradicions in Ceylon all agree in calling the author of the earliest Pāls grammar Kachchāyano;' and, although clus is said to have perished, yet when we remember how very closely allied Pält is co Prálst and that Kachchāyano is simply the Prākre form of Kāryāyans, there 3 Scc this poins fully discussed to Wilson's Sanskri Dictionary. Introd, (first cu ) pp. 11.- 4 Quoted in the Afrendu (p. 382) to Remusat's translanon of the "Foe Lowe kr, ou Relation des royaumes bouddhiques". Sec also 21. Julien's "Hist, de la vie de Houen Ihsang." pr. 101. 165. 5 The common date of the Nursins of Buddha as J.C. 543: Lut Mun Tuang (ss quoted 173 rose to p. 237) gires several d.:ent dates as current in India in his time, de latest chic!ı is abous 5.C 350 6 Se: Turo!","!!,lar!. fi.5.2, ·PRAKRTAPRAKĀGA can be little doubt that the Prākſt grammar of the one and the Pali grammar of the other, are only the Brahmanical and Buddhist versions of the same tradition. The following work of Vararuchu or Kāryāyana is certainly our oldest authority for Prākṣt grammar ; and its rules are generally quoted by later grammarians and scholiasts as par excellence the «Prākſta Šāstra.' Ocher grammarians have generally followed its system, and contented themselves with adding single rules, or altering the arrangement of its details. Much discrepancy exists between the Prākṣc of the grammarians, and that which we find in the plays; and it is of great importance to have a complete edition ef the oldest grammarian, that we inay ascertain, if possible, how far this discrepancy may be ascribed to the inultiplied crrors of ignorant, and the unauthorised corrections of learned, transcribers; and how far it may have arisen from a difference of time between the age of the poccs and that of the grammarians, the dates of Sanskrt literary history being so uncertain. The works of the two great grammarians Pāņini and Vararuchi have been singularly different in their fate; for while tlie former has been ever guarded with the most scrupulous cate, and its sūtras (or 'concise aphorisms',) revered with almost Masorethe attention to minuti, the latter has been apparently left to all the vagaries of successive copyists and editors. The MSS. often vary considerably, as indeed might be expected in an ancient work, which has passed through so many generations, of copyists, all of whom knew Sanskrt better than the dialect whose pecu- Iratities the work explained; but che most important iv ·PRCFACE variation is in the number of the sütras, ome MSS. contaning many which are not found in the others, and as no cccord appears to have been preserved of the original number, it is a question of some difficulty to decide in particular instances. The MSS. which I have used in preparing this edicion, are as follows (A.) No. 1120 to the East India House Library. A valuable MS, bur frequently difficult to read.' (B) No. 211 in Professor Wilson's collection in the Bodleian Library at Oxford. (C.) No 210 in the same Clearly written, but very inaccurate (D.) No 158 in the same 7 It is this which Lassen used for the portions of Varalucht published in his "Institutiones Linguz Pramicz" (where he gave Sections 1-v, x-X1! , to which we may add Sect. vnt, as sien from the same source in Dr. Delius' "Radices Praciticz"). Having thus only one M1S., and that not unfrequeatly very obscure in its unting. It was impossible for him to avoid many crrors of transcrip uon. These have been carefully pointed out in an article in the second volume of Dr Hofer's Zeitschrift fur die Wissenschaft d Sprache." I have noticed the more important of them in tbc notes to the text, but I have not been sorry to escape thc unpleasing cash of cxposing the unavoidable inaccuraacs of one whom all Onerul scholars raust ever regard with a'icctionale reverence, Professor Lassen's Insurutioncs" bare been of such contuual service >> - 19 the present work, el st I feel bound to 23d may bale tribuit of admin.jon at the skill with which, in spite of such ir adequate rostenols, be 1.25 accompluhu bude ule uit ·PRĀKRTAPRAKASA tlun paper, (E.) No. 155 in the same. A clearly written MS. in the Bengāli character. (W.) A beaucıfully written MS, in the Royal Asiatic Society's Library, formerly belonging to Mr. Wathen of Bombay, for whom it was prepared (prakāss-krtam] by the Pandit Visnu-Sarman, and transcribed by Bapū Sarman. Of this I have used an accurate transcript on belonging to Dr. Max Muller, Of these MSS., we must at once separate W from the rest, as being evidently a modern recension. It abounds with new rules [sce Appendix A.] which are found in no other MS., and which in some cases spring from evident crrors on the part of the editor (as in those numbered 12 and 23 in App. A], in others he scems to have met with two readings in the MSS. and inserted both as separate rules [as e g. v. 16 (cf. note), v. 23]; in others he has interpolated sūcras from other grammarians. W 15 therefore of very little value in a critical point of though I have consulted it throughout, and gwen its variations tvhere they seemed of importance, the whole has cvidently been subjected to such recasting (prakāískaranam]. that we can place licele relance on its various tcadings, unless supported by other authority. A and C are (as I am persuaded), copies from the same original MS., this was probably written in the Bengali character, which would explain many of the extraordinary mistakes which the copyist of C has made from ignorance of the character. After collating part of C, and finding it useless from the absurd blunders of the copyist, and its cvident identity with A, where the genuine reading was View, and an entirc ·PREFACE preserved, I contented myself with simply referring to it in passages where A vas doubtful. B is a MS. which seems to be composed of two parts bound together, though both are in the same yriting, the paging of the latter from the middle of Section vn, has been altered to suit the former. In the earlier part te generally agrees with A, but in the latter, especially in Seccion vui. 10 agrees rather wich D, and even scems to borrow a few sutras from W. D and E generally agree, the chief difference being that in the last five Sections (and sometimes in the carlier ones) E continually gives only the bare sūtra and its cxamples, omiting the explanation of the Commentary, and frequently omits even the examples too. I did not discover E until I had ncarly finished my collation, but I have collared it for most of the second half, and referred to it in all cases of difficulty in the earlier parts. The text of the following edition has been made from a thorough collation of the MSS. ABD (A being taken as che basis), with the collaceral lielp of C and E, which may be considered as sespectively co-ordinate with A and D, W has been throughout consulted, and its Variz Lecciones noted, where of any value, but always as of inferior authority. Where BDEW agree in giving sutras not found in AC, I have inserted them in brackets; and in one instance, at 8 Thus DE alone quote the loc from the Scrubandha in the Comm. to iu 52--For our knowledge of this rare and ancı-at Prakrit poem we are iadebted to Dr Hofer's interesting arude 1a his Zeitschrift,' and ne kust ebat, in spite of the corrupt state of the dis nhich he meanoas, he will yet grue as an edition of the cost. Such a work would be indeed a boga to all Sanshst scholars, ni ·PRÄKRTAPRAWASA sion. the end of Section V., I have similarly inserted sote from DEW, but their authenticity must be left for fucure deci- The sūtras found in only one MS, beside W I have given in the notes, the various spurious Sūtras found only in W (nearly fifty in number) are given in Appendix A Beside the above MSS. of Vararucht. I have also derived considerable assistance from the works of other Indian grammatians, as the Prāktta-Sanjīvanī, and the grammars of Kramadıśvara, Hemachandra, etc. 1. The only MS. of the Prāketa-Sanjivanī, which I have met with (No. 1503 in the East India House Library) is imperfect at the commencement, and is, unfortunately, very carelessly transcribed, and full of crrors. Had it been accurate, it would have been of great service, as it seems to be a commentary on Vararuchi's sūtras, which it generally proper order, but in some places with addıtions and alterations. The difficulty of deciphering the MS. has precluded my making that use of it which I otherwise should have done. The work consists of nine Sections, corresponding to the first nine of Vararuchi. The general inscription at the close of cach section is lut vasantarāja virachstāyām prākrta sanjivanyām, or, as it is written at the close of the booh, Prakrta-sanjivaniuttiau, the only notice which I have found of Vasantaraja himself, is in 1 passage from the Prakrta Sarvasya, which states that Märkandeya, the author of the lapses work, commenced it gives in their 9 The MS numbers only cight, but the final inscription of the fifth is by mistake repeated for that of the sixth, which has occasioned the errot, d. f. 43, 53, VLI ·PREFACE 2. after a previous study of the systems of former grammarians, among whom he specifies Sākalya, Bharata, Kohala, Vara. ruchi, Bhāmaha, and Vasantarāja.10 Hemachandra was a grammatian of the Jaina sect, who flourished in the thirteenth century, and wrote a Prākro Grammar as an eighth Adhyāya' after the seven 'Adhyāyas' of his Sanskrt Grammar. The final inscription is ltye äcbārya sri Hemachandra-usrachstāyām siddha Hemachandrabhidäna svopanna-sabdānusāsanauritas, etc. This cighth Adhyāya consists of four Pädas, with 271, 217, 180, and 445 sūtras respectively. We have first the Prākrca-bhāsā (or 'principal Prāhre"), in the first three pādas and half of the fourth, the remainder is occupied with the Saurasenī, Māgadhi, Paiśāchi, Chulikā-Paisīchi, and Apabhrainsa bhāsä. Hemachandra's opening sūcra is •Bahulam,' and the babulādbıkārs is supposed to to the end of the work,'' and to explain any irregularities sluch may apparently contradict his rules, especially in the Jarna wricings, Assam' being his next sūtra. His arrangement is frequently very different to that of Vararuchi, and in many cases his rules are quite independent. I have found two MSS containing the eighth Adliyāya by itself in the Walker collection in the Bodleian, both in the Devanāgarī character. continue 10 शाकल्यभरत हलवररुचिभामहपमतराजा पोहान् प्रधान A171TG4TFU FTUARIE to fire in tutafa- तपय माक्टेयम्यौदः प्राकृतमर्वसमारभते ॥ An instance of this OCELIS 10 a suari quoted in Argeodex C 26 ix ·PRAARTAPRAKASA 1s [2.] (No 200 ) A very correctly written MS., buc some of the characters are very peculiar, and in many parts the writing of the last lines of the page is blurced and illegible. [b] (No. 177 ) A less legible MS, but more easy of reference from its having the Sūtras of each pāda numbered. Hemachandra's grammar too independent of Vararuchi's to afford much and in illustrating the lacter's sūtras, but many of his rules are very interesting, especially chosc on the Magadhi, an abstract of which I have added at the end of the translation of Section xi [cf. p. 181], his rules for the Sauraseni are given in Appendix C [of. pp. 104-106], same impactant cules on the Sandhı of vowels, and the doubling of consonants, are inserted in Appendix D and Appendix E [cf. PP 185—187], and 1 have frequently quoted his other cules in clic notes to the translation 3 Of the Prākro grammar in the Samksspta sāra of Kramadısvara, which, as in Hemachandra, is added at the end of the Sanskrt portion, I have not succeeded in finding a copy (all the MSS. which I have consulted ending with the Sanskrs part), and I have therefore only used che abridgement given by Professor Lassen from the Paris MS. in the Appendix to his Instituciones.' As this work 15 of great value in correcting Vararuchi's text, it is with no small pleasure that I have seen among the publications of the Bengal Asiatic Society, which are announced as in progress, an edition of the Prākot portion, by Babu Rajendralála Mitra. Probably no other grammar could be of the use, which this promises to be, an correcting and elucidating Varsrucht, as X ·PREFACE Kramadīśvara has followed his method so much more closely than any other gtammarian, whose works have come under my knowledge. To the above I might add the Prākṣta-Sarvasvá, by Māckandeyakavindra, of which there is a copy, bound up with Vararuchi, in the MS. which I have marked D in my collation; but unhappily it is so carelessly transcribed that I have found it quite useless to consult it. I may also mencion here that the commentory on the 13th canto of the Bhațţi-Kāvya, which is so written as to be either Sanskļu or Präkệt, has not unfrequently proved of some service (e.g. p. 37, note). Such are the resources which I have had at my command in preparing the present edition of the Prākļra-Prakāša, and so far as a careful collation of the MSS. may help, I trust that something may really have been effected towards a critical recension of the text. Several passages still remain doubrful, and for these Vararuclu must wait for better MSS. or a more compecent editor. The various readings, which are added at the foot of cach page, will furnish the reader with the different corruptions or alterations of the MSS.; and it is chese which we must chiefly consult before we attempt to interfere with the Satzss themselves, or to correct chem by the rules of later grammarians, or the language poces in the plays. In the present edition, as the Sanskrt type required the use of an inconveniently large size of English type co fic with it in princing, I have been obliged to make my notes to the text as brief as possible, and have generally reserved ·PRĀKRTAPRAKASA any explanatory details or proposed emendations for the notes to che translation, In printing the Sanskrt text, and especially the commentaty, I have ventured to relax the rules of sandhi, wherever tbesr strict observance would have obscured the perspicuity of the cule, or would have mixed Prākrc words with Sanskrt, as, whacever opinion may be held of the propriety of printing purely Sanskrt works with such a relaxation of grammatical nicctics, the objections can hardly apply to a Sanskrt-Prākrt work like the present, where two languages are continually intermingled, one of which by its very nature repudiates sandhi alcogether. I have also throughout followed the MSS. in writing & as the Prākrt equivalent for the Sanskrit 9, in che continental editions of the plays it has been usual to write a, but for this there is no authority, 13 as the MSS, make no difference between the T=the Sanskrt 9. and that=the Sanskrt J. The rules of Varasuchi evidently show that there was no distinction whatever berween b and v, thus in 11. 2, and m. I, we have only one of them introduced, and yet it manifestly as intended to include both, and again in 1v. 21, the preposttions apa and ava both become o, which would imply that their Prāhrt forms previous to contraction were identical. It is not so casy to determine which of the civo sounds thus absorbed the other, and whether in translation we should represent ac by b or v universally, the analogy of the modern languages would incline us to the former, but a sútra in 12 Ci Dr Trithen's remarks in the prelace to hus edition of the Mahiyuacharita X11 ·PREFACE Hemachandra given below,"s which is the only passage in which I have seen the subject alluded to, seems to favour the latter, which I have therefore adopted throughout. Where I have occasionally quoted from the Prāket of the plays to illustrate peculiar rules, my references have been made to the usual editions, except in Sakuntală' whicre I have generally quoted from the excellent edition lately published by Professor Williams, though I have added references to that of Dr. Bochtlingk. In the English translation, I have endeavoured to follow the plan wluich Dr. Ballantync has adopted in les edicion of the Laghu Kaumudi. All the peculiar features of the Hindu system are retained, while at the same time those explanations are added, which the sententious brevity of the Hindu grammarians so frequently requires. The culminating point of Hindu grammar is of course the great work of Panını; and it is not impossible that some of my rcaders, who may bc unacquainted with ches Sanskrt licerature, may find in Vararuch an introduccion to his master's more elaboratc sorh. At thic same time, the whole system of südras is so pecularly Hindus, that a short translation like the present may not be without its interest cven as a literary cutiosity I hasc to tender my sinccrc achnowledgments to Dr. Max Muller for the hind assistanet which he has so frequently given me during the course of this work, nor 13 ॥ो सरायरममपुरपनादेनो भात ॥ तार part of 57511 ETC."

·PRĀKRTPRAKASA
would I conclude without expressing my thanks to Mr.
Stephen Austin, of Hertford, for the spirited manner in
which he has undertaken the printing of this book, and has
pains nor expense in carrying it through the
press. We are indebted to him for a series of the most
clegant and accurately-printed editions of Oriental books,
which have ever been published in this country.
spared neither
Oxford, December, 1893
E.BC
XIV

·but most INTRODUCTION •Prākri' (as has been alccady observed) 'is the common name given to the various dialects which sprang up in early times in India, from the corruption of the Sanskrt ;' and, as the word is used by the grammarians, it signifies 'derived," thereby to denote its connection with the original Sanskrt. Thus, Hemachandra defines it—'prakrtih sanskrtam, tatrabhavam tata āgatam vā "prākrtam.". The later grammarians include many varieties under the name, of these are probably the subtil refinements of a later age, as, the older the grammarian is, the fewer we find the dialects to be, and the oldest, Vararuchi, has only treated of four-che Mahārāstri, the Parśāchi, the Māgadhi, and the Saura seni. , Of these the first is considered by him as the most important, and it is thus which Professor Lassen las creaced as his dialeccus przcipua.' Ics grammar is given in the first nine sections of the Prākrra Prahāśa," the remaining three sections being severally devoted to the peculiarities of the other three dialects. As the method of Hindu grammarians' is very different from that with which we are familiar in Europe, it has been thought that the following short abstract of Prāhrt Grammar in a more modern form might not be without its use to the - All the rules of Hindu grammarians are given in the form of concise aphorisms (su'ras), which hang together as on 2 tbrood A hence the game), so that frogu ntly a rule contains one or sacre words which have to be supplied in those which follow it, to complete their sense The aphorisms thenschies are expressed as briefly as possible, and to facilitate this the following abreviatio is 110 rcsorted to - mord in the genitive case is generally governed by urbane understool (1.c.insert of such a seri or letter frouler Xt ·INTRODUCTION 1ts student as an introduction to the original , while, at the same time, it is hoped that it will give a sufficient view of the language and its peculiarities to enable any reader of Sanskre readily to understand the Prākrt passages, which form so large a portion of all Hindu plays Prākıt almost always uses the Sanskrt roots , influence being chiefly restricted to alterations and elisions of certain letters in the original word. It everywhere substitutes a slurred and indistinct pronunciation for the clear and definite utterance of the older tongue, and continually affects concurrence of vowels, such as is utterly sepugnant to the genius of the Sanskrt. In the following abstract we shall first treat of the changes which it effects in the letters of the words, and then chose which it effects in the letters of the words, and then those which it effects in their declension or conjugation. SECTION I 1. Vowels. (Var. 1) Prākrt retains all the Sanskrt vowels except r (r, lr, lri) ar and as inicial, and with no consonant preceding it, becomes 71, and sometimes even when a consonant docs precede, ches 15 to be used), a word in the ablative by param (1 c, after such a word or letter, etc), a word in the instrumental by saba (ie. togerber wtb such, etc), a word in the locative is sometimes used in les proper sense (as in Var, 1 23) but more commonly it is used as a locative absolute, with pare understood (1c, when sucb 4 word or letter follows, the rule refers to that which immediately precedes it, of Panini, 1 1, 66 ) Va significs 'option'. Panini adopts many more, but these will suffice for Vararuch: 5 XV1 ·PRAKRT GRAMMAR consonant being then clided [Var. i. 30, 31). r also frequently becomes 4, s, or (especially when preceded by a consonant). For examples, cf. Var. i. 27-29. [For li, cf. i. 33). as becomes e or ai, rarely : or 7 (i. 35-39). an becomes o or asi, and sometimes u (i. 41-44). Of the reinaining vowels, e and o are no longer diplthongs, and may be long or short as to their quancity (cf. Williams' Sakuntalā, p. 228, note). Vararuchi in Section i. gives various directions for the changes of the other vowels, but these are rather confined to certain words, than expressive of gencral rules. Professor Lassen (Inst. pp. 139-144) lias laid down as a general principle that before two consonants a long vowel is shortened;" that is, a, i, and ii, become severally d, 4, and # (e and o, being common, may reme): as, magga for mārga ; diggbe for dirghs ; purva for pire. Subsidiary to this, are the two following rules: (1.1 If the long sowel is retained, one of the consonants is clıded, as isara or issurs for isvara: [1.] A short vonal before two consonants as occasionally lengthened, and one of the consonanes omiceed, as lību for pbva. cand o being favourite vowels in Prährt, i and u before a conjuncture very frequently changed to these (cf. Var. l. 12, 20). in some words an initial # becomes « (cf 1. 32); fcs puruss, a man,' se lase the anomalous purse (1. 23). We may here mention the anomalous melisa mitrs, which, though not in Vars. * Thu priaaple doci ao: scem ta be giTCT 17 Vzraudi, but <f. Arfeodar D.

·INTRODUCTION ruchi, frequently occurs in the plays [e.g. Sak., Williams', p. 183, 6). 2. Single Consonants. (Var. 11) [4.] Präkrt has no palacal or cerebral sıbılant (ti. 43), az is everywhere changed to n, unless it be followed by a dental consonant, and an initial becomes 1; with these exceptions, initial single consonants generally remain unchanged. [N.B. When a preposition or other particle is prefixed the letter ceases to be 'initial', cf. Comm., 11. 2, on suuriso.] We find a few exceptions, as una for punah, etc. in the plays, but these are not recognised in Vararucht, cf. also Var. 11. 32–45. [6.] Final single consonants are dropped, except m, and sometimes n, which become anusvāra [ıv. 6, 12). The finals of nouns often assume a or a, and so cease to be final (1v. 7--11) {c} Medsal single consonants. k. g, cb, 1. t, d, po b, v, y, (by 11. 2), may be optionally elided or retained , but t and p, when not elided, generally pass into d and vs (11.7, 15); and the clision of y (though not so given by Vararuchi) is probably absolute ; sec Lassen, The preposition prats is always written pads, sec note, p. 13. n becomes n ¿ becomes d ; d often becomes 1 (11. 20, 23) Kb, gb, ib, db, bb. (11. 27) may remain unchanged, but generally become b (when tb is not so changed, it be. 3 Oc b, as it is often printed : op this, Preface $#11 Sect. 45. sec XVIII ·PRAKRT GRAMMAR comes dh, especially in the prose“, or Sauraseni dialect, cf. X11. 3), chb, 1h, dh remain unchanged , th always becomes db; ph usually remains unchanged, but may become bb (11. 26 ; cf. Lassen, p. 208). often becomes ? (11. 30), this is universal in the Magadhi and the inferior dialects. n, m. l, s, b, remain unchanged. ś and s become s (in some words s becomes h, cf. 11. 44.). For examples, sec Var. 11. 3. Conjunct Consonants (Var. 18) It is in these that the Prākre changes are most manifest; and, as several distinct Sanskre combinations are often merged into one Prāktt form, it is sometimes not casy to recognise the original word in 1ts disguise Prākrt avoids a union of two consonants of different classes, and everywhere endeavours to reduce them to the same ; this it gencrally effects by eliding one or the other (111. 1-3), and then doubling the remaining one (1!. 50,51); but there are several exceptions in the various individual combinacions. One rule may be observed, viz , wherever a conjuncc insolvcs a sibilant, che s is represenced by the aspirace of the accompanying leccer, as in kkb for sk, sbk. or ks (11. 29). by be of the other letter bia no aspirats, as nb for sn (:11. 33). When is involved in a conjunct, it sometimes 4 The Mahärästtt dialect a more pecularly used in poetry. 15 we inler, not merely from the usage of the plays, but also from such expressions of Bhimaha's as 'opsis ibange bbaye,' on 1v. 16. and hu reference to the g1:625 in 11 Cl Lasten. Fp 370-378. wbo slo quotes from the Silutya darpana, 'aoble women should properly speak the Siuras 11, but ia dies sony (gă b2b) they 07:15 uic de Vabariigi. si

·INTRODUCTION
passes into anusvāra, as ansu for aśmh ; and the same also
applies, but rarely, to v and s; d. Var. 1v. 15. In some
cases a new vowel is inserted between the letters of the
conjunct, as barisa for harşa ; for this, sec Var. 111. 594
66.
TABLE OF PRĀKRT CONJUNCTS
The following table will show at a glance the various
Sanskrt combinations which cach Prākst one represcats.
As
given there they properly refer to those in tbe middle of
a word ; but, by dropping the first letter, they will equally
apply to those at the beginning ; thus, kkhaks wlien
medial, as jakkba for yaksa, but kh=ks wlien inicial, as
kbada for ksata , simulatly, pp=pr, medial, but p=pr,
initial.
E, CF, (296 111. 1. =97 11 2. = IF, ;
T. 111.30
Fa=ta, , 11. 1. = 12, 111. 2. 32( 27, FT), 67,
, 111. 29 =ia, FE (: 0 ), 111. I.
= I, 111, 1 =2.17, 19 2. =9, 5, 7, 11 3
12=5 , 111, 1. =#, ET, 8,11 2, 3.
G=(cfiu 56).
7=21, 111. 2. =, 11. 27.=1, 111. 3.
2
5 Kk=kt is somenmes found in the plays ; as, makka=
mukra. See Stenzler's note on Mrch.p 29. 1. 20
6 Kk=sk, sk, only in a compound word , as, tirakkara=
tiraskara (cf Lassen, P264), in all other cases it should be kkb.
The sam- holds of chch-scb

·PRAKRT GRAMMAR
= 87, iii. 27. = . iii. 3. = ( 27 ) iii. 30.
=re (CR), ce, ', iii, 40.
= Ft, ii. 3. = 9 (sometimes), iïi. 5. =9, A, T,
ii. 3. , iij. 27. = Å, iii. 17. = (e.g. sejā for sayyā.
iii. 17).
=, , iii. 28º.
3=. F. o (sometimes), xii. 7 (Sanr.)=1, X. 9
(Pais.)
= , iii. 22.= (once), iii. 23.
=, iii. ro. = 8, iii. 1. Fr, (rare), iii. 11. v. 23.
viii. 25. 26.
p=, (rare), iii. 25, 26.
=21. zi. 2.- (rare), viii. 44.
DE, TE=F5, (once), iii. 45, 46.
JUR7. iji, 1,=), Fosji. 44. =5ii. 42.-14. FET
ii. 2. =01, v. iii. 3.=77, iii. 3, with ti. 42.
=47, 8, 67, E7, (E). int. 33 ; cf. ni. 8.
=, 8, iii. 1. =TT, CA, 111. 2. =ā, 67,
ni. 3. a,
iii. 3. 24.
627=47, 57, . 8. =a, r. 2. =, n. 3. = 77, IN,
12.-5), in. I.
7 Cbebbstb, very rarely: 5. polislebbidsfroide
Sokucali (We'lisms' edition). p. 153, 1; of Lassen, f. 266.
S 10 seems to stand for ks in such won's is jins=k,174
(Lisen, p. 63), but of. rúr. 37.
9 As in the Arabial terminations, ic, vitto. siis

·INTRODUCTION ६-ग्द, व्द, Ill 1, 3. =द्म, 1 2. =द्र,६, इ. II. 3 (द्र may remain unchanged, 111.4) द्ध-ग्ध, व्ध, ill. 1, 3. =र्ध, ध्व, ill. 3. न्द =न्त (Saur., cf. Hema-ch. 261, App.C.) न्ध=ह्न (once), ill. 34. प्प-क्प, त्प, 11. 1. =प्य, 1. 2. =प्र, प, ल्प, प्ल ll. 3. -यम, 111. 49. =त्म (once), Ill. 48.10 -कफ, त्फ, प्फ (फ), स्फ. ll. I. =प्प, स्प, 1. 351 36. व्य-ग्व,ड्व, द्व, ut. 1. =र्य, व्र, Ill. 3. भग्म, ड्भ, ड्म, fl. 1. =भ्य, ill. 2. =भ्र, में, 11. 3. =द्व (once), 11.47. 7= (on this rare change, cf. note transl. j11. 53). म्म (टम, पम), न्म, 11.43. =म्य, 11. 2. =म,ल्म, 1. 3. [म्ल becomes मिल-; of. 111. 62.] म्हम, I. 320 =म. स्म (sometimes), M. 32, of. vi. 49. VII. 7. -म, 1.8. व्यय,जे, Xi. 7. (Mag). = (sometimes), 111. 18. रिर्य (sometimes), ill. 20. [f.x.8, Pass.] =P (scmetimes), 1.31. रिस, रिहर्श, प, ई, 11. 62. छ-ल्य, it. 2. =लं , ल्य (९), Ill. 3. =र्य (rarely), ill. 21. लद-ह, 111.8. 10 Pp=sp, up, only in a compound word (cf. note supra, on kk), see Lassed. P 264. XXII ·PRAKRT GRAMMAR q=2,"111. 1. =23, 111. 2. =a, 8, 111. 3. B=Li, 7, 82,69, 1v. 15. =A, TT; TA, ; 87, 111. 2, with 11 43. ='T, , श्यप,प्य स्त्र, ख, 11.3. N.B.- Where three consonants come togesher in the Sanskrt word, the semi-vowel, if there is one, is always elided, and then the remaining letters are treated according to rule, as in machchha=matsya ; unless a nasal precede, in which case the two other letters follow the usual rules, except that they are not doubled after che nasal (111. 56), as venha=usndhya, dby becoming ph by 111, 28 (the nasal prohibiting the doubling, which would otherwise have been required by 115. 50, 51). SECTION II Wc may divide Prākrt nouns into five declensions Those ending in 4 and 2 ; 2. Those in and i ; 3. Those in s and ü ; 4. Those ending originally in r ; 5. Those ending originally in any consonant. The two latter classes have only a few cases which entitle them separate declensions. Nouns in a ciclict change it to u or assume a new āra (cf. Vacaruchi, v. 31-35) ; nouns of relationship admit also a nominative singular in ā; and mātri, thus becoming māā, is declined like a feminine noun of the first declension (Vararuchi, v. 32, 35). Nouns ending in 3 to forin cermination in are OC consonant 11 Vu=dy (by 111. 1) only in such cases as uvuella far rdvesta (911. 41) wberc a radical v follows the preposition ud, cf. Lassen, P 258. We once find vzan goal du, in värsbs=duādasa, 11. 14. XXiti ·INTRODUCTION (cf. Vararuchi, 1. 6-11, 18) either drop their final letter, and so fall under one of the first three declensions (when, if neuter, they generally become masculine), as sara for saras ; or add an a (or ā if feminine) to the base, as āsısa āsts. Thus, however, chiefly applics to those cases whose terminations begin with consonants, these expedients being adopted to avoid the necessity of changing the conjunct, which the meeting consonants would produce ; in those cascs whose terminations begin with vowels, the Sansktt form is generally retained, modified by the usual Prākrt laws ; as, bhavadā (instr. of bhavat), āusā for ayusā (instr. of āyus). See Lassen, p. 298. Prakre has no dual number nor dative case (substiencing the genitive for the latter), but it has cwo terminations of the ablative plural --binto, which signifies 'from' in a causal, and sunto, which signifies from in a local, scnse. The following scheme will give the various forms of the first three declensions, which are by far the most important. As nouns in u are declined, mutatis mutandis, like those ins, no example of these is needed. DECLENSION OF NOUNS वच्छ =वृक्ष masc. (neut, out= ). Singular Plural Nom वच्छो (neur. वण) वच्छा (neut. वणाई-इ, वणाणि, Xll. 11.) Acc. घच्छ O, UT (v. 11, cf. note, trans) (neut.=nom.) Instr चच्रेण वच्छेहि-हि XXIV ·PRĀKRT GRAMMAR Singular Abl. बच्छादो-दु Gen. Loc. Voc. चच्छाहि वच्छा चच्छम वच्छे वच्छम्मि वच्छ (neue. वण) Plural चच्छाहिंतो वच्छेहितो चच्छासुतो पच्छेसुतो वच्छाणं-ण वच्छेसु-सु वच्छा (neur. वणाई -इ) अग्गि-अग्नि masc. Nom. अग्गी (neut. दहि) Acc. अग्गिं Instr. अग्गिणा Abl. अग्गीदो-दु-हि Gen. अग्गिणो अग्गिस्म Loc. अग्गिम्मि अग्गि (ncut. दहि) (neut. दहि = दधि). अग्गीओ; अग्गिणो (n. दहीइइ) अग्गिणो; अग्गी (?) अग्गीहि-हि अग्गीहितो-सुतो अग्गीण -ण अग्गीसु-सु अग्गीओ अग्गिणो (३. होइ'-इ) Voc. माला 'माला fem. Nom. माला मालाओ-उ; माला (cf. note, tr. p.50.) Acc. मालं मालाओ-उ Abl. मालादो-दु-हि मालाहिंतो सुतो मालाहिं-हि मालाइ-प मालाणण Loc. मालासु-सुं Voc. माले मालाओ उ We may observe here that feminine nouns in i and i arc not distinguished in Prākrt inflexion; and the same holds of those in # and 15. Instr. Gen. XXV ·INTRODUCTION Singular Nom. णई Acc. Abl. णईदो दु-हि Instr, णईअ-आ Gen. Loc. णइइ-ए UTE ont fem. Plural गईओ -3 ; 07 (? Lass. p. 307, notc 2.) णईहितो-सुतो णई हिं-हि णईण-णा णईसु-सु णईओ-उ "Voc. SECTION III--PRONOUNS (VAR. VI) The Prākre pronouns follow the inflexions of nouns, but also add some peculiar forms of their own. The accompanying scheme of declension, as applied to ja=ya, contains, it is hoped, all the forms which are really useful to the student. As a final consonant is always rejected in Prākrt, some of the pronominal bases are changed from their Sanskat forms before the case-affixes are subjoined, thus, kım, yad, tad, become severally ka, ja, and ta, etad becomes eda, and sometimes e (Vat. vi. 21); dam becomes sma; adas becomes amu (and sometimes aba, vi. 24). Kim, yad, tad, have also a second form in s, as ks, 11, ts, which, though generally restricted to the feminine, still furnishes some forms to the instrumental and genitive singular of the masculine and neuter. Prākrt, in fact, appears to have used the pronominal forms with great laxity; thus we find the proper masculine form of the locative (as Massim) frequently used for the feminine, as in Sakuntala (Williams' edition), pp. 36, 2; 115, 3. XXVI ·PRĀKRT GRAMMAR We may here add a few peculiar forms which Vararuchi notices; such as to and etto for tasmāt and elasmāt (vi. 10, 20); se for tasya or tasyāḥ (vi. 11); sim for teşām or tāsām; aba for the nominative singular of adas, being apparently used for the three genders. nam, though not given in Vararuchi, is frequently found in the plays for enam and enām. For ksyat, tāvat, etc., we have (by 1v. 25) the forms keddaba, kettia, teddaba, tettia, etc. ज-य (Masc.) Who.' Singular Plural Nom. जो (जं neut.) (जाई-neut.) Acc. जं Instr. जेण जिणा जेहिं Abl. जत्तो-तु जदो दु जाहिंतो जासुंतो Gen. जस्म जास जाणं-ण जेसिं Loc. जस्मि-स्मि जम्मि जेसु-सुं स्मि जहिं जत्थ Feminine Nom. जा जाओ-3जीओ-उ Acc. ज Abl. जादो-दु जीदो (३) जाहिंतो -सुंतो जीहिंतो संतो Instr. जिणा जाहिं जीहिं जाए. Gen. जस्मा जासे (१) जासांजेसिजासिं जाण- जिस्मा जोसे पजीण'-ण जीसिं Loc. जाहे जइआ जासु सुजीलु -सुं We find also a peuter geditve kise, used in the sense of 'why ?' in the plays 13 Hemachandra gives these first two forms, For jāsim, cf. vi. 4. Var, lect. जीप इ जीया 12 XXVII ·INTRODUCTION The personal pronouns are given in Vararuchi, vi. 25-53. I have enclosed in brackets those forms which probably never occur in the plays. The plurals are regu. larly formed from new bases ; as tujiha, tumba, tumma, amba, and, in some cases, majiba (cf. Hindistani tujh and msib). युष्मद् Thou,' Singular Nom. तुम" (तं) Acc. ( तं तु) तुम Iastr. ( तह) तर तुमर नुमे Plural तुज्झ तुम्हे तुझे तुम्हे धो नुज्झहिं तुम्हेहि नुम्मे हिं (तुमाइ) ते दे तुम्माहिंतो सुतो Abl. तत्तो (तइत्तो तुमादो-दु हि). Gen. (तुमा तुह तुम्झ तुम्म तुम्ह ते दे Loc. तइ (तप तुमए तुमे ) तुमम्मि वो भे तुज्माणं तुम्हाण तुमसु तुम्हेसु अस्मद् Nom. अहं (हं अह अहम्मि) अम्हे (as in prose, xii. 25) Acc. मं मम (मदम्मि) अम्हे पो (णे?) last.मे मए (मरममा) थम्हेहिं 14 In Sak. Williams'. P. 230. I. I. we find anom.tum; of. Var, I. 26,v. I. 15 In the plays more generally ture 16 In the plays more generally twt. Xxviii ·PRĀLRT GRAMMAR Singular Plural Abl. मत्तो (मइत्तो ममादो अम्हाहिंतो सुतो दु-हि) Gen. मे मम मम मह मप्झ (१) णो अम्ह अम्हाण अम्हे Loc मइ (मप ) ममम्मि अम्हेसु For the numerals, see Vararuch), vl. 54 59 SECTION IV-VERBS. Prākrt has properly only one conjugation (=the first in Sanskrt), though fragments of forms belonging to other conjugations frequently occur in the plays. The middle voice is very seldom used, and most middle verbs are conjugaced actively There is no dual number, as has been alrcady noticed in nouns. The only tenses of the active voice which remain seen to be the present, the second future, and the imperative. Below we have given the verb hasa, adding in brachets those forms which though not in Vararuchi, occur in Hemachandra, the Sanksh Sara, and the plays (of Lassen). Present Singular Plural 1. इसामि हसमि (हसम्हि ) , हसामो मु·म हसिमो मु-म हसमो -मु-म (हमम्हो -म्ह) 2. हससि 2 हसह (in prose हसघ ध) हसित्था (हसत्य) 3 हसदि" हसइ 17 On the absence of this form in Vararuchi, Lassen has a remark (p zoz) which it is important for the student of Vararuche to bear ia mind, viz, Consulto poni a grammatias formas maxime vulgares , ā poctis contra pro vario dicendi genere diversis logs alterutras prxoptari'. 3. दसति ·INTRODUCTION The middle voice has a second and third person singular, as sahase, sahade, or sabae. 3. हसंतु Imperative Ssngular Plural 1. Co (Var. vii, 18) 1 हसामो-म हसमो म (हसम्ह) 2. हससु (हसाहि हस हसस्स) 2 हसह (हसघ धं) 3. हसदु हसउ It should be added that, instead of a, e may be opcionally used beforc ary personal affix (vit. 34), as hasems, etc., hasedu, ccc. or, in other words, as is only ay contracted, Prākrt allows the verbs to imitate partially the tenth conjugation in Sanskrt. The future has several forms in Präkor. [4] That most in use has the followiog terminacions: Singular J. Fai FETITA. 2. Fafe Plural 1. स्सामो. 2. स्सध,स्सह 3. स्सति These are added to the root with the augment s, as basissam, etc. The ss is, of course, only the Prākrt form of the Sanskrt ty. [b] A second forin gives the anomalous chcbh for the characteristic ss of the future, as socbcbbam or socbchbissam, from śrs, vocbchbam or vocbchbossam, from vach (cf. Vat., vu. 16, 17.) [1] A third form changes the ssa to be, as ia basıbımı, We have also such forms of the first person singulas and plural as bassbimi and basshamo. (Note also such forms as käbam, dåben, from kr and da, Var., S. 16) 3. स्सदि ctc. XXX ·PRAKRT GRAMMAR [For the very care forms with the inserted 114 and 7jă, in Var., vii, 20-22, as also for the rare preterite in ia and bia, in Var., V11. 23-24, See Lassen's Inst., pp. 353-358 ] The Prākrt passive (v11. 8, 9) uses the active terminations, but, for the characteristic y, it prefixes ia or 1934, as padhiar or padhazai for patbyate. Occasioually the of the Sanskrt form is retained, in which case it is of course assimilated to the preceding consonant, as gammai gamyate, dissağ, or more commonly disai, for drśyate (cf. also viii. 57. 58.) an There are two forms of the causal, one in which ay, che Sanskrt addition to the roor, becomes e, as kāred: from kara=kr (an a in the first syllable of the root becomingã by Var, vil. 26), the ocher in which ăve (ābe?) is added, as kārävede or karäveds (che a of the first syllable being only optionally lengthened, v. 27, cf. note, transl) The infinitive ends in tum, if a consonant precedes (which is of course assimilated), and dum, if a vowel precedes, as vattum, from vacb, nedumn, from n, the latter being the favourite form, or € 15 ofren inserted after a final consonant to produce it, the d is also often elided, as baseum or basium, from bas. The indeclinable participle in tua becomes tūna or ina, as kaina, from kā=kr, that in ya becomes 54, and is usually the only form found in prose, even in the simple verb, as genbra, from genb= grah, In prose we find a few instances of tuã relaxed into dua, as gadra for gatva, etc. (xi :o). The present participle actic ends in ania (or ents by vis. 34), as, padbania, reciting Vararucht (v11. 11) allows a tem. form pad bas as well as padbanti. The present XXXI ·in INTRODUCTION participle middle ends in māna (with fem. mani or mänä, v. 24.) Thc passive allows the termination nta as well as well as māna, and usually prefixes 1734. The passive past participle generally adopts the Sanskrt form, and modifies this by the usual laws, as suda or sua=sruta, laddha=labdba, the augment s is frequently inserted (v11. 32) The future passive participle in ya, generally assimilates the y to the preceding consonant, that in aniya becomes cither ania or anijj4. On the particles, etc. (Var. ix.) we have little to note, cxcept that ste becomes tts, in which case a preceding 2, 7, or u is shortened, kbalu becomes kekhu after a short of commonls vowel, and khu after a long vowel, and similarly eva becomes 1jeuva or jeva sva usually becomes via or via, for ape we have us or bs The above little sketch of Prākre grammar will, it is hoped, contain all that the Sanskrt student will require to enable him to understand the Prakrt of Kalıdāsa or Bhavabhūti, of course that of the Michchhakatıkā is much harder. I cannot conclude better than with Professor Lassen's words, "Legitima veteris linguz cognitio non multa dubia relinquer, caetera tum tenor locorum, tum tradita ā grammaticis doctrina, illustrabit, quz deinde incerta remaneant, accurata grammatica investigatio plerumque cnodabit " 18 It is important to bear in mind that e, o, and a short vowel followed by anusvara are considered common in Prakrt prosody The compiler would add that he originally made a similar one for kis own use and found it sufficient for his purpose in reading Dc Trithen's edition of the Mahāvıracharita, although there the Prakrit passages have no Sanskrit explanations subjoined.

·॥ श्रीगणेशाय नमः ॥ जयति मदमुदितमधुकरमधुररुताकलनकृणितापाङ्गः। करविहितगण्डकण्डविनोदसुखितो गणाधिपतिः ॥१॥ वररुचिरचितप्राकृतलक्षणसूत्राणि लक्ष्यमार्गेण । बुवा चकार वृत्तिं संक्षिप्तां भामहः स्पां ॥२॥ ॥आदेरतः ॥१॥ अधिकारो ऽयं। यदित ऊर्द्ध मनुक्रमिष्याम आदेरतः स्थाने तद्भवतीत्येचं वेदितव्यं । भादेरित्येतद् भा परिच्छेदसमाप्ते। अत इतिच आ अकारविधानात् । अत इति तकारग्रहणं सवर्णनिवृत्त्यर्थं'। ॥ मा समृद्धशादिपु या ॥२॥ समृद्धि इत्येवमादिपु शब्देष्यादेरकारस्य आकारी भवति वा। समिद्धी सामिद्धी। पअडं पाअडं। अहिजाई आहिजाई। मणं- सिणी माणसिणी। पटिवा पाडिवआ। सरिच्छं सारिच्छं। पडिसिद्धी पाडिसिद्धी। , पसुत्तं पासुत्तं। पसिद्धी पासिद्धी। अस्मी आसो॥ समृद्धि। प्रकट | अभिजाति। मनषिणी। प्रतिपत्। सदृक्ष। प्रतिस्पर्खिन् । प्रसुप्त । प्रसिद्धि। अश्व ॥ आकृतिगणो ऽयं ॥ ॥ इदीपत्पकस्वमवेतसव्यजनमृदगाङ्गारेषु ॥ ३ ॥ ईपदादिपु शब्देपु आदेरतः स्थाने इकारादेशोभवति । बेति - । 2 श्रत- deest In A, f. Panini, I., 1,70. So C; ABDEW आरमो. 3 MSS. afarafd; cf. Lass. Inast., P• 265.

·२ आश्चर्य । ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ विअणो। निवृत्तं ॥ इसि'। पिक। सिविणो। वेडिसो। मुदंगो। इंगालो॥ लोपो ऽरण्ये ॥४॥ अरण्यशब्दे आदेरतो लोपो भवति ।। रण । ॥ शय्यादिषु ॥ ५ ॥ शय्या इत्येवमादिपु शब्देपु आदेरत एकारादेशो भवति ॥ सेजा। सुंदेरं'। उक्केरो। तेरहो। अच्छे । ऐरन्त। वेल्लो ।। शय्या। सौन्दर्य। उत्कर । त्रयोदश। पर्यन्त । पलि।। ॥ ओ बदरे देन ॥ ६॥ बदरशदे दकारेण लहादेरत ओत्वं भवति॥ वोर ॥ ॥ लवणनवमल्लिकयोर्वेत ॥ ७ ॥ लवणनवमल्लिकयोरादेरतो वकारेण सह ओकारः स्यात् ।। लोणी जोमलिआ॥ ॥ मयूरमयूखयोो वा ॥ ८॥ मयूर मयूख इत्येतयोयूशब्देन सहादेरत ओत्वं वा भवति ।। मोरो मऊरो। मोहो मऊहो।। ॥ चतुर्थीचतुर्दश्योस्तुना ॥९॥ एतयोस्तुना सहादेरत ओत्वं भवति या॥ वोत्थी चउत्थी। चोदी चउद्दही॥ ।। अदातो यथादिपु वा ॥ १० ॥ अत इति निवृत्तं स्थान्तरनिर्देशात् । यथा इत्येवमादिप्वातः स्थाने अकारादेशो भवति वा॥ जह जहा। तब तहा। पत्थरो 4 (and Hems-ch.) इसि. 5 AB विडिसो न.11.8 6 B मिदंगो, 7 MSS.-रो. 8 स्था- deest A.

·॥ ॥ प्रथमः परिच्छेदः ॥ पत्थारो। पउअं पाउ। तलवेण्टअंतालवेण्टों। उक्खों उक्खा। चमरं चामरं। पहरो पहारो। चडु चाडु। दवग्गी' दाबग्गी। खइ खाइ। संठविरं संठाविरं । हलिओ हालिओ यथा । तथा। प्रस्तार । प्राकृत । तालवृन्तक । उत्खात । चामर । प्रहार । चाटु। दावाग्नि। खादित। संस्थापित । हालिक ॥ इत्सदादिपु ॥ ११ ॥ सदा इत्येवमादिपु आत इकारो भवति वा ॥ सइ लआ। तइ तआ। जइ जआ॥ सदा। तदा। यदा।। ॥ इत पत्पिण्डसमेषु ॥ १२॥ पिण्ड ईत्येवंसम्मपु इकारस्य एकारादेशो भवति वा। पेण्ड पिण्ड । णेहा णिहा। सेंदूरं सिंदूरं । धम्मेल्ल धम्मिल्ल । " चिंधं । वेण्हू विह। पेट्ट पिट्ठ॥ पिण्ड। निद्रा। सिंदूर। धन्मिल्ल । चिहू । विष्णु। पिष्ट । समग्रहणं संयोगपरस्योपलक्षणार्थ ॥ ॥ अत्पथिहरिद्रापृथिवीपु॥ १३ ॥ पथ्यादिषु शन्देष्विकारस्य अकारो भवति ॥ पहो। हलद्दा । पुहवी॥ ॥ इतेस्तः पदादेः॥१४॥ पदादेरितिशणस्य यस्तकारस्तस्मात्परस्य इकारस्य अकारो भवति॥ इस अह अण्णहवअण। इअ विभसंती चिरं॥ इति पश्य तान्यथावचनं ॥ इति विकसंत्यश्चिरं ॥ पदादेरिति - 9 So ACDI, B, m.l. 10 Bहल्लियो. 1 A चे विध Wom.; fll. 34. 12 A (not C) adds va 13 A उअह अणसवणं B • अम्मह- नवनार D अण्वश्रणं V इभ उवह भंगहायश्रण A has no Sans. explanacion, 14 A विमंतिउ C fantas; W has fastosta) = fract: AC have no Sans. explanation.

·॥प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ वचनादिह न.भवति ॥ पिओत्ति ॥ प्रिय इति ॥ ॥ उदिक्षुवृश्चिकयोः ॥ १५॥ इक्षुवृश्चिकयोरित उत्वं भवति॥ उच्चू। विटुओ" ॥ || ओच द्विधाकृतः ॥१६॥ कृञ्धातुप्रयोगे द्विधाशब्दस्यौकारो" भवति। चकारादुत्वं द्विधाकृतं । दोहाइ। दुहाइअं॥ द्विधा क्रियते। दोहाइजइ । दुहाइजइ ।। ॥ ईत्सिंहजिङ्कयोश्च ॥ १७ ॥ एतयोरादेरिकारस्य ईकारो भवति ॥ सीहो"। जीहा ।। त्तकारोऽनुक्तसमुच्चयार्थः। तेन वीसत्थ वीसम्भ इत्येवमादिपु ईत्वं भवति॥ ॥ इदीतः पानीयादिषु ॥ १८॥ पानीय इत्येवमादिव्यादेरीकारस्य इकारो भवति ॥ पाणि । अलिअं। वलि। तआणि" । करिसो। दुइ। तइथे। गहिर। पानीय। अलीक। व्यलोक। तदानीं। द्वितीय। तृतीय। गभीर ॥ ॥ एनीडापीडकीहगीदृशेषु ॥ १९ ॥ नीडादिषु ईकारस्य एकारी भवति ॥ णे। आपेलो"। केरिसो। परिसो॥ करीप। - 15 A पिनोत्ति. 16 A विधुओ W विश्चयो; D n.l.cf. Lass. Inst., p. 110. 17 DW add इत: before श्रोकारो. 18 इ (१) CVई; BD ई. 19AW सीहो; न. Lass. Insti, P., 270. 20 BDW add विलिब्रीडितं. 21 A ( nor C) सरि 22 A विइयं; f. Lass. Inst., p. 257. 23 Ail but BE णेड. 24 BD E: of. 11., 16, and Lass. Inst., App., PP49.70.

·- । पुस्तक । ॥ प्रथमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ उत ओत्तुण्डरूपेषु ॥ २० ॥ तुण्ड इत्येवंरूपेषु आदेरफारस्य ओकारो भवति ॥ तोण्डं । मोत्ता। पोस्तरो। पोत्थओ। लोद्धओ। कोट्टिमं॥ तुण्ड । मुक्ता। पुष्कर। लुब्धका कुट्टिम ॥' रूपग्रहणं संयोगपरोपलक्षणार्थ॥ ॥ उलयले ल्या या ॥२१॥ उलूगलशब्दे लूशन्देन सह उकारस्य ओकारो भवति वा । ओफ्पल। उलूद्दल 1. अन्मुकुटादिपु ॥ २२॥ मुकुट इत्येवमादिपादेकारस्य स्थाने अकारो भवति ॥ । मउल। गरुअं। गई। जदिष्टिलो"। सोअमल। अपरि ॥ मुकुट। मुकुल। गुरु । गुवो। युधिष्ठिर। सौकुमार्य । उपरि॥ ॥ इत्पुरुषे रोः ॥ २३ ॥ पुरुशन्दे यो रेफस्तस्य उकारस्य इकारो भवति ॥ पुरिसो॥ ॥ उदूतो मधुके ॥ २४ ॥ मध्फराम्दे ऊफारस्य उकारो भवति ॥ मह ॥ ॥ भरले या लस्य द्वित्वं ॥२५॥ उपलशब्दे ऊफारस्य अकारो भवति यातत्संयोगेन लकारस्य हित्वं ॥ दुआ दुऊलं ।। । एम्नू पुरे ॥ २६ ॥ नपुरशन्दे ऊकारन्य एकारो भवति ॥ उर'। :5 CDT IT 97 and similarly in Comm. 26 रमत, DC उगल. 7 Vand यश निरनं ७ अधिचितो.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ । ॥ऋतोऽत् ॥२७॥ आदेक्टकारस्य अकारो भवति ॥ तणं। धणा। म। को। चद्धो। चसहो ॥ तृण। घृणा। मृत। कृत। वृद्ध। वृषभ ॥ ॥ इटप्यादिषु ॥२८॥ ऋष्यादिषु शब्देषु आदेकारस्य इकारो भवति ॥ इसी। विसी। गिट्ठी। दिट्ठी। सिट्ठी। सिंगारो। मिश्रको। भिंगो। भिंगारो। हिअ। विइण्हों। विहिरं। किसरो। किचा। विंछुओ। सिआलो। किई। किसी। किया। ऋपि। वृपी। गृष्टि। दृष्टि। सृष्टि। शृंगार। मृगांक। भृग। भंगार। हृदय । वितृष्ण। हित । शर। कृत्या। वृश्चिक । इटगाल। कृति । कृपि। कृपा ॥ ।। उहत्वादिषु ॥ २९ ॥ ऋतु इत्येवमादिपु आदेत उकारो भवति ॥ उदू । मुणालो। पुहवी। बुंदावणं । पाउसो । पउत्ती। विउदं"। संवुदं। णिवुदं । घुत्तंतो। परहओ। माउओ। जामाउगो ॥ ऋतु। मृणाल । पृथियो। बुंदावन। प्राप्। विवृत। प्रवृत। संवृत्ति। निर्वृत । वृत्तांत । परभृत । मातृक । जामातक । इत्येवमादयः॥ ॥ अयुक्तस्य रि॥३०॥ वर्णा तरेण युक्तस्यादेकारस्य रिकारो भवति ।। रिण। रिद्धो। रिच्छो॥ ॥ चिद्युक्तस्यापि ॥ ३१ ॥ वर्णातरेण युक्तस्यापि कचिहकारस्य रिफारो भवति ॥ एरिसो। सरिसो। तारिसो॥ 29 A (not C) विवादो. 30 ADW गिछुश्रो; C विंधुओ; B पिंपभो; f.i, 15. 31 BW पियुदं; f. I., 7. gives the Súrra mifa. 32A ·॥ प्रथमः परिच्छेदः॥ ।। वृक्ष वेन रुर्वा ॥२२॥ वृक्षशब्देन वशन्देन सह ऋकारस्य रुकारो भवति वा ॥ क्यो। वच्छो॥ व्यवस्थितविभापाशापनात् छत्वपक्षे न भवति सत्वपक्षे तु नित्यमेव भवति । । लता पलत इलिः ॥ ३३ ॥ क्लृप्तशब्दे टुकारस्य इलीत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ किलितं ॥ तदेवमादेशांतरविधानात् प्राकृते ऋकारटुकारौ न भयतः ॥ ॥ एत इवेदनादेवरयोः ॥२४॥ वेदनादेवरयोरेकारस्य इकारो भवति" विमणा दिशरो" चामहणानुवृत्तः कचिद् घेणा। देअरो। इत्यपि ।। ॥ ऐत एत् ।। ३५॥ आदेरैकारस्य पफारो भवति ॥ सेलो। सेन्च। परावणो। केलासो। तेल्लोया ॥ शैलाशैत्या ऐरायत । कैलास । बैलोक्य । ॥ दैत्यादिप्या ।। ३६ ॥ दैत्यादिपु शब्देषु ऐकारस्य भइ इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ दश्यो। चात्तो। भदरवो। सदर पर। यहदेसो। यादेदो। कायो। यासादो। पासिमो। वासंपामण दैत्य । चैत्र भैरवस्वेर । पर। देश । देव । तया पैशाय । शिफ पैशम्पायन । इत्याददः ।। ॥दघे या ॥३७॥ यशदे ऐफारस्य भर इत्ययमादेशो भवति पा॥ दाय। देव्य ॥ अनादेशपले नोडादित्याद् द्वित्यः" । ॥ सन्धये ॥३८॥ । - Cuſt. 33 AC. 34 A (no: C) very costure in else Comm. and crumple.. 35 D it'; AB ini; f. Last. Arr..P. 66. Whs सेय. 36t... 5..

·८ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ सैन्धवशब्दे ऐकारस्य इकारो भवति ॥ सिंघवं ।। ॥ईद्धर्य ॥ ३९॥ धैर्यशब्दे ऐकारस्य ईकारो भवति ॥ धीरं ।। ॥ोतोऽद्वा प्रकोष्ठ कस्य वः॥ ४०॥ प्रकोप्टशब्दे ओकारस्य अकारो भवति को। तत्संयोगेनच कका- रस्य वत्व ॥ पवट्ठो पओट्टो पओट्टो ॥ " औत ओत् ॥४१॥ औफारस्य आदेरोकारो भवति ॥ कोमुई। जोवणं । कोत्थुहो। कोसंबी ॥ कौमुदी। यौवन । कौस्तुभः । कौशाम्बी ॥ ॥पौरादिप्शउ ॥४२॥ पौर इत्येवमादिपु शब्देषु औकारस्य अउ इत्ययमादेशो भवति । पडरो। कउरणो"। पउरिसो॥ पौर। कौरव । पौरुप । आकृति. गणोऽयं ॥ कौशले विकल्पः ॥ कोसलो। कउसलो ।। कौशल। ॥ आच गौरवे ॥४३॥ गौरवशाब्दे औकारस्य आकारो भवति। चकारादउत्वंच ।। गारव। गउरख ॥ ॥ उत्सौंदर्यादिषु ॥४४॥ सौदर्य इत्येवमादिपु औकारस्य उकारो भवति ॥ संदेर । मुंजा-अणो। सुयो। कुम्सेमभो। दुब्बारिओ" ॥ सौदर्य । मोजायन । शौ। कौक्षेयक । दौवारिक । ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्रारतमहाशे अग्विधिनाम ॥ ॥ प्रथमः परिच्छेदः॥ B पउरिमो; 37 BD यदरवा. 38 AV पउरूसो; 39 Only W las as a new sutra. 4. CV पारियो. CDपउरसो. 40 ACIV सुंदेरो.

·॥ द्वितीयः परिच्छेद ॥ ॥ अथ द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ अयुक्तस्यानादौ ॥१॥ अधिकारो ऽयं । इत उत्तरं यद्वक्ष्यामस्तयुक्तस्य व्यंजनस्थानादौ वर्तमानस्य कार्य भवतीत्येवं वेदितव्यं। वक्ष्यति कादीनां लोपः॥ मउड़ ॥ अयुक्तस्येति किं। आयो। अको ॥ अनादाविति किं । कमलं ॥ अयुक्तस्येति। आ परिच्छेदसमाप्तेः ॥ अनादावितिच। आ जकारविधानात् ॥ ॥ कगचजतदपयवां प्रायो लोपः ॥२॥ कादीनां नवानां यर्णानामयुक्तानामनादी वर्तमानानां प्रायो चाहल्येन लोपो भवति ॥ कस्य तावत् । मउलो। उलं' । गस्य । साअरो। अरं ॥ चय। यअणं। मूई॥ जस्य। गो। रअदं ।। तस्य । कविणं ॥दस्य । गया।मगो पस्य । पाई। विउलं। मुउरिसो।। सुपुरुष' इति यद्यपि उत्तरपदम्य पुरुषशब्दस्यादिस्तथापि लोपो भवतीत्यनेन शापयति मृत्तिकारः यथा उत्तरपदादिरनादिरे- यम्य । पाउणां'। अर्ण ॥ यस्य। जी। दिअहो।। मुकुल । नकुल । सागर । नगर। वचन । सूची। गज । रजत । कृत। वितान । गदा। मद। कपि। विपुल । सुपुरम । वायुना । नयन । जीय। दिवस। प्रायोग्रहणाधन श्रुतिसुगमस्नि तत्र न भवत्येव ॥ सुपुसुमं । विभगाणे । सनाव अवजलं'। शनुलशादो। पारो । असो! । वेति ।। 3 IA (altered from its old reading) : W 501. TAC महारविमान : D प्राप. .S. 31. WOतो. 6 For = 360 18., 53 AAC पुगि.5HDमोकाय. DVीमो. 78 गरं; D गग्गरं. 8 DW (and Actimally) ..

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ 11 सवहमाण ॥ सुकुसुम । प्रियगमन | सचाय । अपजल अतुल । आदर। अपार । अयशस्। सवहमान ॥ अयुक्तस्येत्येव ॥ सको। मग्गो ॥ शक । मार्ग ॥ अनादावित्येव ॥ कालो। गंधो ॥ काल। गंध ॥ ॥ यमुनायां यस्य ॥३॥ यमुनाशब्दे मकारस्य लोपो भवति ॥ जउणा ॥ ॥ स्फटिकनिकपचिकुरेषु कस्य हः ॥४ अनादाविति वर्तते । एपु कस्य इकारो भवति । लोपापयादः ॥ फलिहो। णिहसो। चिहरी ॥शीकरे भः ॥५॥ शीकरशन्दे ककारस्य भकारो भवति ॥ सीभरो।। चंद्रिकायां मः॥३॥ ॥ चंद्रिकाशब्दे ककारस्य मकारो भवति ॥ चंदिमा ।। ॥ कात्यादिपु तो दः॥७॥ ऋतु इत्येवमादिपु तकारस्य दकारो भवति ॥ उदू। रअदं । आश्रदो। णिव्युदो। आउदी। संदी। सुश्दो। आइदी। हदो। संजदो । घिउद । संजादो। पदि" । पडिवद्दी ॥ ऋतु । रजत । 10 अथा, etc. अवजलं D अप- 9 Altered to सववाण in A, D has मुक्सणं. DW add several more examples not in ABC, c.g., It A निकश DW give the sutra स्फटिकनिक्पविक्ल- विकटचिकुरेषु कम्य ह. and add in the Comm. the Prakrt forms विहलो। विहहो। (D विहरो). 12 B omits पाउदी। पाइदी। संजादो | 13 B पिवुदं. 14 A संपदी. 15 AC पदिवत्ती ; DW afcatt; E ficat B omits it; tlis ex cannot properly belong to this sútra, yet it seems to be confirmed by the Sanksh.

·॥ द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः॥ आगत । निवृति। आवृति। संवृति। सुरुति। आकृति। हत। संयत । विवृत । संयात। संप्रति। प्रतिपत्ति ॥ ॥प्रतिसरयेतसपताकासु डा" ॥ ८ ॥ एषु शब्देपु तकारस्य डकारो भवति । लोपापवादः॥ पडिसरो। वेडिसो। पडाआ ॥ ॥ वसतिभरतयोईः ॥९॥ वसतिभरतशब्दयोस्तकारस्य हकारो भवति ॥ यसही। भरहो । गर्मिते णः ॥ १० ॥ गर्मितशब्दे तकारस्य णकारो भवति ॥ पब्भिण" ॥ । पेरायतेच ॥ ११॥ ऐरावतशब्दे तकारस्य णकारो भवति ॥ परायणो ।। ॥प्रदीप्तकर्दयदोददेषु दो लः ॥ १२ ॥ एषु शन्देषु दकारस्य लकारो भवति ॥ पलितं। कलंयो। दोदलो। ॥ गद्गदे रः ॥१३॥ गद्दशब्दे दफारस्य रेफादेशो भवति ॥ गागरो॥ ॥ संख्यायांच॥१४॥ संरयायाचिनि शादे यो दफारस्तस्य रेफादेशो भयति ।। Sira, rule 71. DD घोहलो; 16 W teads प्रतिमाप्रतिमरप्रतिवरतगपतामु::. 17 BDभिपी. 18A omits दो. 19 AE दोहसो: W-: B then adds मनादाविलगतः दोहर इलाममारमन लकारः पितु दोहदेन परयगान परः। पोहत पम्पपरि- दादर (): G.S.40. and S. 38, note theSankiti.Sita Is stule (७)ो सागमा संगनं। पोरन': sec Lism. Inma, p. 197. ..

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः 21 ॥ । F M एभारहः । चारह । तेरह ॥ एकादश । द्वादश । त्रयोदश ॥ अयुक्तस्येत्येव चउद्दह ॥ पो वः ॥१५॥ पकारस्यायुक्तस्यानादिवर्तिनो चकारादेशो भवति ॥ सावो। सवहो। उलवो। उक्सग्गो ॥ शाप । शपथ । उलप । उपसर्ग ।। प्रायोग्रहणाद्यत्र लोपो न भवति तत्राय विधिः ॥ ॥ आपीडे म ॥ १६॥ आपीडशब्दे पकारस्य मकारो भवति ॥ आमेलो ॥ ॥ उत्तरीयानीययोजो वा ॥ १७ ॥ उत्तरीयशब्दे अनीयप्रत्ययांतेच यस्य जो भवति चा॥ उत्तरी। उत्तरिज"। रमणीअं। रमणिज भरणी। भरणिज॥ ॥ छायायां हः ॥१८॥ छायाशब्दे यकारस्य हकारो भवति ॥ छाहा ॥ ॥ कबंधे वो मः॥ १९ ॥ कचंधशन्दे वकारस्य मझारो भवति ॥ कमंधो॥ ॥टो डः॥२०॥ टस्यानादिवर्तिनो डकारो भवति ॥ पडो। विडयो ।। ॥ मटाशकटकैटमेपु" ढंः" ।। २१ ॥ एतेपु टकारस्य ढकारो भवति ॥ सढा । सअढो फेढयो। 7 22 A on. 20A-रई; W-हो. 21 Added from BDV. 43 Vामीलो. 24 A जो; BC जो; DE यस्य जो; W यस्य जो. 25 ACIV ओ; BD जो. 26 A reads tyam in all the examples: W expressly adds pakse yalopah. 27 BD SHE'. 28 A- -सकट.. 29 BEV (and probably AD, but these are nor so ·॥ द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ स्फटिके लः।।२२।। स्फटिकवन्दे टकारस्य लकारो भवति ।। फलिहो। ॥ डस्य च ॥२३॥ डकारस्यायुक्तस्यानादिभूतस्य लकारो भवति ॥ दालिमं । तलाअं । बलही। प्राय इत्येवं ॥ दाडिमं । वडिस णिविडो । ॥ठो ढः ॥२४॥ ठकारस्यायुक्तस्यानादिभूतस्य ढकारो भवति ॥ मढं। जढरं । कढोरं ॥ ॥ संकोठे ल्लः ॥२५॥ कोठशन्दे ठकारस्य लकारो भवति ॥ अंकोलो।। ॥ फोभः॥ २६ ॥ फकारस्यायुक्तस्यानादिभूतस्य भकारो भवति॥ सिभा। सेभालिआ। सभरी। सभलं॥ ॥ सपथधामां दः ।। २७ ।। पादोनां पंचानामयुक्तानामनादियतिनां इकारो भवति ॥ सस्य तावत् ॥ मुई। मेहला ॥ यस्य ।। मेहो । जहणो" ॥ यस्य ॥ गादा। सयदो॥धस्य ।। रादा । पहिरो॥ भस्य ।। सदा। रासदो।। प्राय इत्येव ॥ पगलो. पलंधणो" अधीरो। अधणो। उपलध्यभारो॥ - * ३०BDW clear) : and similarly in the ex. . E has in Sur. In: tlic Sanksh. Sira has e; sec Less. Inst.. p. 209. and probably A nr. 31 A om. 32 WDE lisse alic! throughout; the other MISS. sary between and zich. Lass. Inst. p. 209. 33 BW 1; BDW a'd 1777-777. 34 मद्रो.. 35ACDE जदयो: Bw. 360brure in 11, buc plain in DE. 37 Plain in CDI: DE ad ilic Sanm interpre: W 111 seycral ditierent esamples.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ मुख । मेखला। मेघ । जघन । गाथा । शपथ । राधा। बधिर । समा। रासभ । प्रखल । प्रलंघन । अधीर। अधन । उपलब्धभाव ॥ ।। प्रथमशिथिलनिषधेपुटः" ।। २८ ।। एतेषु यथयोकारो भवति ॥ पढमो। सिढिलो। णिसढो। णिसढो॥ कैटमे चः ॥२९॥ कैटभशब्दे भकारस्य वकारो भवति ।। कुढवो ॥ ॥ हरिद्रादीनां रो ल. ॥ ३० ॥ हरिद्रा इत्येवमादीनांरेफस्य लकारो भवति ॥ हलद्दा। चलणो। मुहलो। जहिट्ठिलो। सोमालो" । फलणं । अंगुली। ईगालो। चिलादो"। फलिहा। फलिहो॥ हरिद्रा। चरण । मुखर । युधिष्ठिर । सुकुमार। करुण । अंगुरी। अंगार। किरात। परिखा। परिघ । इत्येवमादयः॥ ॥ आदेर्यो जः ॥३१॥ अनादेरिति निवृत्तं ॥ आदिभूतस्य यकारस्य जकारो भवति ।। जट्टो । जसो । जक्सो। यष्टि । यशस् । यक्ष ॥ ॥ यक्ष्यां ल.॥३२॥ यष्टिशब्दे वकारस्य लकारो भवति ।। लट्ठी ॥ 38 We have o plainly throughout, and so mostly A ; but the other MSS. confuse it with a, D has twice ; of. Lass. Inst., p. 209, and Sanksh. Sára, S. 60. 39 What 40 A हलिहा, but the s is a later insertion, and contradicts 1., 13, and the other MSS. 41 So need ABCDE Hemach., and the Prāk Sany. W has Snumálo ; note translation page 16. W कि.. 43D महजो and adds the Sans. मधुयष्टि ; f. Lass., Inst., p. 100%; W A विलादो; om.

·। ॥ द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ किराते चः ॥ ३३ ॥ किरातशन्दे आदेर्वर्णस्य चकारो भवति ॥ चिलादो । ॥ कुछ सः ॥ ३४॥ कुअशब्दे आदेवर्णस्य सकारो भवति ।। सुनो। । दोलादंण्डदशनेपु डः ।। ३५ ॥ एपु आदेर्वर्णस्य डकारो भवति ॥ डोला" ! डंडो डसणो॥ ॥ परुपपरिघपरिसासु फा" ॥ ३६॥ एतेप्यादेवर्णस्य फकारो भवयि ।। फरसो । फलिहो। फलिहा॥ ॥ पनसे ऽपि ॥ ३७ ।। पनसशन्देऽपि पकारस्य फकारो भवति ।। फणसो॥ ॥ विसिन्यां भः ॥ १८॥ विसिनीशब्दे आदेर्वर्णस्य भकारोभवति ॥ भिसिणी ।। त्रीलिंग- निर्देशादिह न भवति ॥ विसं" ॥ ॥ मन्मथे चः॥ ३९॥ मन्मथशन्दे पादेवर्णस्त वकारो भवति ॥ यम्मदो । । लाहले पाः ॥४०॥ लाहलशन्दे आदेर्वर्णस्य णकारो भवति ॥णाहलो" ॥ ॥ पशावकलापांना छ. ॥४॥ च 44 BCI,W A not plain. 45 The 7 is plain im BCD ,W has 46 A डोलो. 47 पुरुष- 48 DE om. suitca 37 and Comm 49 After sútra 38, W gives a suítra, found also in Hema-ch., (of. sutr140) लाहललोगतलांगूलेपु पा C with eणाहलो । लाहलो । एगना । लागलो। गुन150 ABC साबले , DE सोहले, W लाहने ( Comm. सहान). SL ABC राहतो,DE हिलो; Wणो; f. Las. Inst,P 197 and noses to s 12 and , 35, supr. L ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ एतेपामादेर्वर्णस्य छकारो भवति ॥ छट्ठी। छम्मुहो। छावओ। छत्तवलो ॥ पष्ठी । पण्मुख । शावक । सप्तपर्ण ॥ ।'नो णः सर्वत्र ॥ ४२ ।। आदेरिति निवृत्तं। सर्वत्र नकारस्य णकारो भवति ॥ गई। कणों । वअणं । माणुसो । ॥ शपोः सः॥४६॥ सर्वत्र शकारपकारयोः सकारो भवति ॥ शस्य ॥ सद्दो"। णिसा। अंकृसो ॥ पस्य ॥ संढो । वसहो। कसा। ॥ दशादिपु हः ।। ४४॥ दश इत्येवमादिपु शकारस्य हकारो भवति ॥ दह" । एआरह । वारह। तेरह ॥ ।। संज्ञायां वा ॥४५॥ संज्ञायां गम्यमानायां वा दशशन्दे शस्य हत्यं भवति ॥ दहमुहो दसमुहो। दहवल दसवलो। दहरहो दसरहो॥ ॥ दिवसे सस्य ।। ४६ ॥ दिवसशन्दे सकारस्य हकारो भवति ॥ दिअहो । ।। स्नुपायां पाहः ॥४७॥ स्तुपाशब्दे पकारस्य पहकारो भवति ॥ सोण्हा ॥ ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्रारतप्रकाशे अयुक्तवर्णविधिर्नाम द्वितीयः परिच्छेदः॥ 52 W only नो णः. 53 Altered in A to मासिणी; BDW add अयुधस्पेति किं । कन्दरा । अन्तरं 54 A सदो. 55A अंसो. 56W मंटो; the other MSS. are indistinct between -टो end -टो of il., 24. 57 Wदहो etc. 58 DW add चा. 59 DW add दिमसो; f. Lass. Insta, p. 219. 60 Wन्ह. 61 BD add a reference to i., 20.

·॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ अथ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ उपरिलोपः कगडतद्पषसां ॥१॥ कादीनामष्टानां युक्तस्योपरिष्ठितानां लोपो भवति ॥ कस्य तावत् ॥ भत्तं । सित्थओ । गस्य । मुद्धो। सिणिद्धौ ॥ डस्य । खग्गो। सन्जों। तस्य । उप्पलं । उप्पाओ॥दस्य । मुग्गा । मुग्गरो॥ पस्य । सुत्तो। पजत्तो ॥ पस्य । गोठ्ठी। णिठ्ठरो॥ सस्य । खलिई। हो॥ भक्त । सिक्थक । मुग्ध । स्निग्ध । खङ्ग। पड्ज । उत्पल । उत्पात । मुद्ग । मुद्गर । सुप्त । पर्याप्त । गोष्ठी। निष्ठुर। स्खलित। । । स्नेह ॥ ॥ अधो मनयां ॥२॥ मकारनकारयकाराणां युक्तस्याधः स्थितानां लोपो भवति । मस्य । सोमं । रस्मो। जुग्गं। बग्गी ॥ नस्य ॥ णग्गो॥ यस्य ॥ सोम्मी। जोग्गो॥ ॥ सर्वत्र लवरां ॥३॥ लकारवकाररेफाणां युक्तस्योपर्यधास्थितानां लोपो भवति ॥ लस्य ॥ उका। वालं। विकयो ॥ वस्य ॥ लोओ पिक। रस्थ ॥ अक्को । सको ॥ उल्का । वल्कल । विल्लव । लुब्धक । पक। अर्को शक । ॥ रो रो चा॥४॥ द्रशदे रेफस्य चा लोपो भवति ॥ दोहो॥ द्रोहो॥ चंदो । चंद्रो ॥ दो। रुद्रो॥ 1 Added from BDW. 2 Altered in Ato-तं Added from BDW. 4 So in all the MSS. 5 Wim ( wanting in BD) which it explains by H. 6 Agroot ( wanting in BDW). 7 A originally alcat, like B; W 41: cf ... 8 BDadd सदो शब्द. 20. २ ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशा॥ ॥ सर्वशतुल्येपु अ॥५॥ सर्वशतुल्येयु अकारस्य लोपो भवति ॥ सव्वजो। इगिअजो॥ जानातेर्यान्येवंरूपाणि तत्र अलोपः॥ ॥ मधुश्मशानयोरादेः॥६॥ श्मश्रुश्मशानयोरादेर्वर्णस्य लोपो भवति ॥ मस्मू । मसाणं ॥ ॥ मध्याह्न हस्य ॥७॥ मध्याह्नपब्दे हकारस्य लोपी भवति॥ मझलो। ॥ इहोपु नलमां स्थितिरूद्ध ॥८॥ ह्न ह म इत्येतेप्वधः स्थितानां नकारलकारमकारार्णा स्थिति- रूद्ध मुपरिष्टाद्भवति ॥ ह्रस्य ॥ पुव्वण्हो। अवरण्हो॥ ह्रस्य । कल्हारं । अल्हादो॥ मस्य । वन्हणो॥ ॥युक्तस्य॥९॥ अधिकारो ऽयं । आ परिच्छेदसमाप्तर्यदित ऊई मनुक्रमिप्यामो युक्तस्येत्येवं वेदिनन्यं ॥ वक्ष्यति। अस्थिनि अट्ठी॥ युक्तग्रहणं हलो ऽन्त्यस्य" मा भूत्॥ ॥टस्य ॥१०॥ ट इत्येतस्य युक्तस्य ठकारो भवति ॥ लट्टी। दिट्टी॥ ॥ अस्थिनि ॥ ११ ॥ अस्थिवान्दे युक्तस्य ठकारो भवति ॥ अट्ठी॥ ॥ as CW : ; DE मस्य; 12 BWD 9 This sútra corrupt AB (and in A the Comm. well); BDEW agree in the Comm. and cx. 10 V adds mula. 11 W अयं लोपः. मस्नू: xमस्मु. buy and so originally A ; this is requircil by s. 50 ; cf. Bochtl. Sakunt., note p. 175; EW रा: D.nl. 9. 10 and 1 are confused by Lasson. 15 लोऽन्ये. 13 E has 14 sùtras ·॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ।। ॥ स्तरय थः॥१२॥ स्तशब्दस्य थकारो भवति । उपरिलोपापवादः॥ हत्यो। समत्थो। थुई। थवओ। कोत्थुहो । हस्त। समस्त । स्तुति । स्तवक । कौस्तुभ । ॥ न स्तंबे"॥ १३॥ स्तंवशब्दे स्तकारस्य थकारो न भवति ॥ तंवो॥ ॥ स्तंभे खः॥१४॥ स्तंभशब्दे स्तकारस्य खकारो भवति ॥ खंभो॥ ॥ स्थाणावहरे ॥१५॥ स्थाणुशब्दे युक्तस्य स्वकारो भवति । अहरे। हराभिधेये न भवति ॥ खाणू ॥ अहर इति किं ॥ थाणू । हरो॥ ॥ स्फोटके ॥ १६॥ स्फोटकशब्दे युक्तस्य खकारो भवति ॥ खोडओ। ॥र्यशय्याभिमन्युपु जः र्य इत्यस्य शस्त्राभिमन्युशब्दयोश्च युक्तस्य जकारो भवति ॥ कज्ज" । सेजा । अहिमज्जू ॥ written: 16 So BDW; A's थुरही is corrupt; see Lass. Inst., P. 103. 17 This sútra with its Comm. is variously AC (and probably B originally) as above; DE (and B now) a: fda, with a Corresponding Comm. but the same ex. ; W confuses sútras 13, 14. ; the text of AC is the simplest, the स being cirded by m. 18 So DE, and Blas been altered to this ; ACW rerd the súc.. कार्यशय्याभिमन्युपु जः, and the Comm. एतेयु शब्देषु युसम्य, etc. The Sanksli. Sára follows DE in its two cules 115, 134, the latter being र्यन्य जो। कन 19 The prak. Sanj reads sur. 17,as in text. A फार्म 20 So MSS.: f. Lass. Inst., ·२० ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ । ॥ तूर्यधैर्यौदर्याश्चर्यपर्यतेपु ः॥१८॥ एतेषु शब्देपु यस्य रेफो भवति ॥ तूरं। धोरं। सुंदेरं ।। अच्छेरं। परंत ॥ सूर्ये वा ॥१९॥ शर्यशब्दे र्यकारस्य रेफादेशो भवति वा ॥ सूरो।" सुज्जो ॥ ॥ चौर्यसमेपु रि॥२०॥ चौर्यसमेषु शब्देषु यस्य रिसं इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ चोरि। सोरि। वोरिअं॥ चौर्य । शौर्य । वीर्य ॥ समग्रहणादाकृतिगणो ऽयं॥ ॥ पर्यस्तपर्याणसौकुमार्येषु ल. ॥२१॥ एषु शब्देपु र्यस्य लकारो भवति ॥ पल्लथं । पल्लाणं । सोअमल्लं॥ ॥र्तस्य टः ॥२२॥ त इत्येतस्य टकारो भवति ॥ केवो । णदृओ। णट्टई ॥ ॥पत्तने ॥२३॥ पत्तनशब्दे युत्यस्य टकारो भवति । पट्टणं ॥ ॥न धूर्तादिपु ॥२४॥ धूर्त इत्येवमादिपु त इत्येतस्य टफारो न भवति ॥ धुत्तो। कित्ती। वत्तमाणं। वत्ता। आवत्तो। संवत्तओ। णिवत्तो। यत्तिआ। अत्तो। कत्तरी। मुत्ती॥ धूर्त। कीर्ति। वर्तमान । वार्ता। आवर्त संवर्तक। निवर्तक । वर्तिका। आत । कर्तरी। मूर्ति ॥ गर्तडः॥२५॥ of...5. App:, p.53 , D adds a teference to m., 50. 21 So MSS.. 22 D adds याप्रहणात् पूर्वर्यशय्यादिसूतसामान्येन जकारः म्यात (added in B in margin). 23 BD विरिअं. 24 AF%D for the doubling in the ex.,cf. iit., 50, as in all such cases. 25 BW om. ; D पाह- यतते. 26 AW पातो ·॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ गर्तशब्दे तस्य डकारो भवति ॥ गड्डो॥ ॥ गर्दभसंमदवितर्दिविछर्दिपु दस्य" ॥२६॥ एतेषु र्दस्य डो भवति ।। गड्डहो । संमड्डो । विअड्डी । विछड्डी।। ॥ स्यथ्यद्यां चछजाः ॥२७॥ त्यथ्यद्य इत्येतेषां चछज इत्येते यथासंख्यं भवंति ॥ त्यस्य । णिच। पञ्चच्छ॥ श्यस्य ॥ रच्छा। मिच्छा । पच्छं ॥ धस्य । विजा। वेज | निस्य । प्रत्यक्ष । रथ्या। मिथ्या। पथ्य। विद्या। वैद्य ॥ध्यह्यो ः ॥२८॥ ध्य ह्य इत्येतयोझकारो भवति । अज्माओ॥ ह्यस्य ॥ वज्झओ। गुज्झओ। अध्याय। वाहक । गुह्यक॥ ॥ कस्को खः॥ २९ ॥ कस्कक्षां खकारो भवति ॥ कस्य ॥ मुक्खं । पोक्खरो ॥ स्कस्य ॥ खंदो। खंघो॥क्षस्य ॥ खदो। जक्खो॥ ॥ अक्ष्यादिपु छः॥३०॥ अक्षि इत्येवमादिषु क्षकारस्य छकारो भवति ॥ अच्छी। लच्छी॥ छुप्यो। छीरं । छुद्धो | उच्छित्तो। सरिन्छ। उच्छ्र । उच्छा । छारं। रिच्छो। मच्छिा। छुअं। छुर। छत्तं । वच्छो। दच्छो। कुच्छी॥ "3. ध्यस्य ।। मध्या sec note s. 21. 27 wadds विमर्द. 28 Wadds विमहो. 29 A 30 BDW सच 31 DE पसं; AC seem to read ai; BW omit it; Qy. 42 ? SEC sutra 30. 32 A Farm (?) 33 The In A is only 2 rudely 34 AD add संगा-संध्या. 35 W सोक्स 36 So BDIV, with Sans. दुध; A is not quite clear. fornsed म.

·२२ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशा अक्षि । लक्ष्मी । शुष्ण । क्षीर। क्षुब्ध । उत्क्षिप्त । सदृक्ष । इक्षु । उक्षन् । क्षार। ऋक्ष । मक्षिका। क्षुत। क्षुर। क्षत्र। वक्षस्" । दक्ष । कुक्षि । इत्येवमादयः॥ । क्षमावृक्षक्षणेषु वा ॥३१॥ एतेषु क्षकारस्य छकारी भवति वा ॥ छमा। खमा ॥ वछो। रुखो॥ छण खण् । वृक्षशब्दे ऋकारस्याकारे कृते क्षणशब्दे चोत्सवाभिधायिनि छत्वमिप्यते ॥ ।। मपक्ष्मविस्मयेपु म्हः ॥३२॥ म इत्येतस्य पक्षमनिस्मयशब्दयोश्च युक्तस्य म्हफारो भवति ॥ प्मस्य ॥ गिम्हो। उम्हा। पम्हो। विम्हओ ॥ ग्रीष्म । उप्मन् । पक्ष्मन् । विस्मय॥ ॥ हनणणाशां पहः ॥ ३३ ॥ ह्रादीनां ण्ह इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ तस्य । चण्ही। जो ॥ नस्य ॥ पहाणं ।। पण्डदं ॥ प्णस्य ॥ विल। कण्यो॥ क्ष्णस्य ।। सण्इं। तिण्ह ॥ श्नस्य ॥ पण्हो। सिहो। यहि । जह्न । स्नान। भरतुत। विष्णु। कृष्ण । लक्षण । तीक्ष्ण । प्रश्न शिश ॥ चिह्नशब्दे युक्तस्य न्य इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ चिन्" ॥ ॥प्पस्य फः॥३५॥ चिह्नन्ध ॥ ३४॥ 37 AW Aस्त वन. B वृक्ष 38 DE add घणो here , W adds सुरेऽपि वेति केचित् । छुरो। सुरो। 39 BDW , wrongly ; AW transpose fu and yn in die sūtra, but A agrees with BD in the order of the examples 40 BD जएड. A जराही; W जएहई 42 A has a marginal alditton चिण्होऽपि C चिहापि 43 DW हिफापो, ABC पिपयो Lass om.

·। हनीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ प्प इत्येतस्य फ इत्ययमादेशो भरति ॥ पुष्फं। साफ । णिष्फाओ ॥ पुष्प । शप्प। निप्पाय, ॥ स्पस्य सर्वत्र स्थितस्य ॥ ३६॥ स्प इत्येतस्य सर्वत्र स्थितस्य फ इत्ययादेशो भवति ।। कंसो।" फंदणं ॥ स्पर्श । स्पंदन॥ ॥लिच॥ ३७॥ स्पस्य कचित्"सि इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पाडिसिद्धो । प्रतिस्पर्दिन् । ॥ पाप्पै ऽश्रुणि हः ॥ ३८॥ वाप्पशब्दे प इत्येतस्य हकारो भवति अश्रुणि वाच्ये ॥ बाहो॥ अश्रुणि किं॥ चप्फो॥ चाप्प उप्मन् ॥ }| कापणे॥३९॥ कापिणशब्दे युक्तस्य हकारो भवति ।। काहावणो ।" । नरसप्सां छः ॥४०॥ पतेषां छारो भवति ॥ श्वस्य । पच्छिमं । अच्छे ॥ सस्य । बच्छो । बच्छरो॥प्पस्य । लिच्छा। जुगुच्छा" । पश्चिम । आश्चर्य । यत्स । वरसर । लिप्सा | जुगुप्सा॥ ॥ वृश्चिके छः ॥४१॥ वृधिकशन्दे श्वकारस्य ज्छ इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ बिन्दुओ ।। । नोत्सुकोत्सवयोः॥४२॥ 44 So D, W lias facita 45 स्पस्यफ It readss. 38 befores 36 46 DE पमो , BC corrupt. 47 ABC om. 48 W पडिसिटा. 49 ABCom.; न.1. 2.50 AC हावणो 51 BD add उन्धरा-मनगरा. 52 SO BD, A originally had a bur has been altered to sp; W has the same liolds of the Prábrt a. in Comm, W पम्मो; W स्पर्धा, - ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ उत्सुक उत्सव इत्येतयोः स इत्येतस्य छकारो न भवति ॥ श्वत्सप्सां छ इति प्राप्ते प्रतिपिच्यते ॥ उस्सुमो। उस्सवो ॥ || न्मो मः॥४३॥ न्म इत्येतस्य म इत्ययगादेशो भवति। अधोलोपे माप्ते॥ जम्मो । धम्महो ॥ जन्म । मन्मथ ॥ ॥ मशपंचाशत्पचद्देषु णः ॥४४॥ नश इत्येतयोः पंचाशद् पंचदश शब्दयोश्च युक्तस्य कारो भवति ॥ सस्य ॥ पज्जुस्यो ॥ शस्य ॥ जसो। विसाणं ॥ पसासा" पस्मरहो ॥ प्रद्युम्न । यश । विज्ञान । पंचाशत् । पंचदश ॥ ॥ तालवृन्ते ण्टः ॥४५॥ तालवृन्ते युक्तरय ण्ट इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ तालयेण्टअं॥ ॥ भिन्दिपाले ण्डः ॥४६॥ भिन्दिपालशब्दे युक्तस्य ण्ड इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ भिण्डि- चालो॥ ॥ विह्वले भहौवा ॥४७॥ . 53 A श्रोश्रो; Bउसो; Cउसवो; D उसुश्री; F उस्मुश्री;w उत्सुश्रो. 54A ओसवः; BCD उसको (CS-); E उत्सवो; W उत्सओ; in such uncertainty, E's reading has been followed, because it at once brings them under iii., 1; cf. Sanksh. Sára, 138, 190. 55 of ill., 2. 56 So CW and probably A (for Lassen's 37 ) ; DE read sútra 1499- giving ex, in Comm., but . Tu are covered by ui., 2; B has been greatly altered. 57 BD पणास ( D originally-सा); AE -साW -सो. 58 A पणा- 59 B 6o So BD; C भचाही; St; W gives the sútra forêt HaTi adding to the Comm. अभावपक्षे सर्वत लवरामिति वकारे लुप्से हकारो ऽवशिष्टः । विहलो . DE राठ.. A ·॥ ॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ विह्वलशब्दे युक्तस्य भकारहकारौ भवतो या॥ चेभलो"। विहलो॥ ॥ आत्मनि पः॥४८॥ आत्मशब्दे युक्तस्य पकारो भवति । अप्पा: ॥मस्य॥४९॥ फम इत्येतस्य पकारो भवति ॥ रुप्प रुपिणी।। योगविभागो नित्यार्थ ॥ ॥ शेषादेशयोर्द्वित्वमनादौ ॥५०॥ युक्तस्य यो शेषादेशभूती तयोरनादौ वर्तमातयो द्वित्वं भवति । शेपस्य तावत् ।। भुत्तं । मग्गो ।। आदेशस्य ॥ लट्टी। दिट्टी। हत्थो। अनादाविति किं ॥ स्खलि। सम्भो। थवभो॥ भुक्त । मार्ग। यष्टि । दृष्टि । हस्त । स्सलित स्तंभ । स्तवक । ॥ वर्गेषु युजः" पूर्वः । ५१ ॥ युक्तस्य यो शेषादेशावनादिभूती तयोद्वित्वेऽपि विहिते अध ऊन यो वर्गेपु वर्णो द्वितीयश्चतुर्थो या विहितस्तस्य पूर्वः प्रथम- स्तृतीयो वा भवति ॥ वर्गेपु युग्मस्य द्वितीयस्य प्रथमश्चतुर्थस्य एतीयो द्वित्वेन विधीयते । अयुग्मयोः प्रथमस्तीयपंचमरूपयोः शेषादेशयोस्तु ताधेय भवतः ।। । A .. 61 BCD भलोW वि. A विमलो. 62 C आप्पा; originally your but altered to Ar-. 63 f. viii., 40 ; and Panini, vi., 259.64 AC पगेषु यः पूर्वः. 6S After भपति, AC have बर्गेषु युक्तम्प प्रयगतृतीययोदित्वेन विधीयते तरा सायेव भययः, and W scenis equally confused: the remainder is therefore giren from D. to which Bhas been altered : the cramples ace given as in DD, A being in ssetal places illegible and confused.

·। । - । । सोत्तं। ३६ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ शेपस्य ॥ चरखाण। अग्यो। मुच्छा। णिन्झरो। लुद्धो। णिभरो॥ आदेशस्य ॥ दिट्ठी। लट्ठी। यच्छो। विष्फरिसो। जस्खो। लच्छी। अट्ठी। पुप्फ। व्याख्यान। अध। मूर्छा। निझर । लुब्ध । निर्भर । दृष्टि । यष्टि। वक्षः। विस्पर्श । निस्तार । यक्ष । लक्ष्मी । अस्थि । पुष्प ॥ ॥नीडादिषु॥५२॥ नीड इत्येवमादिपु अनादौ वर्तमानस्य च द्वित्वं भवति ॥ गेड ॥ एनीडापोडेत्यादिना एत्व ॥ पेम्म। घाहितं । उज्जुओ । जस्मओ। जोब्वर्ण ॥ नीड । स्रोत । प्रेमन् । व्याहृत । काजु । जनक। यौवन ॥ आत्रताम्रयोर्वः ॥५३॥ आन तानं इत्येतयोदित्वेन वकारो एवति ॥ अवं । तंवं॥ न रहोः॥ ५४॥ रेफहकारयोदित्व न भवति ॥ धीरं । तूरं । जीहा। वाहो। धैर्य । तूर्य । जिल्ला । वाष्प ॥ ॥ आङो शस्य ॥५५॥ आङ उत्तरस्य ज्ञ इत्येतस्यादेशस्य द्वित्व न भवति ।। । ॥ । । . 66 of. 1., 19. 67 AB-स्थ'; D-तं ; E-तं (DE add, with similar variation, मुहअरिवाहितणलिणिपडिसंल्लाव इति सेती ; of. Hofer Zeitsch., vol. 11., p. 514); W om. ; cf. Lass. Instor p. 233. DE अनुप्रो. 69 So BCD plainly; cf. Lass. Inst, App., p. 45. 70 W adds यत शेषादेशी नस्तः द्वित्वच दृश्यते स नीडगणे. 7 अयं तंव (originally अंबं तवं); BCDE अव्वं अंवं (D orig. अंव्व) तव्व'; W अम्बौ तम्ब ; Hema.ch. has ताभाने म्बः। अनयोः संयुक्तस्य मयुक्तो वो भवति । तम्ब अम्बं; of Lasso, p. 246. BDE Bादेशस्य. 73 Wएतस्य णादेशस्य.

·२७ - ॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः ॥ आणा। आणत्ती॥ आज्ञा। आंज्ञप्ति ।। आङ इति कि। सण्णा ॥ संज्ञा॥ ॥न चिर्दूपरे ।। ५६ ॥ अनुस्खारपरे द्वित्व न भवति ॥ संकेतो। संझा ॥ संक्रान्त । संध्या ॥ ॥ समासे वा॥ ५७॥ समासे शेषादेशयो द्वित्वं भवति ॥ गईग्गामो। णइगामो"। कुसुमप्पअरो। कुमुमपअरो। देवत्थुई। देवथुई। आणालखंभो। आणालखंभो ।। तदीग्राम । कसुमप्रकर। देयस्तुति । आलानस्तंभ ।। । सेवादिपु च ॥५८॥ सेवा इत्येवमादिपु चानादौ या द्वित्वं भवति ॥ सेन्वा सेवा । एक एवं। णक्खो णहो। देव्वं दइये। असिव्वं असिवं । तेल्लोक' तेलो। णिहित्तो णिहिओ। तुहिको तुहिओ । कस्मिआरो कणिआरो। दिग्धं दी। रत्ती राई। दुक्तिओ दुहिओ। अस्मो असो। इस्मरो ईसरो। विस्मासो घीसासो। णिमासो पोसासो। रस्मी रसी। मित्तो मिओ। पुस्मो पुसो" ॥ सेवा। एक । नख । दैव । अशिव । त्रैलोक्य । निहित । तूष्णीक । कर्णिकार । दीर्घ । 74 AW संरणा; DE add विएणत्तो ; BDEW add ज्ञादेशस्येति किं (W इस्ये-) अक्खित्तं. 75 This sutra is only found in BDEW; Hema- ch. has a sūtra, Na dtirgbànusvaip (i.c. parayoḥ śeşāsayor duitvam.) 76 This cx, only in B ; DE instead संसो शेपस्य संस। इति संसादेशः शेपः (१). 77 So D; गइग-3 in the other words the MSS. clear up doubtful letters of A; W has several errors here. 78 BDE तेलो; तेलोक 79 B (not A) तेलो. 80 ADEIV B -तो. 8. All the MSS. पुस्लो पुसो (V पूमो). । - AB sonte ·२८ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ रात्रि । दुःस्सित । अश्य । ईश्वर। विश्वास। निश्वास। रश्मि । मित्र । पुष्य ॥ उभयत्र विभाषेयं सेवादिनाममाप्त दीर्घादीनां च प्राप्त ।। । विप्रकर्षः ॥ ५९॥ अधिकारोऽयं । आ परिच्छेदसमाप्तेर्युक्तस्य विप्रकर्षो भवति ॥ ॥क्लिएलिटरत्नक्रियाशा.पु तत्स्वरवत्पूर्वस्य ॥ ६० ।। क्लिष्टादिपु युक्तस्य विप्रकर्षों भवत्ति। विप्रकृष्टस्यच यः पूर्वो वर्णो निरर्थस्तस्य' तत्परता भवति । तेनैव पूर्वेण स्वरेण" पूर्वो वर्णः सार्थो भवति । इत्यर्थः ॥ किलिट्ठ। सिलि। रअणं । किरिआ। सारंगो॥ ॥ कृपणे वा ॥१॥ कृष्णशब्दे युक्तस्य वा विप्रकों भवति। पूर्वस्य छ तत्स्वरता ॥ व्यवस्थितविभापेयं । तेन चणे नित्यं विप्रकाः। विष्णो तु न भवत्येव ।। फसणो॥ कण्हो॥ ॥ श्रीह्रीकीतक्लान्तक्कैशम्लानस्वमस्पर्शहीहंगपु" ॥ २ ॥ पपु युक्तस्य विप्रकों भवति। पूर्वस्य इकार तत्स्वरताच भवति । सिरो। हिरी। किरीतो"। फिलंतो। किलेसो। मिला। सिविणो"। फरिसो। हरिसो। अरिहो। गरिहो ॥ श्री। ही। फ्रीत । क्लान्त । क्लेश । म्लान | स्वप्न । स्पर्श । हर्प । अई । गई ।। 82 AEW पुष्प (cf. Lass. Inst., p. 261); BD seem to read पुष्य which is better, as पुष्प is neuter in iii., 35.83 AW शारपु. 84 Where and elsewhere तत्स्वरूपवत. 85 D स्वररहितः. 86 A पूर्णन. 87 W वर्णन, which may account for the marginal addition in A, noticed by Lassen. 88 Lassen om. 89 V मान. 904 कीरोतो; BD किरीतो; V रीिमो. 91 मिणाएं. 9. So DW (f.i.,3); A सेवियो; B not clear, ·॥ तृतीयः परिच्छेदः । ॥ अक्ष्माश्लाघयोः ॥ ६३ ।। क्ष्मा श्लाघा इत्येतयोर्युक्तस्य विप्रकर्पो भवति । पूर्वस्य अकारस्त. स्वरनाच भवति ।। खमा। सलाहा ।। ॥स्नेहे चा ॥४॥ स्नेहशब्दे युत्यस्य विप्रकों या भवति। पूर्वस्य च अकारस्त- त्वरता च भवति ॥ सणेहो। णेहो। ॥ उ. पद्मतन्वीसमेषु ॥५॥ पद्मशब्दे" तन्वी इत्येवंसमेषु च युक्तस्य विप्रकर्षो भवति । पूर्वस्य च उकारस्तत्वरता च भवति ॥ पडमा तणुई । लहई"। || ज्यायामीत् ॥६६॥ ज्याशब्दे युक्तस्य विषकों भवति । पूर्वस्य च ईकारस्तत्वरता च ।। जीआ"। ॥ इति घररुचिश्ते प्रारतप्रकाशे युक्तवर्णविधिर्नाम मृतीयः परिच्छेदः॥ 93 w अत्. 94A on. 95 So ABCW; DE पदुमं (bur D not so originally); V adds कचित् प्पेम्म ( Hema-ch. पोगं). 96A om. D adds गई; y गुरुई. 97 DE add another sutra berc, which is only supplicu in the margin of B, and is not lound even in w; दवे प॥ स्परादे य इति सर्वस निपालये॥ पाराय्य धणं ॥ प्राण य धनं ।। f. Lass. Insta, pp. 192, 370, where die quotes Sanksh. Sira, 385. Tlie sútra can have no place in this sections.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ ॥ अथ चतुर्थः परिच्छेदः॥ च। संधौ वर्त- । संधायचामलोपविशेपा बहलं ॥१॥ अत्तामिति प्रत्याहारग्रहण। 'अजिति मानानामचां स्थाने अज्विशेषा लोपविशेपाश्च बहूलं भवंति ।। अविशेपास्तावत्। जउणभड जउणाअई। णइसोत्तो णईसोत्तो। वहुमुह वहूमहं। कण्णऊ लण्णऊर सिरोवेषणा सिरवेअणा पीआपीअं पिआपि। सीआसीनं सिआसि सयोमुओ सयोमूओ। सरोरुहं सररुह ।। लोपविशेषाः ।। राउल राअउल। तुहद्धं तुहअद्ध । महद्ध मह- अद्ध। वावरण वाभवडण। कुंभारो कुभारो । पवणुद्धों पवनोद्धभं॥ 1 So Aw (cf. 11., 52); BD-तो in both; Qy. एइस्म- ? 2AB कण-- 3 ABW have only पीआपीनं पीबासी; DE have पीआपी पिप्रापिस सिआसी सियासिन ( D सीआसीयं सोमासि); DEW give the Sans. पीतापीत सितासित. 4 So BDEW (only W सन्यो-); A सञ्चोमूलं सवोमूल (the last ल confused ); DE explain it by fraica, W by wälzt. 5 A om. both. 6 The MSS. are there very corrupt; तुहद्धं- पारो from BDEW (B तूहद्ध for the Ist, and om. the 3rd); DEW add Sans. सवाई ममाई पादपतनं कुंभकारः; B then adds मुष एपरिट्ठो सुवण्टिो पवरणदWadis ताभचं तापर्छ । सुणिहा सूणिद्दा । पवणुद पवण्दन, A las instead after raankam, तूअर्द्ध सुवध पोलद्ध गरिदो नुवणिो (supplted in marg.) पमणु with no Sans. explanation. For this sut, and its Corrupe Comm., cf. note translation pp. 36-37. .

·॥ चतुर्थः परिच्छेदः॥ संयोगपरे सर्वत्र पूर्वस्याचो लोपः । कचिन्नित्य कचिदन्यदेव यहुलग्रहणात् । तेनान्यपि लाक्षणिक- कार्य भवति । । उदुम्बरे दोर्लोपः ॥ २॥ उदुम्बरशन्दे दु इत्येतस्य लोपो भवति ॥ उंचरं ॥ ॥ कालायले यस्य वा ॥३॥ कालायसशब्दे यस्य वा लोपो भवति ॥ काला कालाअसं ॥ ॥भाजने जस्य ॥४॥ भाजनान्दे जकारस्य लोपो या भवति ॥ भाणं भाअणं॥ ॥ यावदादिपु वस्य ॥५॥ यावदित्येवमादिपु वकारस्य वा लोपो भवति ।। जा जाय । ता ताव । पाराओ"पारावगी। अणुत्तंत अणुवतंत" जो जीवि। पणे एव्यं । एम एव्य । कुशलमं फुघल ॥ यायत् । तावत् । पारावत । अनुवर्तमान"जीवित । एवं। पय । फुवलय । इत्येय- मादयः॥ ॥ अन्त्यस्य दलः ॥६॥ घेति निवृत्त"। शन्दानां योऽन्त्यो इल् तस्य लोपो भवति । No MS. gives thus 35 new súrra ; Wom. सर्वस and adds हमष after लोपः, with several new examples, as आधि गर तो लिसो भत्तो etc. W adds two sútras here, som yogapúrvo brascals and Dirgládou is. 9 W T with a similar blunder in thic Conm. 10 A . "B प्रागं -गा; Dभाभलं मसुम ( engmally -): ETT W om. I: ॥ शे. Dald, मामी पामो (t. Sinkilt. Sira, S. 196) देवानं. AC and probably Di BE. 7 8 DE अन्नाच ne AC orr.

·३२ । प्राकृतप्रकाशः ।। । जसो। जहा। सरो। कम्मो। जाव । ताव ॥ यशस्। नभस्। सरल। । कर्मन् । यावत् । तावत् ॥ ॥स्त्रियामात् ॥७॥ स्त्रियां वर्तमानस्यान्त्यहल आकारो भवति ॥ सरिआ। पडिवा। वाआ ॥ सरित् । प्रतिपद् । वाच ॥ ॥रोरा ॥८॥ स्त्रियामन्त्यस्य हलो रेफस्य रा इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ धुरा । गिरा॥ ॥ न विद्युति ॥९॥ विद्युच्छब्दे आकारो न भवति ॥ विज्जू ॥ ॥ शरदो दः॥ १०॥ शरच्छब्दस्यान्त्यहलो दो भवनि ॥ सरदो । । दिक्मावृपोः सः ॥ ११॥ दिक्शब्दस्यान्त्यदलः प्रावृटशब्दस्यापि सफारो भवति ॥ दिसा। पाउसो॥ ॥ मो विन्दुः ॥१२॥ अन्त्यस्य दलो मझारस्य विन्दुर्भवति ॥ अकं । वच्छं। भई । अग्गिं । द?" । वर्ण। धणं । ॥ अचि मश्च" ॥ १३ ॥ अचि परतो मो भवति या फलमवहरह । फलं अवहरइ। । 16 So B; the others रणहो (of.s 19) 17 Lisseu reads this sútra in A as an ex. to s. 7. 18 Dei explained by 12 (दर); A वटं; C टुं; स पहु; B confuses ths with clie next sútra, 19 A adds art in the margin. 20 D विदः, Whas मशरस्य मकारो भवति चकाराद्विदुरवि. - .

·- ॥ चतुर्थः परिच्छेद ॥ ॥ नमोहलि ॥१४॥ नकारञकारयोर्हलि परतो विन्दुर्भवति मकारश्च ॥ नत्य" ॥ अंसो अम्सो। कंसो कम्सो॥ अस्य ॥ पंचणीअं वाचणो। विमो विम्झो ॥ ॥ वकादिपु ॥१५॥ वकादिपु शब्देषु विन्दुरागमो भवति ॥ चंक। तसं । हंसो। अंसू । मंसू । गुठी । मथं । मणसिणी। दसणं । फंसो। वपणो"। पडिसुदं। अंसो"। अहिमुको° ॥ वक्र । नत्र । ह्रख। अश्रु । श्मश्रु। गृष्टि। मस्त"। मनस्विनी। दर्शन। स्पर्श । वर्ण। प्रतिश्रुत। अश्व । अभिमुक्त। इत्यादयः ।। ॥ मांसादिपु वा ॥१६॥ मांसादिपु शब्देषु वा विन्हुःप्रयोक्तव्यः ।। मंस मासं। कह कह । णूण गुण । तहिं तहि । असु असु"॥ तदयमपठितो मांसादिर्गणः। यन कचित्तभङ्गभयात् त्यज्यमानः क्रियमाणश्च विंदुर्भवति स मांसादिपु द्रष्टव्यः । । । .. 21 MSS. om. 22 W has for these, अंधो अम्घो। कंधो यमधी. 23 A विम्जो विजुओ; B विम्जो विन्मजो; D विज्मो विमो (adding Sans. E अन्स पन्स पचनीय विन्ध्य): विम्मो यिंजनो; W विंचू विम्चूनो - वृश्चिक. 24 So A (noc अंस). 25 A गुडी; B गुटी ; V गिर्टि, DE गुठी; f. Lass. Insr., p. 254. 26 AB ( notC) मन्य; f... 56. AB पणो; 27 Wवरण: DE Qराणो. 28 AE पडिस्मुदं (A originally पर्डि-); BW पंडिस्मुदं; W पडिमुदं. 29 AB अमो. 30 A अहिमुंको; B-मुमो / हिमुदो. 31 DE मन्नक; AB LEI; W n.l. 32 So BD=art ; AC falë -Ft. 33 So MSS. (Wom.): A has no Sans. expl. : DE girc i Wadas several other examples. 34 A om. . -- .- ३ ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ । ॥ ययि तद्वर्गातः ॥ १७॥ ययि परतो विन्दुस्तद्वर्गातो वा भवति ॥ सका। सङ्खो। अको। प्रङ्ग । सञ्चरइ । सण्ढो । सन्तरइ । सम्पत्ती ॥ ययोति किं। अंसो ॥ वाधिकारात्। पंकी विंदू । संका। संखो । ॥ नसांतपावृट्शरदः पुसि ॥ १८॥ नकारांताः सकारांताश्च प्रावृट् शरदौच पुंसि प्रयोक्तव्याः॥ नांताः॥ कम्मो। जम्मो। धम्मो ॥ सांताः॥ जसो। तमो। सरो॥ पाउसो। सरदो ॥ ॥न शिरोनभसी ॥१९॥ शिरस् नभस् इत्येतो न पुंसि प्रयोक्तव्यौ ॥ सिरं । णहं ॥ ॥ पृष्ठाक्षिप्रश्नाः स्त्रियां वा ॥ २० ॥ एते स्त्रियां वा प्रयोक्तव्याः॥ पुट्ठी पुट्ठ। अच्छी अच्छं। पण्हा पण्हो॥ पृष्ठ। अक्षि । प्रश्न ॥ ॥ओदवापयोः ॥२१॥ अब अप इत्येतयोरुपसर्गयो ओत्य' भवति ॥ ओहासो अब- हासो ॥ ओसारि अवसारि ॥ अवहास । अवसारित ॥ ॥ तल्त्वयोर्दात्तणी ॥ २२॥ तल त्व इत्येतयोः प्रत्यययोर्यथासंख्यं दा त्तण इत्येतावादेशी स्तः । वीणदा मूढदा। पीणत्तणं । मूढत्तण ॥ ॥क्त ऊणः ॥२३॥ 35 ABCW ह्यलि; DE ययि: the latter as taken, because all (except W) have अंस as the exception, which docs not apply to alet. 36 AB om. 37 BD -ती. 38 AB असं ; W रम्मं सोम्म. 39A-दु; DE; Bn.l. 41 B has 3 for t. 42 So W; ABD -सरि 43 A अप- D adds प्रोवाहि अव.. except vir, 4. 140): Bhas उणे. 40 D अदि. 44All क्ला (of. Pin.

·न ॥ चतुर्थ: परिच्छेदः ॥ रता प्रत्ययस्य ऊण इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ येऊण। सोऊण । काऊण । दाऊण ॥ गृहीत्वा । श्रुत्वा । कृत्वा । दत्वा ॥ ॥ तृण ईरः शीले ॥ २४ ॥ शोले यस्तन्प्रत्ययो विहितस्तस्य ईव इत्ययमादेशो भवति । भ्रमणशीलो भमिरो। हसनशीलो हसिरो" ॥ ॥ आल्बिल्लोल्लालवन्तेन्ता" मतुपः ॥२५॥ आलु इल्ल डल्ल भाल वन्त इन्त इत्येत आदेशा मतुपः स्थाने भवन्ति ॥ आलुस्तावत् ॥ ईसालू ॥ णिहालू ॥ इल्लः॥ यिमारिल्लो"। मालाईल्लो ॥ उल्लः ॥ विमारल्लो ।। मालः ॥धणालो। सद्दालो। चन्तः॥ घणवन्तो। जोवणवन्तो' ॥ इन्तः ॥ रीसाइन्तो पाणा- इन्तो" ॥ यथादर्शनमेते प्रयोक्तव्याः न सर्वे सर्वत्र ॥ ईपवित्" । निद्रावत् । विकारवत् । मालावत् । धनवत् । शब्द- चत् । योवनवत् । रोपवत् । प्राणवत्" । [कचिदा" मतुपो ऽन्त्यस्य मंतो वा दृश्यते कचित् । हणुमा। हणुमंतो॥ इल्लोल्लावपरे प्रायः शैपिकेषु प्रयुजते। पौरस्त्यं पुरोभवं पुरिल्लं । आत्मीयं अप्पुल्लं ।। परिमाणे फिमादिभ्यो मति केहदादयः। फेददं फेत्तिमं । जेइ जेत्तिमा तेइदं तेत्तिमं । एददं पत्तियं ॥ . 45 So W; DE 9991; AB have no Sans. 46 S. EW 47 DE add भ्रमिता हमिता. 48 DE -यंता; B 49 Vhas पाचतो, and in the next line DE 51 A गदा 52 Dोप.. 53 DE fu: here and in ex. 54 गेम- BIV पाटो Dमाणसी. 55 AB have no Sans. expl. 56 D 57 enclosed in brackets is only A सून; एव here corrupto शिभारउलो. 50 and in CI. Tle Payms ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ . कृत्वसो हुत्तमित्यन्ये । देशी शब्दः स इप्यते । समहत्तं । सहरसहत्तं ॥ जातो वा स्वार्थिका का। जाती स्वाथै ककारः प्रयोक्तव्यः॥] ॥ विद्युत्पीताभ्यां ला ॥२६॥ विद्युत्पीतशम्दाभ्यां परतः खार्थे लप्रत्ययो भवति ॥ विज्जू । विज्जुली॥ पी। पीअलं॥ [॥ बूंदे वो वः ॥ २७ ॥] वृंदशन्दे वकारात्परः स्वार्थे रेफो चा प्रयोक्तव्यः॥ व्र। ॥ ॥ करेण्या रणोः स्थितिपरिवृत्तिः ॥२८॥ करेणुशब्द रेफणकारयोः स्थितिपरिवृत्तिर्भवति ॥ कणेरू । पंसि" न भवति । करेणू॥ ॥ आलाने लनोः॥२९ ।। आलानशब्दे लकारनकारयोहल्मात्रयोः स्थित्तिपरिवृत्तिर्भवति ।। आणालमो found in AC, and has been conjecturally restored by cho help of the corresponding passages in Henia-ch., and chic Príhęca Sanjivaní. It seems ( with the exception of the last two lacs ) to be in verse, with examples interposed, and as such co bc quored at the end of the Comin, to sútra 25, but it will be further discussed in the Appendix. 58 BDEW here recommence; DE add at; W has विद्युत्पीता दिभ्यो तः, adding as new examples सामलो दीहलो सोलं. 59 DE add 91, and it is supplied in the margin of A. 60 This surra not in ABC. 6.10 -परस्य, 62 Wदं विद. 63 Dw add करैयामिति स्त्रीलिंगनिर्देशात्. 64Cii. 57.

·॥ चतुर्थः परिच्छेदः ॥ ३७ ॥ वृहस्पनो वहोभो ॥३९॥ वृहस्पतिशब्दे वकारहकारयोर्यथासंग्यं भकारअकारौ भवतः॥ भअप्फई ॥ ॥ मलिने लिनोरिलो वा ॥३॥ मलिनशब्दे लिकारनकारयोर्यथासंग्यमिकारलकारी वा भवतः । मदर। मलिण। ॥ गृहे घरोऽपती ॥ ३२॥ गृहशन्दे घर इत्ययमादेशो भवति। पतिशब्दे परतो न भवति ॥ घरं भवने ॥ अपताविति किं । गहवई ॥ ॥ दाढादयो बहुलं ॥ ३६॥ दादा इत्येवमादयः शन्दा बहुल निपास्यन्ते धादिपु ॥ दंष्ट्रा। दाढा ॥ इदानीं। एण्"ि ॥ दुहिता। धीआ धूदा ॥ चातुर्य । चातुलि"॥ मंडुकः। मंडूरो'॥ गृहे निहितं। घरे णिहित ॥ उत्पल। फंदोहो" । गोदावरी। गोला ॥ ललाटं। पिडालं") भूः। भुमा ॥ वैदूर्य । वेलुरिमे ॥ उभयपा। अवहोयासं ॥ 65 A भमः 66 BIV-पई. 67 AB इल या. 68 So DW and probably A ; B has been correred from 5 to; several variations occur in che cxamples of this súcca : cf. Sanksth. Sira, 162, 165. 69 BCE एएही; D एएही. 70A only fut; B firat feet; W enly wt. 71 Altered in Anl. Cचाड.. 72 Alccred in A tot; Br.l. ; DE मदरो. 73 AB सिदिलं (Baltered to -तं ). 74 W. BA निशात; Dd-. w adds another form AC end here. 76 WE भूममा; DED she G. Sankar Sin16:. 17 B मिरिम - - . Sans. U..

·। प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥
चूतः। माईदो माअंदो" ॥ आदिशब्दोऽयं प्रकारे" । तेन सर्व एव
देशसंकेतप्रवृत्तभापाशब्दाः परिगृहोताः॥
॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे संकीर्णविधिर्नाम
चतुर्थः परिच्छेदः ।।
78 Wafist aziat; W has besides as new examples, rent: 1
गोसो ॥ कतिः। ललहो ॥ कत्रलः । णेघर ॥ कर्कटी। वालुकी ॥ चिंता ।
तत्तिं 79 Dadds प्रकारः सादृश्यं.

·॥ पचमः परिच्छेदः॥ ३९ ॥ अथ पंचम परिच्छेद । ॥ अत ओत्सो॥१॥ अकारांताच्छन्दात्परस्य सोः स्थाने ओत्वं भवति ॥ वच्छो । वसहो। पुरिसो' ।। वृक्ष. ! वृषभः। पुरुषः॥ ॥ जश्शसोलोपः ॥२॥ अत इत्यनुवर्तते। अकारांतस्यानंतर यो जश्शसी तयोर्लोपो भरति ॥ वच्छा सोहंति। वृक्षाः शोभंते। जइशस्डस्यांसु' दीर्घ इति दीर्ये कृते पश्चाल्लोपो जसा । वच्छे णिअच्छह । वृक्षान्नियच्छत ॥ एच सुपि' इत्येत्वे कृते शसो लोपः। । अतोऽमः ॥३॥ अकारांतस्यानंतरं यो ऽम् द्वितीयैकवचन तदकारस्य लोपो भवति । वच्छ पेखिइ । मो विंदुरिति विंदुः ।। । टामोर्णः॥४॥ अतोऽनतरं टामोस्तृतीयैकवचनपष्ठीवहवचनयोर्णकारो भवति । चच्छेन । वच्छाण' । एच सुपीत्यत्वं । जश्शस्डस्यांसु दीर्घ इति दीर्घ ।। ॥मिसो' हि ॥५॥ अतोऽनतरस्य मिसो हि भवति॥ वच्छेहिं ॥ एच सुपि इत्येत्वं । I has वत्स 11 I Dadds हरिसो- हर्ष, and quotes iv, 2 D generally 3 BE जस्डस्यामु, D जस्भ्यम्डस्यासु,fr 4 W उपह-पश्यत 5 Deest in A 6f v. 12. B 7 - 8 D नसशसभ्यस्ङस्यासु , Eजशष्टस्यासु , 9 This sutra not Bom in B ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ उसेरादोदुहयः ॥ ६॥ अतो ऽनंतरस्य उसेः पंचम्येकर्वन्ननस्य स्थाने आ दो दुहि इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ वच्छा । बछछादो। यच्छादु । वच्छाहि ॥ जश्शस्स्यासुदीर्घत्वं ॥ ॥ भ्यसो हितो सुतो ॥ ७॥ अतो ऽनंतरस्य भ्यसो हिंतो सुतो इत्येतावादेशौ भवतः ।। वच्छाहितो। बच्छासुतो॥ एच सुपि इति चकारेण दीर्घत्वं ॥ ।। स्मो उसः॥८॥ अतोऽनंतरस्य उसः स्म इत्यादेशो भवति । वच्छस्म ॥ ॥ डेरेष्मी ॥९॥ अतोऽनंतरस्य : एम्मि इत्यादेशौ भवतः॥ वच्छे । कचिद् उसिडोर्लोपः। वच्छम्मि ।। ॥ सुपः सुः ॥१०॥ अतो ऽनंतरस्य सुपः सु'इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ वच्छेसु । एव सुपि इत्येत्वं ॥ ॥ जश्शस्डस्यांसु दीर्घः ॥ ११॥ जसादिपु परतो ऽतो दी| भवति ॥ वच्छा सोहति । जशसोर्लोप इति जसो लोपः॥ यच्छादो" आगदो। वच्छादु। बच्छाहि ॥ उसेरादोदुहयः । वच्छाण । टामोर्णः ॥ 13 10 B note 8, जस्डस्यांसु ; D as in p. 39, note 3 ; E as in P. 39, 11 Vडेरेम्मि. 12.of. v., 133 DW add इत्यकारलोपः (not in E). 13A मु; E सुं, 14 B corrupt; D जस्भ्यसदस्यांमु; E जसडम्यांमु. 15 Only W has an ex. of शस्, , वच्छे, adding श्रत प्रथम दीर्घस्तत एवं ततो लोपः. 16 Only EW add बच्छा.

·॥पंचमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ४१ ॥ एच सुप्यडिङसोः ॥ १२॥ अत अकारस्यैत्वं भवति सुपि परतो डिडसौ वर्जयित्वा" चकाराद्दीर्घश्च" ॥ वच्छे पेक्खह ॥ जश्शसोलोपः॥ वच्छेण । टामोर्णः॥ वच्छेहिं । वच्छेसु॥ चकाराद्दीर्घश्चेति ॥ वच्छाहितो वच्छासुतो॥ भ्यसो हितो सुतो॥ अटिन्डसोरिति किं । वच्छम्मि। वच्छस ॥ ॥ कचिसिडोर्लोपः ॥१३॥ अतो सि डि इत्येतयोः परतः क्वचिल्लोपो भवति ॥ वच्छा" आगदो। उसेरादोदुहय इति ॥ वच्छे ठिअं। डेरेम्मोत्येत् ॥ ॥ इदुतोः शसो णो ॥ १४ ॥ इदुदंतयोः शसो णो भवति ॥ अगिगणो" पेक्खह । वाउणो पेक्ख ।। अग्गियो। अग्गिस्स॥ ॥डसो वा ॥ १५॥ इदुदंतयोर्डसो वा णो भवति । पाउणो। चाउस्म ॥ अग्नेः। वायो.॥ । जसश्च ओ" यूत्वं ॥ १३ ॥ इदुदंतयोर्जस ओकारादेशो भवति। इदुतोश्च ईऊत्वं वा। चकाराद् णोच ॥ अग्गीओ। वाऊओ ॥ अग्गिणो। वाउणो॥ 17 मुषि-त्वा not in AB. 18 Wचकाराही? भ्यसि. 19 DE प्रकारस्प. 200 परयो 21 D बच्चर, ABW वच्छादो, E has both. 22 W अग्गीणो and वाअगो. 23 The MSS. here and elsewhere vary between पेछ and पेक्स 24 वा Inserted in 25 W has two sútras for s. 16, 1.6., WO various readings of the same, with distinct commentaries te ओ चो वाऽत्वं यूत्वंच ॥ इदुदंतयो शब्दयोर्जस प्रोवो इत्यादेशौ भवतः । जत्व इत्व ऊत्वंच विकल्पैन । चकारात्तोऽपि । पक्षे अदंतवात् ॥ अग्गीयो margin of ABD.

·। प्राशतप्रकाशः॥ "दाणा ॥१७॥ इदंतयोष्टाविभक्त: णा इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ अग्गिणा। चाउणा। ॥ सुमिस्मुसु दीर्घः ॥ १८ ॥ इदंतयोः सु भिस् सुप् इत्येतेपु दो? भवति ।। सु॥ अग्गी। बाऊ ॥ भिस् ॥ अग्नीहि ॥ चाऊहि ॥ सुप॥ अग्गीसु । वासु ॥ ॥स्त्रियां शस उदोतो ॥१९॥ स्त्रियां वर्तमानस्य शस उत् ओत् इत्येताबादेशौ भवतः॥ मालाउ मालायो। गईउ गईयो। बहुउ बहुओ ॥ [॥ जसो वा" ॥२०॥] जसः स्त्रियां उत् भोत् इत्येतावादेशौ वा भवतः। पक्षे अदंतवत् ॥ यालाउ। मालाओ। माला ॥ ॥ अमि हवः ॥२१॥ अमि परतः स्त्रियां हखो भवति ॥ माल । जई । बहु। ।। टाङल्डीनामिदेददातः ॥ २२ ॥ हा उस् डि. इत्येतेषां स्त्रियां इत् एत् अत् आत् इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ सा॥ पाईइ । गईए । णाई। णईआ कर्थ ॥ डस् ॥ गईइ । पाईए। गईभ । पईआ वर्ण ॥ डि ॥ पाईइ। गई। जई। पईया ठिॐ ॥ अग्गीवो अग्गियो श्रागश्री श्रग्गनो भागी । पाऊो etc.: then Follows असश्च ओ यूत्वं. 26 w स्त्रियां जश्शसोरदोती. 27 This sútra is only found in BDE (D crroncouly sat at both in stt. and Comm.) and in the Prik. Sanj. 27 SE; D मालस्स मालाई. 29 W टाइसिस्टीनामि..

·॥ पंचमः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥नातो ऽदातौ ॥ २३ ॥ आत आकारांतस्य स्त्रीलिंगस्यानंतरं टाडस्टोन" अत् आत् इत्येतावादेशौ न भवतः । पूर्वण प्राप्तो निमिष्यते ॥ मालाइ मालाए । काधणं। ठि॥ ॥ गादीतो" यहूल ॥ २४ ॥ त्रियामाकारांतादातः स्थाने आत् ईत् इत्येतो यहलं प्रयोक्तव्यो। सहमाणा सहमाणी"हलद्दा हलद्दी। सुप्पणहा सुत्पणही। छाहा छाही॥ ॥ न नपुसके ॥२५॥ प्रथमैकवचने नपुसके दीर्घत्वं न भवति। सौ दीर्घः पूर्वस्येत्यनेन इदुदंतयोः प्राप्त पूर्वस्य दीर्घत्वं न नसके इत्यनेन याध्यते ॥ दहिं महू । हर्षि दधि । मधु । हविः । ॥ इन्सरशसोर्धिश्च ॥ २६ ॥ नपुंसके वर्तमानयोश्शसोः स्थान ईदादेशो भवति पूर्वस्यच" दीर्घः॥ वणाइ । दहीइ । मलइ ।। 30 W as before; che azi ccc. are used to imply the inst. gen. and loc. cases, 16, कृतं धनं स्थितं. 31 A आदिती ; B अदिती ; in the Comm. A has the same, B अत् ( originally श्रात् ) and ईत. 3 AB havc only thrsex. 33 W then adds another stir. (s. 25) यत्तत्किमः ॥ बलमित्यनुवर्तते । यतस्किम् इत्येतेषु परतः प्रातः स्यान ईत्ययमादेशो भवति । नियामित्यनुवर्तते । प्रथमैकवचनवर्ज। ए आदेशश्च बहलवचनात् ॥ जोए तीए कौए जोहिं तोहि कोहि । पो जाए ताए काए जाहिं ताहि काहिं ॥ यस्याः तस्याः कस्याः यामिः ताभिः कामिः Dadds the six examples of the genitive to the preceding súcca; cf.VI., 6. 34 Wadds सौ दीर्घः पूर्वस्य, 35 सौ--वाध्यते given from DE (M.S. 18); ABW om. and add घणं वयं in the ex. 36 AB only andia.

·सूट ॥ मारुतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ नामंत्रणे सायोत्वदीविंदरा" ॥ २७ ॥ आमंत्रणे गम्यमांने सो परत मोत्वदीर्घविंदयो न भवति । अत योत्सोरित्योत्यं प्राप्त । सुमिस्सुप्सु दीर्घ इति दीर्घः। सोर्षि दुर्नपुंसक इतिविंदुर्माप्तः॥ हे वच्छ"। हे अग्णि । हे याउ। हे वण। हे दहि । हे मह ॥ ॥त्रियामात एत् ॥ २८ ॥ स्त्रियामामंगणे आतः स्थाने एत्वं भवति सौ परतः ॥ हे माले। हे साले ।। अत्यस्य हल इति सोलोपः ॥ ॥ ईदूतोह खः ॥ २९ ॥ आमंत्रणे ईदूतोह खो" भवति ॥ हे णइ । हे बहू ।। ॥ सोर्वि दुर्नपुंसके ॥ ३० ॥ नपुंसके वर्तमानस्य सोर्षि दुर्भवति ॥ वर्ण । दहिं । महू । ॥ मत आरः सुपि" ॥३१॥ ऋकारांतस्य सुपि परत आर इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ भत्तारो सोहइ । भत्तारं पेखिसु । भत्तारेण कों ।। "मातुरात् ।। ३२॥ मातृसंघधिन फारस्याकारो भवति ॥ माया सोहइ । मा पेक्वसु । मामाइ का माआए ॥ । उजश्शस्टाडस्सुप्सु चा ॥३३॥ जश्शस्दाडस्सुप्सु परत ऋकारस्य स्थाने उकारादेशोभवति masc. ex. 37 W सो. 38 AB om. 39 of. iv., 6. 40 Wadds त्रिवा. 4. w puts s. 30 after s. 26. 42 B by mistake. 43 W उण जरशस्टासिडस्सु वा and transposes sútras 32, 33. 44 The examples in AB are rather obscure, and the fornis from YFIT are only fully given in DE.

·॥ पंचमः परिच्छेदः॥ जस्। भत्तुणौ भत्तारा ॥ शस्। भत्तुणो" भत्तारे ॥ टा"। भत्तुणा भत्तारेण ॥ डस्। भत्तुणो भत्तारस्म" ॥ सुप्। भन्सु भत्तारेसु ॥ आरादिः पूर्ववत् ॥ ॥ पितृभ्रातृजामातॄणामरः ॥ ३४ ॥ पिनादीनां सुपि परत ऋतोऽरो भवति। आरापवादः ॥ पिअरं पिअरेण । भाअरं भाअरेण । जामारी जामाअरेण ॥ ॥ आच सौ ॥३५॥ पित्रादीनामाकारो भवतिसौ परतः॥ चकारादरश्च ॥ पिआ पिअरो। भाआ भाअरो। जामाआ जामाअरो॥ [॥राज्ञश्च ॥ ३६॥] राजनशब्दस्य आ इत्ययमादेशो भवति सौ परतः ॥ राआ । [॥ आमंत्रणे वा बिंदुः ॥ ३७॥] राजन्शब्दस्य आमंत्रणे वा विदुः स्यात् ॥ हे रा। हे राम ॥ [॥ जरशस्डसां णो ॥३८॥] राक्ष उत्तरेषां जस् शस् डस् इत्येतेषां णो इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ राआणो पेस्खति । राआणो पेक्ख । राइणो धण । रपणो धणं । [॥ शस पत् ॥ ३९ ॥] राश परस्य शस ए इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ राए पेस्ख। राआणो पेक्स [॥ आमोण ॥ ४० ॥] राश उत्तरस्यामः पष्ठोबहुवचनस्य ण इत्ययमादेशो भवति ।। 45 W भत्तणे, Aom 46A bur CET. 47 D (not E) भत्तुस्म. 48 A भत्तुस्म (९) 49 D श्राच 50 Thiesc sútras on rijan (s 36-44) are only found in DEVB W has a , DE agree. 51 puts S 40 after S. 43. few variations ·४६ । माकृतप्रकाशः ।। राआणं॥ [॥दा णा ॥४१॥] राश उत्तरस्याः टाविभक्तःणा इत्ययमादेशः स्यात् ।। राइणा ॥ [॥ उसश्च द्वित्वं वांत्यलोपश्च" ॥४२॥] राश उत्तरस्य उसादेशस्य टादेशस्यच वा विकल्पेन द्वित्वं भवति । अंत्यस्यच लोपः ॥ रण्णी राणो घणं ॥राइणा रपणा क॥ [ ॥ इदद्वित्वे ॥४३॥] वेति निवृत्तं। डसादेशस्य टादेशस्यच अकृते द्वित्वे राश इत्वं भवति ॥ राइणो राइणा ॥ कृते द्वित्वे त्वित्वं न भवति ॥ रणों रण्णा ॥ [॥ आ णोणमोरडसि ॥४४॥] णोणमोः परयोः राशो जकारस्य आकारादेशः स्यात् । अङसि पप्ट्ये कवचने न भवति ॥ राआणो पेक्खति । राआणो पेनन। राआणं धर्ण ॥ अङसीति किं ॥ राइणो रणो धणं ॥ शेपमदंतवत् ॥ राझं। रापहिं । राआ राआदो राआदु। राआहितो राआसुतो। राअम्मि राए रापसु ॥ राजाने । राजभिः। राझः। राजम्यः। राशि । राजसु ॥ ॥ आत्मनो ऽप्पाणो वा ॥४५॥ आत्मनोऽप्पाण इत्यादेशो भवति ।। अप्पा । अप्पाणो । [इत्वद्वित्ववजे राजवदनादेशे ॥ ४६॥ आत्मनो ऽनादेशे राजवत् कार्य स्यादित्वद्वित्वे वर्जयित्वा ॥ अप्पा। अप्पाणो। अप्पणा। अप्पणो।। आत्मा। आत्मानः। आत्मना । आत्मन:।। 52 W जलोपो वा. 53W णोणयोरादहसि. 54 cf. ii., 48. 55 This sútra is only found in DEW.; W adds the forms अत्ता अत्ताणो.

·॥ पंचमः परिच्छेदः॥ । ब्रह्माद्या आत्मवत् ॥४७॥ ब्रह्माद्याः शब्दा लक्ष्याणुसारेणात्मवत् साधवो भवंति ॥ वाहा वम्हाणो जुया जुवाणो। अद्धा अद्धाणो॥ ब्रह्मन् । युवन् । अध्वन् एवमादयो लक्ष्याणुसारेणानुगंतव्याः॥ ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे लिंगविभक्त्यादेशः पंचमः परिच्छेदः 56 ACW ATTET HIUSIUT ; A om. Sans. ; W explains it by अनडान् ; B n..

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ अथ पठः परिच्छेदः ॥ - ॥ सर्वादेर्जस एत्वं ॥१॥ सर्वादेरुत्तरस्य जस एत्वं भवति । ॥ सन्वे । जे । ते । के । कदरे ॥ सर्वे । ये। ते । के। कतरे ॥ ॥ डेस्सिंम्मित्था॥२॥ डेः सप्तम्येकवचनस्य सर्वादिपरस्थितस्य स्थाने मिम्मि स्थ इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ सव्यस्मिं। सव्वम्मि। सम्वत्य ॥ इशरस्मिं । इअरम्मि इअरत्य' ।। सर्वस्मिन् । इतरस्मिन् ।। ॥ इदमेतत्किंयत्तद्रष्टा इणा वा ॥३॥ इदं। एतत् । किं। यत् । तत् । इत्येतेभ्यः टा इत्यस्य इणादेशी भवति वा ॥ इमिणा । पदिणा । किणा। जिणा। तिणा ॥ पक्षे । इमेण । पदेण। केण। जेण। तेण । अनेन। एतेन । केन । येन । तेन ॥ ।। आम पर्सि ॥४॥ इदमादिभ्य उत्तरस्य आम पसिं इत्ययमादेशो चा भवति । इमेसिं इमाण'। एदेसिं पदाण। केसि काण। जेसिं जाण । तेसिं ताण ॥ ।। किंयत्तद्भगो उस आसः ॥५॥ । I ABW मि for स्मं. 2 ABW FET, but all have Haft; of. S. 15. 3 A -त्था. 4 B -स्सि. 5A-स्था. 6So BDand Hema-ch, BAW कइणा जइणा तइणा. 7 A in these second fornis; B-vi: 8 W adds afein solatfet EYTTU 11 झासिं। एदासिं। कासिं। जासिं। तासिं॥ -UT for ·॥ पष्ठः परिच्छेदः॥ किं । यत् । तत् । एभ्य उत्तरस्य ङस आस इत्ययमादेशो भवति वा ॥ कास। कस्स ॥ जास। जस्स ॥ तासातस्स ।। ॥ इद्भःस्सा से ॥६॥ इकारांतेभ्यः किमादिभ्य उत्तरस्य डन्सः स्सा से इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ किस्सा। कोसे। कीआ। की। की। की। जिस्सा । जीसे। जीया। जीए । जीम। जीइ ॥ तिस्सा। तीसे। तीमा । तीए। तीमती॥ ॥ डेहि ॥७॥ मादिभ्य उत्तरस्य डेहि इत्ययमादेशो भवति चा॥ कहि । कस्सिं। फम्मि। कत्य ।। जदि। जस्सि। जम्मि । जत्य ॥ तदि। तस्सिं । तम्मि । तत्य ।। ॥ आहे. या काले ॥८॥ किंयत्तद्गे काले आहे इा इत्यादेशी वा भवतः॥ काहे। जाहे। ताहे॥ फइमा । जइआ। तइमा ॥ कहि इत्यादयोऽपि। कदाायदा। तदा।। "तो"दो डसेः॥९॥ किंयत्तद्भगे उसेःचो दो इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ कत्तो । फदो॥ जत्तो। जदो।।तचो। तदो । ॥ तदोध ॥१०॥ W reads s.6, रसः स्थासो खियो । दारविभ्यधागरातेभ्यत्र दिया किमादिभ्य उत्तरस रसः स्सा सो 'nyadeisi vs bbstatsb' : etc., after the ex. it adds दगमदरोन रसिरिप्रद (न... 22. vr. lect. ) df. Lass. Inst., p. 321–3. 10 BW 41, and similarly ti st. 1: Baul etc. 12 BD ut for 1, and similarly in Comm. I3 W र उथ.

·५० -- ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ तद् उत्तरस्य उसेरोकारादेशो"भववि वा ॥ तो। तत्तो। तदो। ॥ उसा से ॥ ११ ॥ घेति वर्तते । तदो डसा सह से इत्ययमादेशो भवति। पक्ष यथाप्राप्त । से। तास । तस्सा ॥ । आमा सिं॥१२॥ तद आमा सह सिं इत्ययमादेशो वा" भवति ॥ सिं। ताण" ॥ तेषां तासां॥ ॥किम. कः ॥१३॥ किंशष्टस्य सुपि परतः क इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ को। के। केण । केहि ॥ ॥ इद्म इमः॥१४॥ सुपि परत इदम इम इत्यममादेशो भवति ॥ इमो। इमे । इ । इमेण । इमेहि ॥ "स्सस्सिमोरद्धा" ॥ १५॥ स्सस्सिमोः परत इदमो ऽदादेशो भवति ॥ अस्स। इमस्स" ॥ अस्सि" इमस्सि"॥ ॥ न ह । १६ ॥ . om.; 14 AW उकार.. 15 A W 23; for cf. s. 20; Hema-ch. also gives it, and it is found in the Setubandha ; sec Höfer, Zeitsch., p. 517. 16 A om. Sans. ; BD add af : ( for १); Wadds खियामपि से तिस्सा। समहणे डमिमहण से ततो. 17 Only in DW. 18 So BDE (B ताण'); OU? ; W fil oru afi; Hema-cho also has fet, sfi 20 DW add थाः B confuses sútras सम्मिमोदा. 12 A दमस्म. 23 W मम्मि (अस्सि in .. 16. 4A इदमस्गि, but not so in s.16. 19AB 14.15.21w ·. ॥ पष्ठः परिच्छेदः ॥ इदमो दकारेण सह स्थाने हकारादेशो वा भवति ॥ इह ॥ पक्षे। अस्सिं। इमस्सिं । इमम्मि ॥ ॥न त्यः ॥ १७॥ इदमः परस्य उत्थ इत्ययमादेशो न भवति ॥ उ. स्मिंम्मित्था इति प्राप्ते प्रतिपिध्यते ॥ इह । अस्मिं । इमस्मिं । इमम्मि ॥ ॥ त सके समोरिदमिणमिणमो॥ १८॥ नपुंसकलिंगे इदमः खमोः परतः सविभक्तिकस्य इदं इणं इणमो इत्येते त्रय आदेशा भवंति ॥ इदं । इणं । इणमो धर्ण । ॥ एतदः सावोत्वं वा ॥ १९ ॥ 'पतच्छन्दस्य सौ परत ओत्वं या भवति ॥ नित्ये प्राप्त विकल्प्यते ॥ एस"। एसो॥ एपः ।। ॥तो उसेः ॥२०॥ एतदः परस्य उसेः त्तो इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पत्तो । पदादो। एदादु । पदाहि ।। एतस्मात् ॥ । त्तोत्थयोस्तलोपः ॥२१॥ एतदस्तफारस्य त्तोत्ययोः परतो लोपो भवति । पत्तो पत्य । ॥ तदेतदोः सःसायनपुंसके ॥ २२ ॥ तच्छन्दस्य एतच्छन्दस्य यस्तकारः तस्य सकारादेशो भवति अनपुंसके सौ परतः । सो पुरिसो। सा मदिला। एस। एसो। एसा । साविति" किं॥ पदे । ते। एदं । तं ॥ अनपुंसक इति किं ॥ तं पदं धणं॥ ॥असो दो मुः" ॥ २३ ॥ 25 Added fronm DV. 26A इणमं. 7 एगा (1): W has as an ex. एदो एवं - एतत्. 28 DW टो. ( nor W) एसो. 30 DW सो.. 3: D gat; for these cf. Lass.. p. 129. 32 mafafe and its examples not in A. 33AF Bp. . . A .. 19 BD ·૧૨ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ अदसो दकारस्य सुपि परवो मु इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ अमू पुरिसो। अमू महिला । असूओ" पुरिसा। अमूओ महिलाओ। अमु वर्ण । अमूह वणाई॥ ।। हश्च सौ ॥ २४ ॥ अदसो दकारस्य सौ परतो हकारादेशी भवति ॥ अह" पुरिसो। अह महिला। अह वणं ॥ हादेशो ऽयमोत्यात्वविंदन त्रिप्वपि लिंगेपु परत्वाद्वाधते ॥ ॥पदस्य ॥२५॥ अधिकारो ऽयं । आशब्दविधानात् । यदित उर्दू मनुक्रमिप्यामा पदस्य तद्भवतीत्तेवं वेदितव्यं। तच्च तनवोदाहरिप्यामः ॥ । युष्मदस्त तुम ॥२६ ।। सावित्येव । युष्मदः पदस्य सौ परतः तं तुम इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ तं मागदो। तुम आगदो ॥ ॥ तुचामि" ॥२७॥ युष्मदः पदस्य अमि परतः तु इत्यादेशो वा भवति। तुमंच" ॥ तुपेश्यामि । तुम पेक्वामि ॥ ॥ तुज्या तुम्हे' जसि ॥ २८ ॥ 34 AB मू. 35 So DE om.; B अमूणो; असू. 36W श्रमूउ. 37 B अमू. 38. Lass. Inst., p. 327.39 अहं throughour. 40 DE युष्मदस्त नुवं and similarly in Comm. 41 ABC संचामि ; DE संचामि ; W (and the Prakr. Sanjiv.) Gafa ;-fs be correct, it must be the enclitic form (cf. Lass. Inst., P. 328) bur it is probably a mistake for k in copying from an MS in the Bengali character. Wa ga; DE seem to give guia as a new sútra, and add to this in is Comm. चकारात् तुं तुवंच. 43 Mss. a here in the 3B A W B -- ·५३ ॥ पष्ठः परिच्छेदः ॥ युष्मदः पदस्य जसि परतः तुझे तुम्हे इत्येतावादेशौ भवतः॥ तुज्न आगदा तुम्हे आगदा ॥ ॥चोच शसि ॥२९॥ शसि युष्मदः पदस्य यो इत्यादेशो भवति। चकारात् तुझे तुम्हे च ॥ यो पेस्यामि ॥ तुझे तुमहे पेफ्सामि ॥ ॥डायोस्तइ तए तुमए तुमे ॥ ३०॥ युप्मदुचरयोः टा डि इत्येतयोः तइ तए तुमए तुमे इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ टा॥ तइ तए तुमए तुमे फ॥ ङि ॥ तह तप तुमए तुमे दिसं॥ ॥ उसि तुमौतुहतुज्झतुम्हतुम्माः" ॥ ३१ ॥ युप्मदः पदस्य इसि तुमो तुद्द तुझ तुम्ह तुम्म इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ तुमो पदं । तुद्द तुम तुम्ह तुम्म पदं ॥ । आदि च ते दे॥३२॥ आडि तृतीयकवचने चकाराद् डसि च परतो युप्मदः पदस्य ते दे इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ ते कसं। दे फो॥ ते धर्ण । दे धणं । ॥तुमाद च ॥३३॥ आङि युप्मदः पदस्य तुमाइ इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ तुमार - की। ।। तुमहिं तुम्हेहिं तुम्मेदि" भिसि ॥३४॥ मिसि परतो युप्यः परस्य तुम्झदि तुम्झदि तुम्मेदि इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ तुल्दोदि तुम्हेदि तुम्मेदि कसं॥ 44 नुम्म plain in following sútras D generally has Fe, the other MSS. a (cf. ni.. 8); W generally writus fans for fi CEW; AB not clear, excepe in one es.; D reads तुम्म, corrccred in the margin to इम्म ; only Dhs मुन्द, the ottics T. 45 W adds PETITE TO. 46 So ASS. plainly : D 29 .

·18 ॥ प्रातभकाशः ॥ ॥ ङसौ तत्तो तहत्तो" तुमादो तुमादु तुमाहि ॥३५ । ङसौ परतो युष्मदः पदस्य तत्तो तइत्तो तुमादो तुमादु तुमाहि इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ तत्तो आगदो। तइत्तो तुमादो तुमादु तुमाहि मागदो॥ त्वदागतः ॥' ॥ तुम्हाहितो तुम्हासुंतो भ्यसि ॥ ३६॥ युप्मदः पदस्य पंचमीबहषचने भ्यसि तुम्हाहि तो तुम्हासुतो इत्येतावादेशौ भवतः॥ तुम्हाहि तो तुम्हासुतो बागदो । ॥ वो भे तुल्झाणं तुम्हाणमामि ॥३७॥ आमि परतो युप्मदः पदस्य वो भे तुज्माण' तुम्हाण इत्येत आदेशा भवंति,॥ वो धर्ण । तुज्माण तुम्हाणं धर्ण ।। झे तुमम्मि ॥ ३८॥ युप्मदः पदस्य ङौ परतः तुमम्मि इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ तुमम्मि ठि। पूर्वोक्ताश्च तहमभृतयश्चत्वारोऽप्यादेशा भवति ॥ ।। तुझसु तुम्हेसु" सुपि ॥ ३६॥ युप्मदः पदस्य सप्तमीयहूवचने तुझसु तुम्हेसु इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ।। तुझसु ठिअं॥ ॥अस्मदो हमहमहमें सौ ।। ४ ।। असदः पदस्य सौ परतो हं अहं अह इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ है अहं अद्द करेमि॥ ' belore, तुन्भेहि, corrected in the margin, only D म्ह for ह्य in the second form. 47 BD ततो तदतो, but B_not so originally. 48 AV-हयः as a compound; f. 5.48. 49 So BDE; A has को तुमाणं तुम्माणं भामि; वो ते तुम्हाण माणमामि ; and similarly in the Comm. of each. 50 पूर्व-मति not in A; f.5.30 51 S. BDW and ·- ॥ षष्ठः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ अहम्मिरमिच ॥४१॥ अमि परतो ऽसदः पदस्य अहम्मि इत्ययमादेशो भवति। सौ च ॥ अहम्मि पेरख । अहम्मि फरेमि, मां प्रेक्षस्व । अहं करोमि ॥ ॥ मं मम ॥४२॥ अमोति वर्तते । अस्मदः पदस्य अमि परतो मं ममं इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ मं ममं पेन्स॥ | अम्हे जरशसो॥४३॥ अस्मदः पदस्य जशसोः परतः अम्हे इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ अम्हे आगदा। अम्हे पेस्स्व ॥ ॥णो शसि ॥४४॥ अस्मदः पदस्य शसि परतो णो इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ णो पेक्स ॥ अस्मान् प्रेक्षस ॥ ॥ आडि मे ममाइ॥४५॥ अस्मदः पदस्य आडि परतो" मे ममाइ इत्येतापादेशी भवतः॥ मे फ। गमाइ फ॥ ।। च महमप॥ ४६॥ अस्मदः पदम्य टी परतो मह मय इत्येतापादेशी मयतः। चकारातृतीयैकयचनेव १ मा मए ठिम र मद मए फर्भ ॥ ॥ अग्हदि मिसि ॥१७॥ Probably C); A तुम्मेगु . 37; As तुमेमु in ex. 5-Aममि n shr. and cx.: Wreads the sir. महन्मि पानि.. 53 A lesf (sútras +355) us here lost in A (d. Lass. Inst., p. 330); C fuas the missing súcas, but often corrupt. 54 BCDER; ए; Hemach gives as his sit. मन्द मारो मार देगा. 558 टोपिम्ही.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ अस्पदः पदस्य भिसि अम्देहिं इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ अम्हेहि करं॥ ॥ ॥ मत्तो मइत्तो ममादो ममादु" ममाहि ङसौ ॥४८॥ अस्मदः पदस्य उसौ परत एत आदेशा भवंति ॥ मत्तो गदो। महत्तो। ममादो ममादु ममाहि गदो॥ ॥ अम्हाहितो अम्हासुतो भ्यसि ॥४९॥ अस्मदः पदस्य भ्यसि परत आहाहिंतो अम्हासुतौ इत्येतावा- देशौ भवतः ॥ अम्हाहिंतो अम्हासुतो गदो॥ ॥ मे मम मह मज्झ उसि ॥५०॥ अस्मदः पहस्य उसि परत पत आदेशा भवंति ॥मे घणं। मम मह मज्झ धणं॥ ॥ मज्झ णो अम्ह सम्हाणमम्हे आमि ॥५१॥ अस्मदः पदस्य आमि परत एत आदेशा भवति ॥ मझ" णो अम्ह अम्हाणं अम्हे धणं ॥ अस्माकं धन ।। ॥ ममम्मि ङौ ॥५२॥ अस्मदः पदस्य डो परतो ममम्मि इत्यादेशो भवति ।। ममम्मि ठि । पूर्वोक्को मह मए इत्येतोच" । ॥ अन्देसु सुपि ॥५३॥ अस्मदः पदस्य सप्तमीयद्ववचने सुपि परतः अम्हेसु इत्ययमादेशी भवति ॥ अम्हेसु ठि॥ 56B ममतो. 57 B om. ; sútras 48, 49 desunt in 'C. 58 B अम्हेहितो अम्हेसुंतो. 59 W मरमाणों 60 BC om. अम्हे ; the Prák. Sanj. om: मग्म and varles between णो and d. 61 BC मम्मणो (in one word E has no Comm; only D मज्म पर्ण यो घणं, which Hema-cli. confirms. 62 पूर्व-तीय added from B; G.S.46. 63D अम्रे,. W मग्माणो;

·॥ पष्ठः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ वेदों ॥५४॥ पदस्थति निवृत्तं । सुपीति वर्तते ॥ द्विशब्दस्य दो इत्ययमादेशो भवति सुपि परतः॥ दोहिं । दोसु ॥ द्वाभ्यां । द्वयोः । ॥स्तिः ॥ ५५॥ विशन्दस्य सुपि परतः ति इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ तीहि । तीसु" ॥ त्रिभिः । त्रिपु॥ ॥तिणि जरशस्भ्यां ।। ५६॥ निशब्दस्य जयशस्भ्यां सह तिण्णि इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ तिण्णि आगदा । तिषिण पेस्ख ॥नय आगताःनीन्प्रेक्षस। ॥ दुर्दुवे दोणि वा ।। ५७ ॥ विशन्दस्य जशसभ्यां सह दुवे दोणि इत्येतावादेशौ भवतः ॥ दुवे फुणंति। दोणि कुणंति ॥ पक्षे दो कुणति ॥ द्वौ कुरुतः । दुवे पेस्य । दोणि पेरपपक्षे दो पेक्स ॥ छौ प्रेक्षस ॥ । चतुरश्वत्तारो चत्तारि॥५८॥ चतुर्शब्दस्य जशस्भ्यां सहं चत्वारो चत्तारि इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ।। चत्वारो चत्वारि पुरिसा कुणंति। चत्तारो चचारि पुरिसे पेक्स। ॥पपामामो एई"॥ ५९॥ 64 D दोसुं. 65W(and the Prika. Sanj. ) संस्सी. 66 S. "the other MSS. fo. 67 So CW; the others fag (D-मु). The Prak. Sanj., Sanksh. Sira, and Hema-ch. all haveist. Lass., Inst., p. 102.68 B विस (Hic); Cक्षिण : Dविरिण W विणिः न. Lass., p. 319. 69 A recommenccs here; cf. p. 55, rsoce 2. 70 Wadas भिसादी रेफतयरमोशः। शेन पहिं etc. 71 A throughout. - . तिलि (I) ·. प्रास्ताकाशः॥ एषां द्वित्रिचतुः शब्दानामामः स्थाने पहं एत्ययमादेशो भवति ।। दोण्डं धणं । तिण्हं धर्ण । वतुण्ड" धणं ।। ॥ भुपो ऽदंतवत् ॥ ६ ॥ शेषः मुस्विधिरदतवद्भवति । अकारांताभिसो हि इत्ययमा देश उत इकारोफारांतादपि भवति। अग्गीहि चाहिं एवं मालाहि णहहिं पहहिं । अजिस्म वाउस्म । अज्गीदो। वाजदो। अग्गीदु । वाऊदु । पचं दोहिं तीहि चऊहिं ।। ॥न डिस्योरेदातौ ॥ ६१ ॥ इकारोकारांतान डिहस्योरदंतवद् एकाकारो न भवतः" । अस्गिम्मि याउम्मि। अगोदी बाऊदो। अगदु बाउट । अग्गीहि बाऊहि ॥ ॥"भ्यसि.॥६२५. नेत्यनुवर्तते। भ्यसि परत इकारोकारांतयोरदंतवदेत्यं न भवति ॥ अग्गीहितो पाऊहितो॥ अग्गीसुतो । वाऊसुतो ) ॥ द्विववनस्य बहुवचनं ॥ ६३ ॥ सर्वासा विमतीनां सुपर तिमांच द्विवचनस्य यहवचनं 72 ACDE चतुराई; W वजराई, Bam. and confuses the Comm. of ss. 59, 50. 73 So D; A शेषेषु विधि-- 74w तीहिं ; the rest तिहिं ; of. nore A, P. 5 mox W हिं: A अदुहिं , BDE चहिं . the other Gram. have i. 75 Aकारी- w इकारायंताना 76_of. v. 6, 9. 17 Wadded a to the sút, ind, eherefore, adds estoneously bare TRTC for 6. 78 The MSS. have storitate eccus the anusw. being optrorially added or not by s. w. 16, 19 ACDE (and the Prák. Sanj.) ;'BW 27; and similarly in the comm.; d. y. 12, and Lass.. . तात्। B -ताना . P.310.

·॥ पष्ठ परिच्छेदः ॥
प्रयोक्तव्यं ॥ वृक्षो। वच्छा ।। वृक्षाभ्यां । वच्छेहि । घच्छाहितो।।
वृक्षयोः। वच्छाण । वच्छेसु ॥
तिङो यथा ॥ तिष्ठतः। चिट्ठति ॥
॥ चतुर्थ्याः पष्ठी ।। ६४ ॥
चतुर्थोविभक्त स्थाने पष्ठीविभक्तिर्भवति ॥ घम्हणस्स" देहि ।
वम्हणाण देहि ॥ ब्राह्मणाय देहि। ब्राह्मणेभ्यो देहि ॥
।
॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्रारुतप्रकाशे सर्वनाम
परिच्छेदः पाठः॥
80 A चतुर्थी. 8 A भण-; D वम- (but corrected in marg.).

·६० ॥ प्रारतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ अथ सप्तमः परिच्छेदः ।। ॥ ततिपोरिदेती ॥१॥ त तिप् इत्येतयोरेकैकस्य स्थाने इत् एत् इत्येतावादेशी भवतः। पढइ पढए । सहइ सहए ॥ पठति पठते । सहति सहते॥ ॥ थास्सिपोः सि से ॥२॥ थास् सिप इत्येतयोरेकैकस्य स्थाने सि से इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ पढसि पढसे। सहसि सहसे॥ ।। मिपोर्मिः ॥३॥ इट् मिप इत्येतयोः स्थाने मिर्भवति ॥ पढामि । इसामि । सहामि॥ ॥न्तिहेत्थामोमुमा' बहूपु ॥४॥ बहुषु वर्तमानानां तिङां स्थाने न्ति ह इत्या मो मुम इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ प्रथमपुरुषस्य । रमंति'। पदति। हसति ॥ मध्यमस्य ॥ रमह । हसह। पदित्या ॥ उत्तमस्य ॥ पढामो" पढमु। पढम॥ 1 5A मि. BD ते. 2 The MSS. often read 98; cf. ii., 24. 3 So MSS.; it is reversed in the comm. of s. 5. 4 एकnot in A. 6 A पढमि, etc. 7 AW fa in sút. and 8 ABD इत्था श्रामो; W इत्य अमो; Hema-ch. and the Prákļita Sany, have spent and At, which seems beccer ; 7; E has no comm. 9 The anusw. in these cx. erased in W seems to have रमत्ति, etc. 10 ADE पढित्या; B qeteat; W fare of. Lass., p. 336, and infra. sút. 17. 1 E पढमो; f. S. of. S. A; 31.

·॥ ॥ सप्तमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥अत ए मे॥५॥ नित्यार्थ वचनं यतो विशेषण। ततिपोः सिपथासोर ए से इत्यादेशावत एव परौ भवत'। नान्यस्मात्॥ ततिपोः । पढए ॥ सिपथासोः। रमसे पदसे ॥ अत इति किं । होइ । भवति ॥ अस्तेर्लोप ॥६॥ 'अस्तेर्धातोः धास्सिपोरादेशयोः परतो लोपो भवति । सुतो" सि । पुरिसो सि ॥ सुप्तोऽसि । पुरुपो ऽसि ।। ॥ "मिमोमुमानामघोहश्च" ॥७॥ मिमोमुमानामस्तेः परेपामयो हकारः प्रयोक्तव्यः। अस्तेश्व लोपः॥ गओ म्हि । गम म्हो। गम म्ह। गा म्ह" ॥ गतोऽस्मि । गताः सः॥ ॥ यक ईआइजी ॥ ८॥ यकः स्थाने ईथ इज इत्यादेशौ भवतः॥ पढीआइ पढिजह । सहीसह सहिजइ ।। पव्यते। पाते ॥ ॥ नात्यद्वित्वे ॥९॥ धातोरंत्यद्वित्वे सति यक ईअ इज्ज इत्यादेशो न भवतः ।। हस्सह। गम्मद॥ गम्यते। हस्यते॥ गमादीनां विकल्पेन द्वित्वविधानात् । द्वित्वविधान उक्तावादेशी न भवतः। द्वित्वा- " .. 12 नित्य-भवतः from BD; A is obscure here; f. SS. 1, 2, and Lass. Inst., p. 336%3 B has यावत् for यतो, and both have afatiti, as in S. 1. W for 'nityartbam-visesanam' has 'niyamartbam vacbanam'. 13 A असेलपिः. 14 E परयोः A असेर्धातोः परतः थास्सिपोलोपः. 15 A सुणो. 16 A om. म in súc, and comm. 17 Wed in sút. and comm.; Ba... 18 A gives the plur. ex. गा मा गयो झा; B has 7777 throughout; W adds samyogapúrvo brasvab; cf. iv. d, 19 ff. viii., 58; A merely quotes the sút. ; the note.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ । विधाने तु भवत नव ॥ गमीअइ । गमिजइ ।। न्तमाणौ शतृशानचोः ॥१०॥ शत शानच् इत्येतयोरेकैकस्य न्त माण इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ पदंतो। पढमाणो। हसंतो"। हसमाणो। ॥ईच स्त्रियां ॥ ११ ॥ स्त्रियां वर्तमानयोः शतृशानचोरीकारादेशो भवति । न्तमाणी च॥ हसई। हसंती। हसमाणा ॥ वेवई। घेवंती। वेवमाणा ॥ 11 धातोभविष्यति हि ॥ १२॥ भविष्यति काले धातोः परो हिशब्दः प्रयोक्तव्यः।। होदिइ । हसिहिइ"। होहिंति। हसिदिति ॥ भविष्यति। हसियति । भविष्यति। हसिष्यति ।। ॥ उत्तमे स्सा हाच ॥ १३ ॥ भविष्यत्युत्तमे स्सा हा इत्येतो प्रयोक्तव्यो। चकाराद् हिश्च ।। होस्सामि। होहामि। होहिमि । : होस्सामो। . होहामो। होहिमो । इत्यादि । भविष्यामि । भविष्यामः ॥ ॥मिना संवा ॥१४॥ भविष्यत्युत्तमे मिना सह धातोः परः संशब्द प्रयोक्तन्तो वा । होस्सं। पक्षे होस्सामि । होहामि। होहिमि" ॥ . ॥ . । । rest ts given from BD%3B W absurdly makes a new sútra of it, besides having it in Sect, viii. 20 DE a for न्त throughout. 21' The MSS."vary between सह and हस. 22 DW ईच ; A इत् ; B इव; all have t in the ex.. 23 AD हि. 24 होहोई हसिहोइ. 25 BDw add the pl. forms in म and मु, इस्मामु etc. 26 W मिपा. 27 Dadds हसिस्सं etc.

·। ॥ सप्तमः परिच्छेदः॥ ६३ [॥ मोमुमैहिस्माहिप्या' ॥१५॥] , भविष्यति काल उत्तमे बहुवचनादेशस्य मो मुम इत्येतैः सह हिस्मा हित्था इत्येतावादेशौ वा भवतः ॥ होहिस्मा होहित्था। हसिहिस्मा हंसिहित्था ॥ भविष्यामः। हसिष्यामः॥ पक्षे। होहिमो। होस्मामो। होहामी। हलिहिमो"। हसिस्मामो। हसिहामो। एवं मुमयोरपि । इत्यादि । [॥"कदाश्रुवचिगमिरुदिट्टशिविदिरूपाणां काहं दाह सोच्छं वोच्छ" गच्छं रोच्छ दन्छे वेच्छं ॥ १६ ॥] भविष्यति काल उत्तमैकवचने कृत्रादीनां स्थाने यथासंख्य काई प्रभृतय आदेशा भवंति ॥ कई करिष्यामि। दाई दास्यामि । सोच्र्छ श्रोप्यामि। वोच्छं वक्ष्यामि । गच्छं गमिष्यामि । रोच्छं रोदिप्यामि । दच्छे द्रक्ष्यामि । धेच्छं वेत्स्यामि इत्यादि ॥ [वादीनां विष्वप्यनुस्वारवर्ज" हिलोपश्च वा ॥ १७ ॥ ] श्रु इत्येवमादीनां प्रथममध्यमोत्तमेपु त्रिप्वपि पुरुपेषु परतो भविष्यति काले सोच्छं इत्यादय आदेशा भवंति । अनुसार विहाय। हिलोपश्च वा॥ सोच्छिइ सोच्छिहिह । थोप्यति ॥ सोच्छिंति । सोच्छिहिंति । श्रोयति ॥ सोच्छिसि सोच्छिहिसि। थोप्यसि ॥ सोच्छित्था। सोच्छिहित्था: । श्रोप्यथ ॥ सोच्छिमि । सोच्छिहिमि । थोप्यामि ।। ॥ . 334. Lass. 28 sûtras.15–22 are only found in BDEW; fot súc. 15. of. Lass. Inst.. p. 353. 29 BW om. 30 B होहिमामो (१). 31 DW om. 32 B gives these in full, P. 351 for this sút. 34 Barca aren'; the other MSS. prefer 35So w; BDE इच्छ. 36W adds रूपाहणादन्यत्रापि । यथा मोछ पेठं । मोक्ष्यामि प्रेक्ष्यामि. 37 Wom. अपि ; lor sir., d. Lass, P: 353. 38 50 BW; DE - in both cx. Bf. vii. 4. छ.

·॥ ग्राशतप्रकाशः || सोच्छिमो। सोच्छिहिमो। सोच्छिम् । सोच्छिहिमु । सोच्छिम । सोच्छिहिम। सोच्छिस्मामो। सोच्छिस्मामु। सोच्छिस्माक" ॥ श्रीप्यामः॥ एवं घोच्छादिरपि ॥ [॥ उसुमु" विध्यादिस्वेकस्मिन् ॥१८॥ ] विध्यादिस्वेकस्मिन्नुत्पन्नस्य प्रत्ययस्य यथासंस्य उसु मु इत्येत आदेशा भवंति"॥ हसउ। इससु। इसमु"॥ हसतु। हम । हसानि॥ [॥ न्तुहमो बहुषु ॥ १९॥] विध्यादिपु यहुपूत्पन्नस्य प्रत्ययस्य यथासंख्य न्तु है मो इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ संतु"। इसह । हसामो॥ । वर्तमानभविष्यदनद्यतनयोजजा वा ॥२०॥ वतैमाने भविष्यद्गद्यतने विध्यादिपु" चोत्पन्नस्य प्रत्ययस्य जा जा इत्येतावादेशौ वा भवतः। पक्षे यथाप्राप्त। वर्तमाने तावत् । होज होजा। हसेज हसेजा। पक्षे होइ हसइ ॥ भविष्यदनद्यत्तने। होज होजा । पक्षे होहिइ इत्यादि ॥ विध्यादिप्वेवं.॥ 39W adds सोछिहामो -मु म सोहिस्सा सोछिहित्था वोचिहिस्सा ; the Comm. in B is corrupt, but secms=W; both further add vocbha at full length. 40 W उहिसु. 41 E adds त्रिवनुवर्तते. 42 DE add वेछउ सु -मु; W's ex. are होउ हसउ । होहि हसहि । होस हसमु, the last two=भवानि हसानि. It then adds आदि- TEUTETHETUIGI ATEST: ; B adds a very long Comm. apply. ing these forms at full length to tbe potent. Ist and 3rd pret, Ist fur. and bened. 43W तु-- 44 W हसतु. 45 हसमो. 46 Only W has -तनयोश्च ज.; E has throughout adya for anadya ; cf. Lass. pp. 357, 358. W adds 47 चकारात् here. 48 BWe add एवं पुरुपतये ऽपि एकवचनबहुवचन- Efu alcanfa which Hema-ch. also seems to allow. E; Dom.; BW, add as ex, होज होजा। करेज करेजा। with 49 So ..

·६५ ॥ सप्तमः परिच्छेदः ॥ [1 मध्येच ॥ २१ ॥ वर्तमानभविष्यदनद्यतनयोर्विध्यादिपु च धातुमत्यययोमध्ये ज जा इत्येतावादेशौ वा भवता । वर्तमाने। होजइ होजाइ । पझे यथाप्रात। विध्यादिपु । होजउ होजाउ । भवेदित्यादि । [॥ नानेकाचः ॥ २२ ॥ ] वर्तमानभविष्यदनद्यतनयोर्विध्यादिपु चानेकाचो धातोः प्रत्यये परे मध्ये ज जा इत्येताचादेशौ न भवतः कित्वंतः एव भवतः ॥ हसइ सुपरइ ॥ अंते यथा इसेज्ज" हसेज्जा तुवरेज" तुवरेज्जा । एवमन्ये ऽप्युदाहर्तव्याः ॥ ॥ ईअ भूते ॥२३॥ । - DE om. the following Sans. expl भवेत् कुर्यात् कुर्वीत भवतु भवतात् करीतु कुरुतात् अभवत् अकरोत् अकुरुत वभूव चकार चक्रे इत्यादि । ; Hema ch in lus corresponding sút. agrees with DE, but adds anye t anyásám apichchants ; hojja, bbavati, bhavet, bhavatu, abhavat, ahhút, habbuva, bbuyát bbavitá bhavisyatı abhavisyadvā tyarthab. 50 DE मध्यमे च. 51 E gives ex. without Comm. 52 Only w adds भविष्यति होजल-इ 53 54 W B adds भवेत् भवतु cte, as in 5 20 55 D ( not E) om. chus sút, and much of Comm, but it is supplied in margin.56 D हसिज , E has a fore in all 57 D तुवरिन. 58 BW om. and add पढेजना। परेज-जा 59ADE इथ B इंय . whas three sutras इन भूते ॥ भूते वर्तमानादातो प्रत्ययम्य देश आदेश स्यात् ॥ श्रासी। गेहीम। हमोश । पढीय ॥ पासीत् । अग्रहीत् । अहसत् । अपठत् । इत्यादि । पुरुषतमरूपाणि एक्वचनपहूचन- रूपाणि च पोळ्यानि , thon follow एसाची हीथ ॥ (s 24) and इथ भूते ॥ भूतै काले धातो. प्रत्यय इयइत्यादेश । भाशिम हगियं भवतु, ५ ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाश: ॥ भूते काले धातोः प्रत्ययस्य ईभ इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ हूबीअ हसी ॥ अभवत् । अहसत् ॥ एकाचो होअ॥ २४ ॥ भूते काल एकाचो धातोः प्रत्ययस्य हीअ इत्ययमादेशौ भवति होहीअ॥ अभूत" ॥ ॥ अस्तेरासि ॥२५॥ अस्तेर्भूते काल एकस्मिन्नर्थे आसि इति निपात्यते ॥ आसि राआ। आसि बहू ॥ आसीद्राजा। आसद्वधूः॥ ॥णिच एदादेरत आत् ॥ २६ ॥ णिच् प्रत्ययस्य एकारादेशो भवति । धातोरादेरकारस्य च आत्वं भवति ॥ कारेड्। हासेइ। पाढेइ॥ कारयति । हासयति। पाठयति ॥ ॥ आवेच॥२७॥ णिच आवे इत्ययमादेशो भवति। चकारात् पूर्वाक्तंच" ॥ करावे। SANDESH Sarvess पढिअ'। भासितं हसितं पठितं (W in fact gives the var. readings of one sút. as two); the copyists add anusw. wrongly, as sł che rule applied to the past participle (for which vide 5. 32), of. Lass., p. 354; Hema.ch., the Pr. Sanj., and the Sanksh. Sara read ई. The Pr. Sanj. adds in Comm., purusest vachaneşu, and expl. bhùta by लुट लड and लिट. 60 ADE भविश्र हसिमं; B हुवित्रं (cf. vm., I) करीअं हसोय।। give Sans. expl. ; Sanj. n. 61 A fe in sút., but atat in Comm.; BDE W (and the Pr. Sanj.) ही; of. Lass., p. 354. 62 Wadds काहीन एदाही। चकार श्रदात्. Only in w; W then adds a new sur., ल्यप् कारे होश्र; sec App. 644 only अासी, 65 Wएत्वं. 66 B कारा-; all the ex. in w have a none chic Pr. हीअं; ..

·६७ ॥ सप्तमः परिच्छेदः ॥ हसावेइ । पढावे । कारावे इत्यादि ॥ ॥ आविः क्तकर्मभावेपु या ॥ २८ ॥ णिच आविरादेशो भवति वा क्तप्रत्यये परतो भावकर्मणोश्च ॥ कारावि हसाविकं पढावि। कारिअं हासिअंपादि। भावकमैंणोश्च कराविजइ। हसाविजा। पढाविजइ। कारिजाइ । हासिजद। पाढिजइ॥ कारितं। हासितं। पाठितं। कार्यते। हास्यते । पाप्यते ॥ [नैदावे ॥ २९ ॥] क्तभावकर्मसु णिचप्रत्ययस्य एत् आवे इत्येताचादेशो न भवतः ॥ कारि। करावि कारिजइ । कराविजई"" ॥ अत आ मिपि वा ॥३०॥ अकारांताद्धातोर् मिपि परत आकारादेशो भवति वा ॥ हसामि । समि। ॥ इश्च बहुपु ॥ ३१॥ मिपो बहुपु परतो ऽत इकारादेशो भवति। चकारादाकारश्च ॥ हसिमो । हसामो। हसिमु । हसामु" । ॥से ॥३२॥ क्तप्रत्यये परतो ऽत इर्भवति ॥ हसिमं। पढिरंग ॥ एच" लातुमुन्तव्यभविष्यत्सु ॥ ३३ ॥ क्ता तुमुन् तव्य इत्येतेपु भविष्यति काले व अत एत्वं भवति । 67 B पटे.. 68 BD om. 69W का-, and similarly á in 70 This sút, not in AC; B has it, bur corrupti W reads एनाये ; DE as above (E adds oभाव- in sit.); the MISS. agree in Como, ; cf. Lass. pp. 360, 363. 70 EW काराविध bur राविबद. 72 BW add the forms of पs and हस. 73AD प्राच. 74 Bw add हसिम हगाम. 75 । all the ex. . BW ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ चकारादिश्च ॥ हसेऊण इसिऊण । हसेउ हसि। हसे हसि- अव्य" । हसेहिइ हसिहिइ ॥ ॥ लादेशे वा ॥ ३४॥ लकारादेशे परतो ऽत् एत्वं भवति वा॥ हसइ हसइ । पढेइ पढइ । हसेंति हसति । हसेउ हसउ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे तिविधिर्नाम सतमः परिच्छेदः॥ 76 AB -उण ; of. 1V., 24.77 W हसेव्वं हसिव्वं.

·॥ अष्टमः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ अथाष्टमः परिच्छेदः॥ । भुवो होहूवौ ॥१॥ भू सत्तायां। एतस्य धातोही हव इत्येतावादेशी भवतः ॥ होइ हवइ । होति एवंति॥ ॥क्तहः ॥२॥ भुवः क्तप्रत्यये परतो हू इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ हों। प्रादेर्भरः ॥३॥ मादेरुत्तरस्य भुवो भव इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पमवइ । उम्भवइ । संभवइ । परिभवह ॥ ॥ त्वरस्तुवरः॥४॥ त्रित्वरा संभ्रमे। अस्य धातोस्तुवर इत्ययमादेशो भवति ।। तुपरइ॥ तुरः॥५॥ कात्यये तुर इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ तुरिमं ।। ॥ घुगो' घोलः ॥६॥ घुणपूर्ण भ्रमणे। अस्य धातोपोल इत्ययमादशो भवति । घोल॥ ॥णुनो णालः ॥ ७॥ 1 BW add several more ex., B corrupt; WC 13 etc. BAF BDE; WE.. the Pr. Sanj. . 3 BD मं. 4A पोतो; DD SAPT R. 6 D for this न सोयः॥ प्रेमस पालोरा इलादेशी भाति। नौ पोपद, Eमुदतः ith ex. hloa hiuk; B has beeh sút. confused; W tas ..

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ णुइ प्रेरणे। अस्य धातोर्णाल्ल इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पोलह । पणोल्ल॥ ॥ दूङो दूमः ॥८॥ दू परितापे । अस्य धातोर्दूमादेशो भवति ॥ दुमद' ।। ॥ पटेः फलः॥९॥ अटपटगतौ । अस्य धातोः फल इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ फलिर्भ हिसायं ।। ॥ पदेः पाला ।।१०।। पद गती। अस्य धातोःपाल इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पालेइ । ॥ वृषपमृपढपामृतोऽरि. ॥११॥ वृपादीतामृतः स्थान भरि इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ परिसइ ! फरि- सइ । मरिसइ । हरिस॥ ॥ करतो ऽरः ॥१२॥ ऋकारांतस्म धातोर्कता स्थान अर इत्यादेशो भवति ॥ म। मरद ॥ सा सरद। वृषद॥ ॥ कृतः कुणो या॥१३॥ सञ् करणे । अस्य धातोः प्रयोगे कुणी वा भवति ॥ कुणइ । first गुदी गोलः with ex. गोलइ णोल्लइ । गमादित्यादित्वं ; then नुदो लोण• with ex. लोणइ पत्तोणइ : the Sanksh. S. ( In Deltus ) has गुद् गोएण; the Pr, Sanj. as an text 7 B adds दुम्भेइ. 8A ( not C) अट परिंगतो; B पटगती. BW फलइ ; Wom. हिवनं. 10D this súc. is suppled 11 marg. of A, but is in the textoEC. 11 BWadd पालइ.

·॥ अष्टमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ भो" जंभाः ॥ १४ ॥ जभ भी गानविनामे। अस्य धातोभाष इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ जभाअइ"॥ ॥अहेर्गेण्हः ॥१५॥ ग्रह उपादाने । अस्य धातोगपहो भवति ॥ गेण्हइ ॥ ॥ घेत् त्स्वातुमुन्तव्येषु ।। १६ ।। ग्रर्धित् इत्ययमादेशो भवति कातुमुन्तव्येषु परत. ॥ घेत्तूण । घेत्तुं । घेत्तव्यं ॥ ॥ कृमः का भूतभविष्यतोश्च ॥ १७ ॥ भूतभविष्यतोः कालयोः कृतः का इत्ययमादेशो भवति । चकारात् क्तातुमुन्तव्येषु परतः ॥ काही" काहिह" । फाऊण । काउं। फाअव्यं ॥ ॥ सरतेभरसुमरौ" ॥ १८॥ स्मृ चिंतायां । अस्य धातोर्भरसुमरीभवतः ॥ भरइ। सुमरइ ॥ 12 W भो; Breads the sur. जभी जंभाल:. 13 So DB A on1. जम; B जभि भि ; W जभीजभि ; of. Westerg.. sect. 10.29. 14 B जंभालद. 15 W पेत् ; the others पे (the Pr. Sanj. घेत्त) and so in Comm. Qy. पेस् (1) f. iv., 23. 16 In the ex. ABCW have त ( B once पेऊण; cf.v. 23); DE त, पेतू etc. f. Mrich. Srenz., p. 22, 8. 17 A काहि B फारिस D फाहिय ( stered to काही)EW काही explains it by Ti, but cf. note to vit., 24. where W Shes पाहीम as an cr.रधार; the other Aiss. have no Sant. expl. 188 फाहिम ( and so D. but aftered ). 19 All the AISS. and the Sanksh. Síra (f. Delius, P. 11, note ) 177 Ahas सुभर also. bur orig. मुगर like the rest.

·७२ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ ॥भियो भावीहौ ॥१९॥ जिभी भये । अस्य धातोर्भावीहौ भवतः ॥ भाइ । वीहइ ।। [॥ जिनतेः पापाऔ" ॥ २० ॥ ] घ्रा गंधग्रहणे। अस्य धातोः पा पाअ इत्यादेशो भवतः ॥ पाइ पाअइ॥ स्ले वाचाऔ॥२१॥ म्ले गालविनामे'। अस्य धातोर्वावाऔ भवतः॥ वा। चाअई॥ ॥ तृपस्थिपः ॥ २२॥ तृत ढेप तृप्तौ। अस्य धातोस्थिपो भवति ॥ थिंपइ ॥ ॥क्षो जाणमुगौ" ॥ २३ ॥ शा अवयोधने । अस्य धातोर्जाणमुणौ भवतः ।। जाणइ । मुणइ ।। !! जल्पेलों मः ॥२४॥ जल्प व्यक्तायां वाचि। अस्य धातोलकारस्य मकारो भवति । जपद।। 11 छाध्यागानां ठाअझाअगामा: ॥२५॥ प्ठा गतिनिवृत्तौ । ध्ये चिंतायां । के गैरै शब्दे। एतेषां ठाम झाअ गाअ इत्येत आदेशा भवंति ॥ ठाति । झाअंतिगाति॥ [॥ ठाझागाश्च वर्तमानभविष्यद्विध्यायेकवचनेषु ॥२६॥] .. झा; muna, f. Lenz, 20V भिगो. 21 Thus sút. not in AC; in DE ic followss. 21. 22 BW बा. 23 W हर्पक्षये ; f. Westerg. Sect. 22, 8. 24 A om. B for App. Cris., p. 15. 25 Aw 5 (W); ET; thic Pr. Sanj. मा and Comm. of each ; DET throughout in ss. 25, 26; B om. súr., but gives it in Comin. 26An; DEV as before ; B om. 27 This sút. tiot in AC; W lias only OTTOT747 ; E for Ti luas * 50 1n ·॥ अष्टमः परिच्छेदः॥ ष्ट्राध्यागानां ठा झा गा इत्यादेशा भवंति चकारात् पूर्वोक्ताश्च वर्तमानभविष्यद्विध्यायेकवचनेषु परतः ॥ टाइ ठामइ । ठाहिइ ठाअहिइ । ठाउ ठाउ माइ झाअइ। माहिइ माहिइ । झाउ झाबडा गाइ गाअगाहिइ गायहिई । गाइ गाअइ॥ [॥ खादिधाव्योः खाधौ ॥ २७ ॥ ] सा भक्षणे । धायु जवे । एतयोर्धात्योः खा धा इत्यादेशौ भवतः । वर्तमानभविष्य द्विध्याधेकवचनेषु ॥ खाइ । साहिइ । साउ॥ धाइ । धाहिइ । धाउ॥ । मलेविसः ॥२८॥ असु ग्लसु अदने । अस्य धातोर्विसो भवति ॥ विसइ ।। ॥ चिनश्चिणः ॥ २१॥ चिञ् चयने । अस्य धातोश्विणो भवति ॥ चिपाइ । ॥ कृतः किणः॥३०॥ डुकीम् द्रव्यविनिमये । अस्य धातोः किणो भवति ।। किणइ ॥ । वेकच ॥३१॥ बेरुत्तरस्य क्रीजः क आदेशः किणादेशश्च भवति ॥ विकइ । वि मिणइ ।। 29 D खादि Wखाद। oim.. (like D). 28 This stit. not in AC; B खादृधाव्योः; W reads sur. खादधावत्योः खा धा. Dom.भ.. 30 So w; Bधाव; D धादि. 31 D W गतिशुब्योः 32 The MSS. have za (Wa) here, but, as AB have a un Comm., and E's Bengáií is clear, Delius'q is probably incorrect ( 9, and a being so alıke in MSS.): che MSS. hase z in ex. (Wa). 33 D 179.. 34 A ff- throughout. 35 V के वेणो वा ॥ uth cx. विक्वेणइ विकिरण the Prak. Sanj. as in text.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः। ॥ उम" उद्भुमा ॥३२॥ ध्मा शब्दाग्निसयोगयोः। अस्य धातोरुत्पूर्वस्य उडमा भवति ॥ उद्धमाइ" ॥ ॥ अहो धो दहः ॥ ३३ ॥ नच्छन्दादुत्तरस्य दुधा धारणपोपणयो। अस्य धातोर्दहादेशो भवति । सद्दहइ । सइहि ॥ ॥ अवाद्गाहेवीहा ॥३४॥ गाह" विलोडने । अस्य धातोरवादुत्तरस्य वाहादेशो भवति ॥ ओवाहह । अववाहइ ॥ ।। फासेर्वासः॥३५॥ अवादित्यनुवर्तते । कास् शब्दकुत्सायां। अस्य धातोरवादुत्त- रस्य चासो भवति ।। ओवासह । अयवासइ॥ ॥निरो माडोमाणः॥३६॥ माङ् माने। अस्य धातोनिरुत्तरस्य माणादेशो भवति । গিন্না ॥क्षियो" झिजा ॥३७॥ क्षि क्षये । अस्य धातोझिज्जो भवति ॥ सिज्जइ ।। ॥ भिदिग्दिोरत्यस्य न्दः" ॥३८॥ भिदिर छिदिर । एयतोरंत्यस्य न्दो भवति ॥ भिंदा । दिद। ॥कये" ॥३९॥ - B म Corrupts for रमाइ. 38B 36A उता; Cउण-; W मोधमा । cref. Pin., I. 4. 140. 37 गाद. 39 A गायि; B -.40A का in sir. but nor in Comm, AIAम्मा.. 42 Bोमा. 43A वियो. 4D fact throughout, to which A is altered from scen 458 4: burre in ex.:ABEne for Sस- 4GAVT.D originally so;

·॥ अष्टमः परिच्छेदः ॥ कथ निप्पाके। भस्य धातोरंत्यस्य ढो भवति ॥ कढइ ।। ॥ वेष्टश्व" ॥४०॥ वेष्ट वेटने। अस्य धातोरत्यस्य ढो भवति॥ वेड्ढइ" । योगविभाग° उत्तरार्थः॥ ॥ उत्समोलः॥४१॥ उत्संभ्यामुत्तरस्य वेष्टरंत्यस्य लो भवति ॥ उन्बेल्लई। संवेल्लइ ॥ ॥ रुदेवः ॥ ४२ ॥ रुदिर् । अस्य धातोरंत्यस्य वो भवति ॥ रुवइ ।। ॥ उदो विजः ॥४६॥ उत्पूर्वस्य विजेरंत्यस्य वकारो भवति ॥ उविवइ ॥ ॥ वृधेः ॥ ४०॥ वृधु वर्धने । अस्य धातोरंस्यस्य ढो भवति ॥ चड्ढइ" ॥ ॥ हंतेर्मः ॥४५॥ हवरंस्यस्य म्मो भवति ॥ हम्मइ ॥ । स्पादीनां दीर्घता ॥१६॥ B6BEर, bur all have kwather. 47 AD वेटच. 48 Only Bठो: E om. Comm. as usual. 49 The MSS. वेढइ ( (B वेढह, E वेटह); the doubling seems required by it., 51, and the clause 217. 50 cf. lll. 49. 51 ABW #: here and in Comm.3; f. 11, 50. 52 BD उवे- 53 W-कारो lhere and in SS. 43, 44, and elsewliere. 54 Only W sfaat ecc. 55 B उवीवइ. 56 AD वृधेः (A ts not clear, but ther proves that it is not ); W has MSs. as before W वढ्ढइ) f. ill., 51.58 So MSS.; Qy. मः (१) f. Lass., P. 245. हिंसागत्योः-मकारो भवति । हिम्मइ । हंति. 60 In w this sur. B वृधे : 57 The note. 59w ·७६ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ रुषादीनां दौर्घता भवति ।। रूसइ । तूसइ । सूसइ ॥ रुप्यति । तुष्यति । शुष्यति ।। ।यो प्रजनृत्योः ॥ ४७॥ ब्रज नृतो। अनयोरत्यत्य चो भवति ॥ वञ्चइ । णञ्च ।। ॥ युधियुध्योहः॥४८॥ युध संप्रहारे। बुध अवगमने। अनयोरंत्यस्य झो भवति ॥ जुज्दाइ । बुज्झइ ॥ ॥ रुधेन्र्धम्भौ ॥४९॥ रुधिर् । अंत्यस्य धम्भौ भवतः॥ रुन्धर । रुम्मइ ।। ।। मृदोलः॥ ५० ॥ मृद क्षालने । अस्य धातोरंत्यस्य लो भवति ।। मलइ॥ ॥ शद्लृपत्योर्डः ॥ ५१ ॥ शद्लू शातने पल्लू पतने। अनयोरंत्यस्य डो भवति ॥ पडइ॥ ॥शकादीनां द्वित्वं ॥५२॥ शक्ल शक्तौ। इत्येवमादीनां द्वित्वं भवति ॥ सकइ । लगइ । शकोति। लगति ।। ॥ स्फुटिचल्योर्वा ।। ५३ ॥ स्फुट विकसने। यल कंपने। अनयोरंत्यस्य या द्वित्व भवति । फुइ फुडइ । चल्लर चलइ ॥ सउद। followss. 51 ; in Comm. BW add tå etc. 65 W adds पूसइ-पुष्यति. 62 B throughout ब्व () 63W इझादेशो. 64 So ACW: BDE read न्धस्सौ, with ex. रस्सइ. 65W क्षोदे. 66 W-पत्लोर्डः; the lr is a later add. in BD, but the orig. text of AE; the Pr. Sanj. has शदि- 67 W adds गम्मद । दुम्मद - गच्चति । दूयते f. var. lect. s. 8) and then gives 5. 58. 68 A फर; BDEW फुटइ; the Pr. Sanj: फुडइ .

·।। अयमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ प्रादेमालः॥५४॥ प्रादेरुत्तरस्य मीलो ऽन्त्यस्य द्वित्वं भवति घा॥ पमिल्ला । पमीलइ ॥ ॥ भुजादीनां चातुमुन्तव्येषु लोपः ॥ ५५ ॥ भुज" इत्येवमादीनां कातुमुन्तव्येपु परतो ऽन्त्यस्य लोपो भयति ॥ भोत्तूण" । भोजें। भोत्तव्वं ॥ विदः। देत्तूण । वेत्तु । वैत्तव्यं ।। रुदः । रोत्तूण । रोत्तुं। रोत्तब्बं । ॥ श्रुहजिलधयां" णो ऽन्त्ये ह्रस्वः ॥ ५६ ॥ श्रु श्रवणे। ह दानादाने"। जये। लुञ्' छेदने। धूम् कंपने । इत्येतेपामंत्ये णः प्रयोक्तव्यः । दीर्घस्य वस्यो भवति ॥ सुणइ । हपाद । जिणइ । लुणई। धुणइ । ॥"भावकर्मणोश्च ।। ५७ ॥ पपां भावकर्मणोरते व्यशब्दः" प्रयोक्तव्यः॥ चकाराद् णश्च ।। सुव्यइ सुणिज्जइ । हव्या दृणिज्जाइ। जिन्यइ जिणिज्जइ । लुम्वइ टुणिनाइ । धुव्वा धुणिज्जइ । ॥ गमादीनां" द्वित्वं घा ॥ ५८ ॥ quoring ii., 20. 69 So DIV: AB मादेवस्य मोलो ; Eom. Comm. ; only W gives an ex. besides 9. 70 D; ABE पमीमद; W पम्मिनइ पम्मिलइ । णिम्मीला णिम्मीद. 7W adds वेति नियतं. 72 IV भोऊण । भोई। भोप्रयं, but n in the other ex.: DE have a in all the ix., of. mfra, transl. ncte. 73 w ध्रुहजिमधुमा णो म्यम (sic placed after s. 141). 748D -नयोः ; " दाने. 75W गर् शन्दे. 76W मुण-मपो. 77 Wभापपर्मणोः as an adbtkāra with no cex. 78A-यर: D corrupt. 79 but only B Tin tlic ex. 89 D om. both. SWputs this sur. alter ..5: with ex. गम्मा रम्मर पम्मद गमः रमद यम explained by गरपति रमले समयशि... 9. AB.

·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशा॥ । गमादीनां धातूनां द्वित्वं वा भवति ॥ गम्मइ गमिज्जइ । रम्मद रमिज्जा । हसइ हसिज्जइ ॥ गम्यते । रम्यते। हस्यते ॥ ॥लिहेलिज्मः ॥ ५९॥ लिह आखादने। अस्य धातोलिज्झो भवति भावकर्मणोः॥ लिज्झइ॥ ॥हकोर्होरकीरौ ॥६॥ हृञ् हरणे। डुकृञ् करणे। अनयोहीरकोरौ भवतो भावकर्म- णोरर्थयोः ॥ हीरइ । कीरइ ॥ ॥ ग्रहेर्दी? वा ॥ ६१॥ आहेर्धातो>ो वा भवति । भावकर्मणोरर्थयोः ॥ गाहिज्जइ । गौहिज्जइ ॥ ॥क्त न दिण्णादयः" ॥ ५२ ॥ diff. sut.; pr. where all refer it to the passive ; the rest om. Sans. expi. here. 82 So A; DE लिहेजः with ex. लिजइ ; BW have a B (and the Pr. Sanj. ) दुहिलिहिवहां दुज्झलिज्मवज्झाः (the fiti written in B 39 ; cf. Del., p. 12, note; the Pr. Sanj. -युग्म ) with ex. दुग्मा लिज्झइ वग्मद; w दुइलिहवहां दुइलिवुधाः with ex. दुछइ लिछइ वुछइ. 83 W ( and Sanj. ) हमकृमो. 84. A om. 85 Here follows a sur. in BW, not in ACDE; B झो गज्जरणवी (B) वा ॥ ज्ञा अवयोधने । इत्यस्य धातो- ग्ज णव इत्यादेशी भवतः मावकर्मणोः। राजद वह। पने जाणिनइ । मुणिनह । ज्ञायते; Whas ज्ञानुयोर्णनटी जा अवयोधने नृती गातविनामे। अगयोर्भाव णमणी भवतः । एजद पद । ज्ञायते नृत्यते. 86 W for this sur. प्रहवा येत्यः || with ex. पेपद गरिहनद । गृनते. 87.So EV and D orig. ; AB fiu- here and in ex ..

·७२ ॥ अष्टमः परिच्छेदः ॥ दिपण इत्येवमादयः क्तप्रत्ययेन सह निपात्यंते॥ टुदाम दाने। दिणं ॥ रुदिर्। रुण ॥ असी"। हित्थं ॥ दह । दड्ढं" ॥ रजि। रतं ॥ ॥सिदेविसूर॥ ६३॥ खिद दैन्ये। अस्य विसूरो भवति ॥ विसूरई"। विरहेण विसूरइ वाला॥ ॥ धेजूर ॥ ६४॥ फुध कोपे। अस्य जूरी भवति ॥ जूरइ ॥ ॥ चर्चेश्चंप" ॥६५॥ चर्च अध्ययने । अस्य धातोश्चंपो भवति ।। चंपद ।। ॥ बसेर्वनः॥६६॥ लसी उद्धेगे। अस्य धातोवैजो भवति ।। वजह" ।। ॥ मृजे भसुपौ"।। ६७॥ मृजू शुखी। अस्य धातोर लुम सुप इत्यादेशी भयतः । लुभा । सुपर" 88 AB F. 89 MSS. afg; cf. S. 66. go So BDE 5 A वित्यं च तत्यं (in Sect. x. W has a sur. हित्य वीडित. भीतयोः). 91 AE ( and prob. B); D prob. Fr t. Alil. M.. p. 15. 2. Badds दुह । दुद (?). 9. So BY: A रंसं () Dरतं; Eरय 93 W continues to add bbive or harmans in the Comm to ach sús., cf. s. 57. Nar Lect. DW om. the rest. ( suppl. in Din marg. ). A and Pr Sany मरः: Cn.l. 95 BDE पर 97 Alter tius Bhas a new sir. सरंप: with cx. रवः। सपोति: after 1.62 रन ॥ दय स्नूपर। म धागे ति पन्नाशो मामि॥ 95 Sa AD; B 9-11 Jur. and Comm., but 5*- in (1. ; wrrals pोगमो. 99 WE मा गती; B Sna Sin. 94 95 So BDEV ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशा॥ ॥ वुट्टखुप्पो मस्जेः ॥ ६८ ॥ टुमस्जो शुद्धौ। अस्य धातो खुट्टाखुप्पो भवतः॥ वुट्टइ। खुप्पइ ॥ ॥ दृशेः पुलअणिअकअवक्खाः ॥ ६९ ॥ दृशिरप्रेक्षणे। अस्य पुलमणिअकअवस्या भचंति ।। पुलअइ णिअकाइ । अवक्खइ ।। ॥शकेस्तरवतीराः ॥७॥ शक्ल शक्तौ। अस्य धातोः तर वा तीर इत्येन आदेशा भवति ॥ तरइ । वजइ । तीरइ॥ ॥ शेषाणामदंतता॥७१॥ शेषाणां लुप्तानुबंधानामदंतता भवति ।। भमइ । चुंबइ ।। ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे धात्वादेश परिच्छेदो ऽष्टमः ।। W .. Bom. पुलइ। मार्जति. 100 A CDE ( and Pr. Sanj. ?) वुडु-; वुत्तश्चत्यो ; the sur. deest in B ; the Sanksh, S. श्रुत्तखुप्पो (of. Del.) 101 ACDE as in sùt. ; W दुत्तइ श्‍वत्थई। 102 W दृशेर्दासपुलपरिणअछावखाः॥ with ex, दीसइ। गिदइ । णिअछ। श्रवक्इ ॥ दृश्यते ॥ It also adds कर्मणि in the Comm.s of. 63, note. 103 So ADE ( the second ex. in A may be चाइ); B शकेस्वरअरवतीराः ।। with cx. तरह। अवरइ । तीरइ । शक्नोति शक्यति-ते; W has शकेस्तरावतीराः ॥ with कर्मणि in Comm. and ex. तरइ । अवइ । तीर६ ॥ शक्यते , BEW then add ( supphed m a later hand in the marg. of D) एवमन्ये ऽपि । अनेन धात्वादेशप्रकरणेन यन्ये ऽपि प्रियाशब्दादेशा योद्धव्याः। यथा मृजेः जामइ (BW add मार्टि)। पिवतेः पाडइ । इत्यादि स्वयमूख्यं ॥ The Pr. Sanj. gives this as a sut. but its 104 BW, for चुंवइ give हसइ : W refers both ex. to the passive: BW (and Pr. Sanj) then Comm. is very corrupt. ..

·॥ मत्रमः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ अथ नवमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ निपाताः॥१॥ अधिकारोऽयं । वक्ष्यमाणा निपातसंझका वेदितन्याः। संस्कृता- नुसारेण णिपातकार्य वक्तव्यं ॥ ॥ दानपृच्छानिर्धारणेपु' ॥२॥ इत्ययं शन्दो दानपृच्छानिर्धारणेष्वर्थपु निपातसंझो भवति ॥ •दाने यथा। है गेण्ड अप्पणो जी ॥ पृच्छायां। हु साहसु' सन्भायं ॥ निर्धारणे। हवसु तुहिको । ह गृहाणात्मनो जीयं । कथय साधुपु सद्भाव । ६ भव तूप्णीकः॥ add a new Sur. अजादेशा पहलं ॥3B W's comm. अजिति प्रत्याहारः । धातूनामजादेशाः पूर्वोक्त यहूल स्युः । अचि तावत् । हर वोहर । मुहह सोदइ । सुरह सोयह । बुधर योदइ । मुहद मोहह । पुमइ पोसइ । यह रोहह। मुमह ( V रा.) सोसद ॥ वहति । मुसयति । स्वपिति । ऊपते। गुह्यति । पृच्छति । रोहति । विसिति ॥ , B's Comm. धातूनामजादेशच (B-देव ) यलं । अचम्मावत् । उपद सोयह याद । आदेशाः । मह मुमरद । मोवाह अरवाद (Inc) चोवाइ अपवाद वाह। अपवाति यायुः; the Pr. Sanj.': Comm. very corrupt. . BD कतम्यं ; in this book AD are chiefly follosed, particularly in the a., where B often differs, and V. almost alivays; W has several new sutras (acc App.) and often a different order. -निराकररो. 3 So BDY: AE गाहपु. 4 Only BW Sivc Sans, expl. ; both luase 44, but only w गाण alo. ६ ·।। प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ ॥विअ अ अवधारणे ॥३॥ विअ वेअ इत्तेताववधारणे निपातसंझौ भवतः॥ एवं विश्र । एवं वे ॥ एवमेव ॥ ॥ओ सूचनापश्चात्तापविकल्पेषु ॥४॥ ओ इत्ययं शब्दः सूचनापश्चात्तापविकल्पेषु निपातसंझो भवति ॥ ओ.चिर असि ॥ गाथासु द्रष्टव्यः । ।। इरकिरकिला अनिश्चिताख्याने ॥ ५॥ इर किर किल इत्येते शब्दा अनिश्चितारयाने निपातसं झका भवति ॥ पेक्ख इर तेण हदो। अज्ज किर तेण ववसिओ। अर्धा किल सिविणओ ॥ प्रेक्षस्व किल तेन हतः। अद्य किल तेन व्यवसितः। अयं किल स्वप्नः॥ ॥ हफ्खु निश्चयवितर्कसंभावनेपु" ॥ ६ ॥ हूँ फ्छ । इत्येतौ निश्चयवितर्कसंभावनेषु निपातसझको भवतः ॥ हूँ रक्ससो"। गरुओ क्खु भारो॥ राक्षसः । गुरुः खलु भारः ॥ ॥णवरः केवले ॥७॥ णवर इत्ययं शब्दः केवले ऽर्थे निपाननसंझो भवति ॥ णवर" अन्नं ॥ ॥ आनंतये णवरि ॥८॥ . . 5 Ex conject. A विस चेन (वेत्र in ex.); BDW चित्र चेत्रBE ठिश्र वेश्य; In Hema-ch, MS. a has णइ चेत्र विश्र व्य अवधbut be for य; the Pr. Sanj. चिन्न चेय; f. Lass, p. 189. 6Only in B ; W has as ex. हे चित्र। तुमं चित्र। अयमेव समेव. 7 So ABDE; B adds यो इयं मणिधे । ओ एव्वमिणणह• अल (); was usual, diff. -ए; only Whis any Sans, expl. 10W गु. HW विनिक्ष 12 SO A . 13 Aणपरं- Bom. wणवर मुह सयररो. 8 BW om. 9So BW; AD BDem. cx. 3 ·- ॥ नवमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ८३ णवरीत्ययं शब्द यानंतर्य निपातसंशो भवति ॥ गवरि॥ ॥किणो प्रश्ने" ॥९॥ किणो इत्यय शब्दः प्रदने सिपातसंशो भवति ॥ किणो धुव्यसि । किणो हससि ॥ किन्नु धूयसे। किन्नु हससि । ॥ अञ्चो" दुःस्वसूचनासंभावनेषु ॥ १० ॥ सब्बो इत्ययं शब्दो दुःससूचनासंभावनेपु निपातसंझो भवति ॥ दुःखे। अव्यो फजलरसरंजिएहि अच्छीहि ॥ सूचनायां । अन्यो अवरं विथ ॥ संभावने। मन्यो गमिव अत्तुं"। अहो काजलरस- रजिताभ्यामक्षिभ्यां अहो अपरमिय । अहो एनमियात्तुं ।। ॥ अलाहि निवारणे" ॥११॥ यलादि इत्ययं शन्दो निवारणे निपातसंगो भवति ॥ सलाहि फलहलेसेण", अलादि फलहबंधेण" ॥ अलं कलदलशेन। भलं फलहबंधन ।। ।। अइ घले" संभाषणे ॥१२॥ om.. 14 W रियो पोस किमु परिपरने and gives it after s. 15. B D and prob. Aynier; the 47 25 conject. to suits. viii. 573; none give Sans, expl. 16 DE सपो; B varics अभ्यो and sपो; W has अयो दु.गसूचनामारपेड, and also after s. 2, भष्मे दु.ग.. 17 A om. 18 Es conject (cf. s. 16); ABD ve (ori) E.;; BD give the Sans. expl. as above. 19 W find. 20 These ci, corrupt ; A POTO Bradu (che lek erased); DITT ; Was abave, MAT: , eurl. by मादि पूर्व महानुभन : Dमम: AD om. Sons. W ពុះ dil. 2. Vri .. Eom. Eom. .

·४ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ अइ मूलं अइ वले इत्येतो शब्दौ संभागणे निपातसंझौ भवतः ॥ पसूसइ । वले किं फलेसि अवले" ॥ अपि मूल प्रशुष्यति। वले किं कलयसि। अवले ॥ ॥णवि वैपरीत्ये ॥ १३॥ णवि इत्ययं शब्दो वैपरीत्ते निपातसंज्ञो भवति ॥ णवि तह पहसह वाला। विपरोतं तथा प्रहसति वाला॥ ॥ सू" कुत्सायां ॥१४॥ सू इत्ययं शब्दः कुत्सायां निपातसंज्ञो भवति ॥ सू सिविणो।। धिक् स्वप्नः ।। ॥रे अरे हिरे संभाषणरतिकलहाक्षेपेषु ।। १५ ।। रे। अरे। हिरे। इत्येते शब्दाः संभाषणरतिकलहाक्षेपेषु निपातसशा भवति यथासंख्यं ॥ रे मा करेहि । णाओ सि अरे । दिट्ठो सि हिरे॥रेमा कुरुष्प ॥ नागोऽसि अरे। दिटो ऽसि हिरे ॥ ॥म्मिवमिवविआ" इवार्थं ॥ १६ ॥ म्मिव मिव विअ इत्येते शब्दा इवार्थे निपातसंज्ञका भवंति ॥ ACE , 23 This ex. corrupt in AD, B as above , W has अच्छ गमसु=अपि गच्छसि (1) 24 Here follows in B a new sút (added by a later hand in the marg. of D) not in gives it after s. 6, अव्वो (D अघो throughout) अम्मो (B अस्मो throughout) दु खाक्षेपविस्मापनेषु with ex अव्वो (B अवो ) असो दाणि पडिऊल मे देव । अव्वो अम्मो कि करेसि । अव्वो अम्मो पत्थरसिला माणुसी जादा, f. Boethtl. Sak p 11, 17. notc , for avvo, cf. s. 10, supra. 25 AC EFFA, with no Sans expl. (cfm., 231), w diff. 26 W थु. 27 म्मिमिवविवा , B म्मिवमिअविश्रा, D altered form A Co B in sút but E AC . not Corrupt, with no . ex ·॥ नवमः परिच्छेदः॥ ८५ गअणम्मिच गअणमिव। अणं विस कसणं ॥ गगनमिव कृष्णं । [ ॥ अज्ज आमंत्रणे ॥१७॥ अज्ज इत्ययं शब्द आमंत्रणे निपात्यते ॥ अज्ज महाणुहाव कि फरेसि ॥ अहो महानुभाव किं करोपि ॥ ॥शेपः संस्कृतात् ॥१८॥ उक्तादन्यः शेषः। प्रत्ययसमासतद्धितलिंगवर्णकादिविधिः शेषः संस्शतावगंतव्य । इह ग्रंथविस्तरभयान दर्शितः ॥ ॥ इति वररुचिरुते प्राकृतमकाशे निपातसंहाविधिनान चमा परिच्छेदः।। समिनिमगित Hemarch. has मिसिसि पय मिरा पा. 25 Alor in each cx. 29 This sút, is only found in BDEW (added in the morz. of D). 30 S; W; the others 31WARE 01.

·॥ प्रास्तप्रकाशः ॥ ॥ मय दशमः परिच्छेदः ॥ ॥ पैशाची ॥१॥ पिशावानां भापा पैशाची। साच लक्ष्यलक्षणाभ्यां स्फुटी- मियते॥ - ॥ प्रशतिः शौरसेनी ॥२॥ अस्याः पैशाच्या प्रकृतिः शौरसेनी। स्थितायां' शौरसेन्यां पैशाचीलक्षणं प्रवर्तयितव्यं । ॥ वर्गाणां तृतीयचतुर्थयोरयुजोरनाद्योराद्यौ ॥३॥ वर्गाणां तृतीयचतुर्थयोर्णयोरयुक्तयोरनादौ वर्नमानयोः स्थाने आधी प्रथमद्वितीयौ भवतः गर्न । मेखो। राचा। णिच्छरो' । पटिस । दसवतनो । माथयो । गोपितो। केसपो। सरफर्स । सलफो॥ अयुजोरिति किं॥ संगामो। घग्धो' । इत्यादि ॥ अनादाविति किं । गमनं । इत्यादि । गगन । मेघ । राजा। निर्मर । घडिश । दशवदन' । माधव । गोविंद । केशव । सरभस । शलभ । संग्राम । 1 BDW always स.. 250 DW: B स्थिती; A इप्सिता (marg. correction). 3 E has only the first two ex. राचणकरो (); BW राचा णिकरो , D -णिच्छरो. 5 BDW वटीसं. 6A दश-; BDW add वतनं. 7 AD here add वत्था expl. inp by quat (but both are marked in D as spur.); B has eat with no Sans.; V om. 8A .भा. So DW and A orig. (altered to द-); B Corrupt. 10 Only BDW give Sans. 11 Ex conject. (as an ex, of th seems intended, although properly it should not be a conjunct); BD faune fans. 12 BDW add वदन. Dadds arat; cf. note 7. 13 4A 9 ·॥ दशमः परिच्छेदः॥ व्याघ्रागमन । ॥ इवस्य पिवः ॥४॥ इवशब्दस्य स्थाने पिव इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ कमल पिघ मुख॥ ॥जो नः ॥५॥ पकारस्य स्थाने नकार इत्ययमादेशोभवति ॥ तलुनी । तरुणी" ।। । एस्य सटः ॥६॥ ट इत्यस्य स्थाने सट इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ कसट मम चट्टइ" ॥ कष्टमम वर्तते॥ सस्य सनः॥७॥ रूम इत्यस्य स्थाने सन इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ सनान । सनेहो ॥ ॥र्यस्य रिअः ॥८॥ र्य इत्यस्य स्थाने रिम इत्ययमादेशोभवति || भारिमा भार्या" ॥ ॥शस्य ॥९॥ श इत्यस्य स्थाने अ इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ विमानो। सव्यो"॥ विशात । सर्वश ॥ ।। फन्यायां न्यस्य ॥ १० ॥ कन्याशन्दे न्यस्य स्थाने इत्ययमादेशो भवति ।। का ॥ ॥ज"श्च ॥ ११ ॥ 14 So Mss. 15 ADW-इं (but A orig. सं like B); cf. Lass p. 443. 16 Only W gives Sans. 17 A पददि W यादि: only w gives Sans. 18 B सननी. 19 Only in A. 20 W fiat; Bogi in sút., but fire in Comm. 21 So W; AD भरिमा: B मरीया. 22 Only in w. स्व. in sur. and cx. 24 B om. ; only w Sises Sans. 25 B 26 D (and perhaps A). 7 Bम (1); एप 23B ·*38 ॥ ॥ ॥ प्राएतप्रकाश: ॥ ज्जशब्दस्य शौरसेनीसाधितस्य च इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ कच्च कार्य. ॥ राशो राचि टाउसिडस्डिपु वा ।। १२ ।। राजनशब्दस्य टा डसि ङस् डि" इत्येतेपु परतो राचि इत्ययमादेशो वा" भवति ॥ राचिना रखा। राचिनो रो। राचिनि रञ्जि पतेविति किं राचा। राचानं। रो" ॥ ॥ कस्तून ॥१३॥ कामत्ययस्य स्थाने तून" इत्यथमादेशो भवति ॥ दातूनं । कातूनं । घेत्तून" ॥ हृद्यस्य हितअ॥१४॥ ॥ हृदयशब्दस्य हितअकं निपात्यते ॥ हितअकं हरसि मे तलुनि ॥ ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे पैशाचिको नाम दशमः परिच्छेदः ॥ B डसि डस् । राचीदो 28 BW कव्वं (Bn.l.) 29 BD om. 30 B -डिसुप्सु वा; W डिमुपु वा the 5 in A corrected to g in marg. 31 om. हि Wadds सु. 32 AW om. 33 So D except राजा- जो-नि: A राचिना रखा। राचिनि रजि: B राचिना राज्ञा राचीनो राज्ञी राज्ञसु (suc); Wटा राचिना रजा । राचीनो। डिलु राचिम्मि राचिसु. 34 A रज्जो (added in marg.): B इज्जो (sic); W रजे; 36 B तून Wतून. 37 The only ex. in BDEW 15 घेत्तून : BD (not in AE) then add सुनाहि सुना टाठीति किं ( Bठीति किं ) सुनचि सिट इति किं चनतु (1) W has a new sut. लोटि सिपोराहि वा ॥ धातोर्लोटि परतः सिपाहि इत्यादेशो भवति । कि। सुनसि। इति किं सुनत्तु । शृणुहि शृणु शृणोपि शृणोतु । 38A-यकं throughout. Dom. 35 B का तूनं. . B मुनाहि सुना। लोटीति ·।। एकादशः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ अथैकादश परिच्छेदः ॥ मागधी ॥१॥ भागधानां भाषा मागधी । लक्ष्यलक्षणाभ्यां स्फुटी क्रियते ॥ ॥प्रति शौरसेनी ॥२॥ अस्या मागध्याः प्रकृतिः शौरसेनीति वेदितव्यं ।। ॥पसोशः॥३॥ पकारसकारयोः स्थाने शो भवति ॥ माशे। पिलाशे ॥मापः। चिलासः॥ ॥जो यः॥४॥ जकारस्य यकारो भवति ॥यायदे जायते ॥ चवर्गस्य स्परता'तयोचारणा चयों यथा स्पष्टस्तथोचारणो भवति।पलिचए । गदिदधले। चियले' । णिशले ॥परिचयः' । गृहीतछलः । विजलः । निरं। 11 । ॥एदयस्य दडफः॥६॥ 10 1 Bio, only BW have a Comm to SS. 1, 2, Egres only the sútras througliout 3 ABD in both , 3A यामदे. and adds याभा-जाना 4 BD स्पष्टता Lassen ( 397 ) com espastula, the Sanksh. S has miensgucbcbaryah 5 So MSS, A altercu to .. Tir A5 for in all the ez 7A निए 8 By . Only BW Anse Sans. Lassen proposetafit ( 397) Com.

·९० माशतप्रकाशा हृदयस्य स्थाने हडको भवति ॥ हडपालले मम ॥ हृदये आदरो मम॥ ॥ जयो10 र्यकारकारयोः स्थाने ग्यो भवति ॥ कन्ये । दुखणे ॥ कार्य । दुर्जनः ॥ ॥क्षस्य स्कः॥८॥ क्षस्य स्थाने स्ककारो भवति ॥ लस्कशे । दस्के" ॥ राक्षसः। । अस्मदः सो हके हगे अह" ॥९॥ असदः स्थाने सौ परतो हके हगे अहके इत्येत आदेशा भनि । के हगे अहके भणामि ॥ अहं भणामि । ॥ अत इदेतो लुकच ॥ १० ॥ सावित्यनुवर्तते । अकारांताच्छन्दात्सौ परत इकारकारी भवतः । पक्षे लोपश्च ॥ एशि" लाआ। एश पुलिशे। एश एलिश ॥ एप राजा। एप पुरुषः॥ ॥ टांतादुश्च ॥१९॥ 10A श्रालद्धे. 1 A adds हडक' मलेमि. BW add हृदममालल (B माल) प्रासमंताजिश्चिति वा (). 13D -यः ; Busut; but both ez in Corom. 14 A o for e: W काय; B कन्या दुग्नणे ; ABW give Sans. IF MSS. -से. 16 From BV. 17 BDEW (and the Sanksit. S. in Lassan p. 393) oin. Set ; cf. Saks., Williams' ed. p. 217 ; Bochtl. 18 BDW इत्येतो स्वः 19Wवा for च. 20 These ex. are from W.B has अशि लाया । ए पुतीसो पुश पुलिशा ; A) हस्ते सपदि । एसे आसा (D एशि सभा) एसे पुलिसे (D एशि पुलिरो) एश पुसिसा (D एशे पुलिशे) एश रमा (एशे मभा); only tv 12on, Sans: gives Sans ·॥ एकादश. परिच्छेदः॥ कात्यांताच्छन्दात्सो परत उकारश्च भवति ॥ चकाराद् इदेतो टुश्च ।। हशिदु । हशिदि । हशिदे। हशिद" ॥ हसितः॥ । उसो हो वा दीर्घत्वंच ॥ १२ ॥ उसः प्ठ्य कवचनस्य स्थाने हकारादेशो चा भाति । तत्संयोगेच दीर्घवं ॥ पुलिशाह" धणे । पुलिशश धणे ॥ पुरुषस्य" धनं ॥ ॥ अदीर्घः संवुद्धौ ॥१६॥ अदतादित्येय। अदंताच्छन्दादकारो दीर्थो भपति संयुद्धौ । पुलिशा आग"। माणुशा आगछ॥ सवुद्धाविति कि। यम्हणश" धणे ॥ ब्राह्मणस्य धन ॥ ॥चिट्ठस्य चिठ." ॥ १४ ॥ चिट्टस्य स्थाने चिष्ठ" इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ पुलिस चिष्टदि" ॥ पुरुषस्तिष्ठति", 1! मृगमां" कस्सं डः ॥१५॥ दुरुष करणे। मृङ्माणत्यागे । गम्" गतौ । एतेषा तप्रत्ययस्य स्थाने डकारो भवति। पडे। मडे । गडे।। एता। मृतः। गत "॥ । रा स्यात्. 22 AD हमिदा (AD T for throughout): B's ex are हरिदु गिदमिद, Was an text. 23 All but w confuse and A 24 TV पाणे (1) 25E (1) 26 Lassen (P 397) prefers to the the MESS haic t. but they cannot be relied on 7 ABD मग (altered in A to मम ). V पदम(d rur leet 164) 28 DE-, D, A पिट . स पिE 19 Dr. B'परट (16). 304 मिट6n. Dfzt दि. A adds मत (cfree , 31 Oals in WV 3.ww मग 33DW - गुन 34 By adaatir पदाट मनेर d .

·९२ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ को दाणिः ॥ १६॥ कामत्ययस्य स्थाने दाणि" इत्ययमादेशो भवति ॥ शहिदाणि" गडे । करिदाणि आअडे ॥ सोद्वा गतः। कृत्वागतः॥ ॥ शृगालस्य शिभालाशिमालेशिआलकाः" ॥ १७ ॥ शृगालशब्दस्य स्थाने शिमालाद्य आदेशा भयंतिम शिला आमछदि । विआले आअछदि । विआलकेमाअछदि । शृगाल आगच्छति॥ ॥ इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे मागध्याय एकादशः परिच्छेदः॥ कडं (B-हां); Hema-ch. gives this sit. in his Sauraseni chapter. 35 BDW for: 36 MSS. 11- 38 So BDW. 39 B & for at in sút, throughout, but not A fest orig. 40 AB f121-. 41 A.F. 37 Only in A. inex.

·॥ द्वादशः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ अथ द्वादशः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥शोरसेनी ॥१॥ ॥ प्रकृतिः संस्कृतं ॥२॥ ॥ अनादावयुजोस्' तथयोदधौ ॥३॥ ॥ व्याप्ते डः॥४॥ ॥ पुन' ऽपि कचित् ॥५॥ ॥इ गृध्रसमेपु ॥६॥ ॥ ब्रह्मण्यविक्षयशफन्यकानां' ण्यन्यानां सो' चा ॥७॥ ॥ सोगितशयोर्णः। ॥ ८॥ - BDW Book x21. has no Comm. in ABCDE W gives a Comm. but full of gross errors, and of no authority ; cf. Lass. App. pp. 49-58, with the Sanksh. S. quoted there : several sur. are very corrupr. 2 B-ते. 3AISS. -युजः (D orig. -जो); BE add अधिकारोऽयं (edded in marg. of D) and then give भयो- as a new sur.: also divides them, अनादाययुज ॥ अनादी वर्तमाना वर्ण गर्ग अगं- युवाः प्रयोशव्याः। घमणो पर। then तपगोदंगो 4B -ते। w-पृतेः So EV: A पुसो: BD पुसोऽ 6 BC arte 7 BW om. या 8 So BW: Dn.l.; A 9Aयो, BW बो: Cमो, Dो: गो; of Lass. App., P. 53. 10 A-दगि निक: B दनि गो D.ति Vइतिहा; only £ इनिटा; of..., 5. 5 : गियो ।

·२४ ॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः ॥ ॥का इः ॥९॥ ॥ कामो? आ॥१०॥ ॥णिजशसोर्वाक्लीवे" स्वरदीर्वश्च ॥ ११ ॥ ॥ भो भुवस्तिडि ॥१२॥ ॥ न लुटि ॥ १६ ॥ ॥ ददातेर्दै । दहस्त लुटि ॥ १४ ॥ ॥डुकृषः करः ॥१५॥ ॥ स्थश्चिः" ।। ९६॥ ॥ स्मरतेः सुमरः ॥ १७॥ ॥ दृशे पैरवः ॥१८॥ ॥ अस्तेरच्छः ॥ १९ ॥ ॥ निपात्वि" ॥२०॥ 12w दु AD 3 11 ABEW फा3 W इत्र. Bह- 13W णिज for णिर्, with ex. कमलाणिज'कमलानि etc.! 14 Amat; cf. Lass. P:54. 15 W तडि E om. $. 12-31. 16 Lassen's conject.; AC ददाते दो। ददस्य लदि; B दस्ते दे। इस्स लुटि ; D ददाते। ददम इत्यस्य लुटि ; w has two sur. तदस्तैदे। तच्छब्दस्य तेदे आदेशो भवति। तेदो गदो। तेदं पुच्छ। तेदेण विदं and then ददातेः दस्य तृटि। दाधातोः दकारस्य लटि परतो दे आदेशो भवति। देस्सदि etc. TA- CW -ठठः 18 A स्मृ-- 19 Ant. 20 BW (and A?) अस्तेरछः ; C प्रस्तस्थुः; D अस्तैरकः (१). 21 Ex cenjict.B ABC सिपा 2; B मिपा थैः; W मिपि यः ॥ मिपि परतः श्रस् धातोः थ श्रादेशो भवति। थम्मि Hema-ch. and the Sanksh. S. .. , ·॥ द्वादशः परिच्छेदः॥ ॥ भविष्यति मिपा मवा" स्वरदीर्घ त्यंच ॥२३॥ ॥नियामित्यो" ॥२२॥ ॥ एवस्य जेन्य" ॥ २६ ॥ ॥श्वस्य यि ॥२४॥ ॥अस्मदो जसा घमंच ॥२५॥ ॥ सर्वनानां सित्या" ॥ २६ ॥ ॥धातोर्भावक कर्मसु" परस्मैपदं ॥ २७॥ ॥ यन्त्य" एच ॥२८॥ ॥मिपो लोटिच"।।२९।। give no help 22 Ex conject. (cf. Lass App. p. 56); AC भयविभ्य (the din A altered to ग in a laxer hand Chas म) मिराति (dि only added in marg. A) गंगा-; D भुपःनिपनि मिपागया (the ti panially crased); B गुवः गिर मिर पागाता : Wभुः पिर तिमिर पागा या- with cx. मपागि -दि-मि... 3A -पि. 24AC मेर (A orig. न्य!): B जेम्प : DW जेन्न. 5 Corrupt : ACT बिग: D- मागिता; reads sut. नानाराम राताना पामराराम पम इलादेशी भपति गमप बामदार दरा गाने cc.: Lassen, p. 57. From the गिcिom. Wabrurally addit: helort मा (W wri) Iromnab.and enrns this sit. to fre and T Pawn Printry RANT Qr. streetict. Latt. AT T.57. Ans: ICD4 (D) V. Cerra. He armer- Kuta I Marriersity FACD . - ·॥ प्राकृतप्रकाशः॥ ॥ आश्चर्यस्याच्छरिमं ॥३०॥ ॥ प्रकृत्या" दोलादंडदशनेपु.॥३१ ।। ॥ शेषं माहाराष्ट्रीयत् ॥ ३२॥ ।। इति वररुचिकृते प्राकृतप्रकाशे मनोरमायां वृत्ती भामहविरचितायां शौरसेनीलक्षणं नाम द्वादशः परिच्छेदः समाप्त: 11 29 A -रोअं. 30 Lassen's conject. P.58 (of ... 35); ABCD प्रकृ , W प्राकृतो and In Comm. -प्राकृत शब्द प्रयोक्तव्यः. 31So W, ACD दोदण्इदशनेषु (A has a mark of onutsston over दो), B दोलादष्ट्रदशनेपु. 32W म . For Heina chandra's sútras on the Saurasení dialect, sec App.C, Note: P. 30, Eng. Tr. After the commentary, of S. 49 add: The has occasionally dropped in 1 in part of the impression, I have noticed elsewhere muggo, nstthāro, molloh gno. Similarly the e in stbāne and leśena.

·ENGLISH TRANSLATION.

·2 THE PRAKRTAPRAKSA OF VARARUCHI Sanskrit: samrddhi, 'prosperity'; prakata, 'manifest', abhijāti, 'family', manasvini, a wise woman', pratipad, 'the first day of a lunar fortnight,' sadrksa, “like', pracisparddhin, 'a rival', prasupta, asleep', prasiddhi, famc'; aśva, a horse." This is a class of words which can only be determined by observing the forms used in classical authors. IDISATPAKVASVAPNAVETASAVYAJANAMR- DANGANGAREŞU (3) In the words ssat, etc., * is substituted for the first a. The 'optionally' of the former rule does not apply to this. isi, pikkam, sivino, vediso, viano, muingo, ingālo. īsat, 'little', pakva. 'cooked', svapna. "sleep', vecasa, "a ratan', vyajına, a fan', mrdanga, a drum', angāra, "charcoal.' LOPO'RANYE (4) In the word aranya, 'a forest,' the first ass clided Rannam. E SAYYADISU (5) In the words sayyā, etc., e is substituted for the first a. sejjā, sunderam, ukkero, ceraho, achchheram, perantam, velli śayya, 'a bed', saundarya, 'beauty', uthara, a heap', trayodaśa, 'the thirteenth', aścharya, 'wonderful', paryanta, mit', valli, 2 creeper.' as, 2 Such is Vararuchi's explanation of m. 37, Lassen (Prák Instit p 265, cote) proposes 'pratışıddhi' I may add here that in the first four Sections I have generally followed the MSS in giving the Sanskrit word in its crude form while it Prākst it appears in its nom SIDS, as modified by the rules of Sect y This chiefly applies to the terminatiod o ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 3 0 O BADARE DENA (6) In the word badara, 'che jujube,' the first an with the letter d (including its inherent vowel), becomes o, as voram LAVANANAVAMALLIKAYOR VENA (7) In the two words lavana, 'salt,' and navamallska, 'double jasmine,' the first a, with the following u (including its inherent vowel) becomes o as lonam, numallia MAYORAMAYUKHAYORYVĀ VÁ (8) In the two words mayura, a peacock'. and mayükha, 'a ray,' the first a, with the syllable ya, becomes optionally as, moro or mauro, mobo or maubo CHATURTHICHATURDASYOSTUNA (9) In the ewo words chaturthi and chaturdası, 'the fourth' and fourteenth lunations, the first a, with the syllable tu, optionally becomes o as, chotths or chaufthi, choddahı or chauddabr. ADATA YATHADISU VẤº (10) no longer implied (see sūtra 1), in consequence of the change of sthanın or 'primitive clenrenc. In the words yathā etc, a is opcionally substituted for ã. jaha, jahā , caha, tahā, paccharo, pacthāro , pauam, pāuam , talavencaam, tālaventaam , ukkliāom, ukkhāsm , chamaram, cliānaram paharo, pahāro , chadū, chādū, davaggi, dāvaggi , khaiam, khālam santhaviain, santhaviam , halio, halio yathā, as', tathā, 'so', prastāra, 'a bed', prāketa. ·low' , tālavrntaka, 'a fan' , utkhaca, dug up', chāmara, 'a chowtie', prahāra, 'a blow', chācu, 'fattery', dāvāgni, *the burning of a forest', khädıta, 'earen'; sansthāpiti, *placed', hālika, 'belonging to a plough 3 The Prak Saos constantly uses this sûtra the explain the change of a to a before a coojunct, as in achchhera for aśchana & $ 1 2 ·VICTORY to Gaņeśal who is filled with pleasusc as he rubs his check with his trunk, while the corners of his cyes are closed as he listens to the sweet sounds of the bees, dilighted with the juice which 'flows from his temples. By. searching out the things which were to be defined in these sūtras of Prākrt definitions, composed by Vararuchi, Bhāmaha, having attained their meaning, has made a clear and yet concise commentary. SECTION THE FIRS ADER ATAH (1) This sūtra is supposed to exercise an authority {adbikärs], by virtue of which it is implied in the succ. ceding sutras. The various rules, which we shall go though in order, are to be understood as supplying substitutes 'for the first a.' 'For the first' is implied in all the sūtras to che end of the section; 'a' is implied until it is itself enjoined as a substitute for another vowel (in sūtra 10). The e in at is used to exclude the homogeneous vowell (Pänini, i., 1.70). A SAMRDDHYADISU VA (2) In the words samddbi, etc., a is optionally used for the first a. Thus Präkệt:- samiddlii, sămiddli, paadam, pāadam; ahijā, Shijām; mañansıni, māņansıņi; padivaī, påļıvai; sarichchham, Sarieretheti, prebilhii, zībudli, qwusst, päsurtam; pauddhi, pasiddhi; asso, aso. i merr does not merely refer to the yonel in the firss :)flatle, as it sisletts ooght to ds. but frequently means the Ort: lonel of a cerisia llad 1a sord.cr.the a la laria sita..

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI as, sus, ITSADĀDIŞU (11) In sada, etc., , is optionally substituted for a : saz; tai, taā ; jas, jā. sadā, 'always' ; cadā, 'then'; yada, "wlien.' ITA ETPINDASAMEȘU (12) In words like penda, e is optionally substituted for :: as, pendam, pindam ; ņeddā, ņiddā ; sendúram, sindūram; dhainmellam, dhammillam ; chcndham, chmdham ; venhū, vinhū ; petělıam, pitcham. pinda, 'a lump' ; nidrā, 'sleep'; sindūra, ‘red lead' ; dhamınılla, 'braided hair'; chuhna, a mark' ; vişnu, Vışnu' ; pışta, 'pounded.' The word sama or 'like,' is used to indicate that the rule only applies when the followed by a conjunct consonant (as in pinda). ATPATHIHARIDRĀPRTHIVISU (13) In pathan, etc., a is substicuted for :: as, paho (or in its crudc form, paha), halad dā, puliari. pathin, 'a path'; haridrā, turmeric'; pęchuvi, 'the carili.' ITESTAH PADĀDEH (14) In the word sts, thus, when at the beginning of a sentence, a is substituted for the which follows the t : as, ia uaha annaha-vaaņam, ia viasantiu chiram. iti paśyatānyathāvachanam, 'so behold the liy pocr sy(?)'; 161 vikasantyaś chicam, 'hus blossoming a long time.' 4 The first of these examples is very obscure uaha or usaha is a singular word, which is found in the Bengali recension of Sakuntala (sce Bochu , p. 150). There is no rule for at in Vararuch, but Hemachandra [ 8th adby, 2nd pada ] has ibe following: 'ua paśya ; ua ati pasy'etyaszárthe vă prayok-tavyaņ; pakşe pulaåday ab' (cf. Var. vult 69. Leaz therefore, tightly called it (Ury. P 224), 'imperativa quædam forma vulguris lingua.'

·THE PRÄKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI 5 or Wc infer, from its being rescricted to the beginning of 1 sentence, that the rule does not hold in such a case as pro iti, 'priya iti.' UD IKSUVRSCHIKAYOH (15) In the civo words sksu, 'che cane,' and urścbsła, the scorpion,' <« is substituted for sas, achchhii, vinchbuo. O CHA DVIDHAKRAAH (16) o is substicuted in the word duidhā when used with the root krñ, and u also, since we find cha in the sūtra. Thus, duidbākrtam, 'bisected,' becomes dobāram duhäram, and dusdhakryate, 'it is bisected,' dobāras or duhāsjar. ITSINHAJIHVAYOSCHA (17) In sumba, 'a lion,' and bui, 'the tongue,' i is substituced for : as, sibo, jiba The cha is used in the sutra to include other words wluch are not mentioned, hence there is an i in such words as visateha, visambba, etc.. for visvasta. crusted,' visrambba, isuar,' etc. [Tlie commentator, therefore, would seem to bring under this rule che various instances where an, wluch would properly in Prākrt be followed by a double consonant, is exchanged for an in and one of the consonants is dropped]. ID ITAH PĀNIYADISU (98) In panssa, etc., é is substituted for the first i. as, pāniam, aliam, valiam, tinım, hariso, duram, cism, gahiram pāniya, 'Bater, alika, 'false', vyalıks, 'painful'. cadānim, then', karisa, dried con-dung'. dvitiya 'second' ; trtiya, "turd'. gablurs. 'deep'. ENNIDAPIDAKIDRGIDRSESU (19) In niła, ctc.c is subiatuted for i 35.

·6 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI neddam, āpelo, keriso, criso. nida, 'a nest'; āpida, 'pressing'; kidịś. 'what like' ; iděśa, 'such'. UTA OT TUNDAROPESU (20) In words like tunda, o is substituted for : as, tondani, inotrā, pokkharo, pocthao, loddhao, kotţimam. tunda, 'the face”; muktā, 'a pearl': puşkara, “a lake'; pustaka, 'a book' ; lubdhaha, fa hunter' ; kuççima, 'a jewelminc.' The word riipa or 'like,' is used in the sutra co indicate that the # must be followed by a conjunct consonant (as in tunda). ULUKHALE LOA VÃ (21) In ulūkbala, 'a mortar', with the syllable lü optionally becomes o: as, okkhalam or ülabalam. ANMUKUȚĀDIŅU (22) In mukuta, ecc., a is substituted for the first áas, maudam, maulam, garuam, garui, jalithilo, soamallam, avari, mukuça, 'a crest'; mukula, a bud' ; guru, gyrvi, 'heavy' : Yudhisthira, “he name of a king'; saukumārya, 'youthfulness' ; upari, 'above'. ITPURUSE ROH (23) In the word purusa, 'a man,' s is substituted for the u wluch follows r: as, puriso. UDOTO MADHOKES (24) In the word madbaka, 'Bassia latifolia,'« is substituted for : as, mabuam. 5 The Prák. Sadj reads this sutra ud aso madhüladişu, and employs it to explain the shortening of a before a conjunct, as dhutia =dhuria. Similarly, it uses i. 18 to explain the shortening of i. ch. also note, p. 3-4, and Appendix D.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRALIGA OF VARARUCHI 7 ADDUKOLE VĀ LASYA DVITVAM (25) in the word duküla, 'woven silh,' & is optionally substituted for i, and when it is so substituied, the lis doubled: as, duallam or dualam. ENNOPURE (26) In the word niipara, 'an anklet,' e is substituted for i. as, ncuram, RTO 'T (27) A is subscicuced for r in the first syllable of a word: as, tanam, ghana, maam, haam, vaddho, vasalo. Tmi, 'griss', glimi, 'picy' (? anerpaclıy-Ed.): airco dead', keta, 'made' ; vrddha, 'old', vrsabha, 'a bull.' ID RSYADISU (28) In ysbs, etc., its substituted for the initial .: , isi, visi, gicchi, dicchi, sitchi, singāro, nuanko, bhingo, blungāro, huaam, vnnho, vinhsam, kisaro, hichchā, vinchlivo, siālo, hii, kisi, hivā. [s1, "a sage' ; yrsi, 'an ascetic's cushion', grsti, *1 cow that has had one call', drsa, 'siglie', srsti, 'creation, śrngära. 'love', mrgānka, 'the moon, blirnga, a bee'; bhragāra, 'a vase', lirdaya, she fears'; vitrsna. 'contented'(?), venhita, 'grown', kršara, 'a kınd of portage'. hreya, 'action', vráchila, a scorpion', śryala, 's jackal', hret, "act', krsi. 'lusbandry', kept, pics.' UDRITVADISU (19) In tu cc.. # is substituted for the initial . udū, munālo, puhasi, vundāvanam, płuss, pautti, vudam. samvadam, nivvudam vultants, pars'uo, mjus, jimato Fru, 'a season'. mínila, 's borus-fibre', ratlarni, cartli, sindāvana, a country w called'.' pārrs, pic 6 It lies 16...! to at va ia les raiska ·8 THE PRAKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI rainy scason', prāvrtci, 'news'; vivrta, 'opened'; samvita, 'covered', nirvrta, 'ended'; vettanta, 'news'; parablarta, the hoil';' mārka, a maternal uncle'; jāmātrka, a son-in-law.' AYUKTASYA RIĦ (30) The syllable is substituted for the vowel , when initial and not connected with anotlier letter : as, Inam, riddho, richchho. rnam, 'a debt'; rddha, 'prosperous'; šksa, 'a Lear.' KVACHIDYUKTASYĀPI (31) The syllable re is sometimes substituted for an initials, even when it is connected with another letter : as, criso, satiso, tāriso. idrśa, 'such' ; sadrśa, 'like' ; tādęśa, "such.' VRKSE VENA RURVĀ (32) In the word urksa, “a trec,' the syllable ru is optionally substituted for the initial , with its accompanying v rukkho, vachchho. The option being here definitely restricted, the change does not take place at all in the case of the substitution of chb, buc it holds universally in that of kb (see 111., 31.] LRTAH KLRPTA ILIĦ (33) In the word klopta, 'made,' te is substituted for lo Kilttam. From the above substitutions being enjoined, we infer that the vowels r and lr do not exist in Prakrt. ETA ID VEDANADEVARAYOH (34) In vedanā, pain,' and devara, 'a brother-in-law," : substituted for c as, viană, diaro. Sirce optionally' is still implied (from sūtra 32), the forms veanā and deara are also sometimes used as 25, 18 7 A Cuckood ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKAGA ON VARARUCHI AITA ET (35) e is substituted for the first ai: as, selo, scchchan, eravano, kclāso, tellohkam. śaila, a mountain': śaitya, 'cold'; airāvata, Indra's elepliant'; Kailāsa, 'the mountain so called'; trailokya, 'the three worlds.' DAITYADISVAI (36) In the words dartya, etc., ai is substituted for the diplachong 41: as, daïcliclio, chaitto. bhairavo, sairam, vairam, vaideso, vaideho, kalavo, vaisáho, vaisio, vaīsampāano. daitya, 'a demon'; Chaitra, che name of a month'; bhairava, dreadful'; svaira, 'vilfulness'; vaira, enmity'; vaideśa, 'foreign'; vaideha, 'a trader'; kaitava, a cheat'; Vaišākla, 'the name of a month'; vaiśika, meretricious'; Varśampāyana, 'the name of a poet'; etc. DAIVE VA (37) In darva, 'fate', ai is optionally substituted for the diphthong ar: as, daivam or devvam. In the case of its non-subscicution, the u is doubled by the Sūtra "Nidzdtshru' [111., 52). ITSAINDHAVE (38) In the word saindhava, "produced in Sindh,' is substituted for 41: as, Sindbavam, IDDHAIRYE (39) In the word dbairya, 'firmness, the substitute is i: as, dbiram. OTO 'DVA PRAKOŞTHE KASYA VAĦ (40) In the word prsbosbşba, 'the fore-son,' is optionally subscured for o; and, mhen it is so substitused, tek beconies u: as, Pettitho or peo:bo.

·10 THE PRÄKRTAPRAK NA OF VARARUCHI 41 AUTA OT (41) o is subscituted for the first as: as, komuī, jovvanam, Lotthulio, hosambi. kaumudi, 'moonlight', yauvanam, youth', kaustubha, *Visnu's gen', Kauśámbi, 'the name of a city.' PAURADISVAU (42) In paura, etc., 4x is subscicuted for the diphthong pauro, kaurao, prauiso. paura, 'a citizen', haurava, descendant of Kuru,' paurusa, 'manly' These form a class of words which can only be determuncd by observing the form used in good authors. In clic word kausala, 'welfare,' the change is optional: or kausalo. ACHCHA GAURAVE (43) In the word gaurava, respectability,' ! is substituted for au, and so also is au as before (since we find cha, cand,' 111 as, gāravam or gauravam. UTSAUNDARYĀDIŞU (44) In saundarya, ecc., # is substituted for au sunderam, munjāano, sundo, kukkheao, duvvārio.' saundarya, 'beauty', mauajāyana, 'a place producing the munja plant' (?), saunda, 'intoxicated', kauhscyal 3, sword', dauvācika, 'a porter,' etc as, kosalo the sūtra) as, 7 I may here remind the reader of what is further discussed elsewhere--viz., that in Prakpt there appears to have be-u no distinction between y and b although it is uncertain which was the prevailing sound ·SECTION THE SECOND AYUKTASYANĀDAU (1) Tlus being an adbıkāra, will be implied in clic succecding sūcras. The rules which we shall from this point cnjoin, arc to be understood as applying in the case of a single non-initial consonant. Thc clision of k, ctc., by sūtra 2, will serve for an instance: as, Maüdam for the Sanskrit Mukuta. Why do we say a single consonane'? Compare Aggho and Akko for the Sanskțit argha and arha (where we find a conjunct consonant, and consequently no elusion). Why 'non-initial'? compare hamalam. 'Single' is implied to che end of the section; 'non-inicial,' uncil , is enjoined in sūcra 31. KAGACHAJATADAPAYAVAM PRAYO LOPAH (2) These nine consonants, k. g, cb. p, , d, poy, w,' when single and non-inicial, are generally clıded: as, k, Maülo, naulam; 8saro, naaram, cb, 123nam, sūi; 1. gao, ragdam; 3, kaam, viānam; d. gaā, mao, p, hai, sulam, suuriso. (In the word 'supurusa,' although the pis elic initial of the word 'putusa,' the last member of the compound, it is still clided. The author of the comment therefore declares that 'the initial letter of the last member of a compound is considered as non-natal.') Y, vaunā, nasnam; v, jism, diabo (cf. 11. 461. muhula, 'a bud' ; nakula, 'disgraced',' sägasa, 'the s-a': nagara, 'a ciry'; vacans, 'speech'; suchi, needle': 693, an clephant': rajata, 'silver'. fis, 'mode': sens, cr- 10: 6. del:01. :01, AM ra rret ( ) ·12 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKSSA OF VARARUCHI pansion': gadā, “a club'; mada, “joy'; kapi, *an ape'; vipula, large': supuruṣa, 'a good man': vãyuni, (instr. of vāyu) the wind'; nayana, che cye'; jiva, 'lile'; divasa, 'a day.' From the use of prayas, ('generally,') in the Sūtra, ne conclude that tliere is no clision there euphony is satisfied, as in Suskusumam, piagamaņam, sachāvam, avajalam, atulam, ādaro, apāro, ajaso, savahumānam. sukusuma, "fair-florvered': priyagamana, 'sweetly-going': sachāpa, 'armed with a bow'; apajala, 'without water'; atula, 'unequalled'; ādara, 'respect'; apāra, ‘unbounded'; ayaśas, infamy'; sabahumāna. 'respectlul.' As illustrations of what we mean by 'single consonants." compare sakko, maggo, for śakra, Indra,' and mārga, “a path:' and by non-initial,' compare kālo and gandho, for kāla, sciine,' and gandha, 'a smell.' YAMUNAYAM MASYA (3) In the word Yamunā, the river so called,' them 15 elided: as, Jaunā. SPHATIKANIKAŞACHIKUREŞU KASYA НАН (4) *Non-snitial' conunues to be implied. In the dirce words sphatika, 'crystal,' nikasha, the touchstone,' and chskura, hair,' his substituted for k (we now chision to substitution] : as, Phalsho, nebaso, chihuro. SĪKARE BHAH (5) In the word fikara, schin rain,' bb is substituted for k: as, Sibbaro. CHANDRIKAYAM MAH (6) In the word chandrikā, 'moonlight,' m is substituted for k: as, sbandımā. RTWĀDISHU TO DAH (7) In ste, etc, d 15 substituted for t: as, from pass ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 13 udū, caadam, āado, nivvudi, āudi, samvudi, suidi, äidi, hado, sanjado, viudam, sanjādo, sampadi (padivaddi*). stu, 'a scason', rajata, 'silver'; āgata, 'come'; pirvoti, 'sest', āvrti, 'a surroundug'; samvrc, 'covering': sukru, *v ruc', akrtı, 'forni', haca, bilicd', samyata, 'restrained'; Viveca, 'opened'; samyāca, 'gone'; samprati, 'now' (? recently -Ed.) ; pratipatti, 'fame.' PRATISARAVETASAPATAKĀSU DAH (8) In these words, d is subsestuced for t: as, padisaro, vediso, padai. pratisara, 'a servane', vecasa, 'the ratan', patākā, 'a flag.' VASATIBHARATAYOR HAH (9) In vasals, 'a dwelling,' and bharata, 'a proper name,' b us substituted for t. as, vasabi, bbarabo, GARBHITE NAH (10) In garbbita. 'pregnant,' n is substituted for #: as, Gabbbinam. AIRAVATECHA (11) In arrāvata, 'Indra's clephant,'n is substituted for i: as, Erätano. PRADIPTAKADAMBADOHADESU DO LAH (12) In these words I 15 substituted for d: as, palutam, kalamvo, dobalo pradipura 'kindled', kadamba, thic tree so calle?', Colada, the longing of a pregnant woman.' 3 This word ought not to belong to this sOtra as it is intended only for words with a singles. tut idc Sanish S353, jo its correspcoda rule, adds nlshretti aad sama si besides (sec Lansea, Arp-2) As this change of prorf to mouilsuriversal (sce Lunen, r 304 1. 114 srsular that this is the only iciunss given by Sararuch in a 1012. TŁc 111 Sanj reads to the sot pati for projets Maacbacara has a sua pruty a da $ Nemacbaccra hui atio detais ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI GADGADE RAH (13) In gadgada, "inarticulate utterance,' ris substituted for d: as, Gaggaro. SANKHYAYĀMCHA (14) In words expressive of number, s substituced for d: as, cāralia, vāraha, teralia, ckādaśa, eleven'; dvādaśa, "ewelye'; Crayodaša, •chirteen. But the d must be a 'single' letter [by sūtra 1), or the rule will not apply; thus we find Chauddaha for Chaturdaśa, 'fourtcen,' (by iti. 3, and iii. 50). PO VAH (15) V is subscicuced for a single non-initial p: as, sūvo, savaho, ulavo, uvasaggo. sāpa, ta curse'; sipatha, 'a curse': ulapa, a kind of grass'; upasarga, 'a portent.' From the use of prāyas, ('gencrally,") (implied from sūtra 2] we infer that this rule applics wherever there is no elision. APIDE MAH (16) In the words āpīda, 'pressing,' m is substituted for på as, āmelo [cf. b., 1910 UTTARIYANIYAYORIJO VĀ (17) In the word uttariya, and in words ending with the affix aniya, 11 is substituted for y: as, uttariam urtarijjam, tamaniam or ramanujari, bharaniam or bharanijjam. uttarīya, 'an outer garmene', camaniya, 'pleasing', bharaniya, 'to Lc cherished.' CHHAYAYAM HAH (18) In tlic word chbãyã, 'a shadow,' his substituted for y: as, cbbaba.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAK I SA OF VARARUCHI 15 is subas, as, KABANDHE BO MAH (19) In the word kabandba, 'a headless trunk,' m stituted for b: as, Kamand bo. TO DAH (20) d is substituted for a non-initial t: nado, vidavo. nata, 'an actor', vitapa, 'a branch.' SATĀSAKATAKAITABHEȘU DHAH (21) In the words sata, 'an ascetic's clotted hair,' sakata, a carr,' kaitabha, 'a demon,' db is substituted for : sadba, saadbo, kedhavo [cf. sūtra 29. SPHATIKE LAH (22) In sphatika, 'crystal,' I is substituted for t: as, Phalıbo [of. sūt. 4). DASYA CHA (23) I is subscituted for a single non initial d: as, dālımam, talaam, valahi. dādıma, 'a pomegranate', tadāga, 'a pond'; vadabhı, 'an awning, etc., on a palace. Since prāyas, ('generally;") 15 implied from sūtra 2, we infer chat such forms as the following are also admissible: as, dadımam, vadısam, nivido. THO DHAH (24) db is substituted for a single non-initial sb: as, madliain, jadharam, hadhoram. micha,' 'a college' (? monastery--Ed.), Jathara, the telly,' hathora, 'hard'. ANKOTHE LLAụ (35) In ankorbs, *2 plant, ll is substituted for tb• as, unlollo. 6 Kabandha also means 'rater, and ia this sease Aamandha is said to be a Saaskrit word (see Wilson's Leucca ] 7 Masc la Sans ·16 THE PRĀLRTAPRAKASA OF YARARUCHI PHO BHAH (26) bb is substituted for a single non-initial ph; as, sibhā, sebhālıā, sabhari, sabhalam. śıphā, “a fibrous root'; sephālıkā, 'a flower', śaphari, 'a small fish', saphala, 'fruitful.' KHAGHATHADHABHAM HAH (27) b is substituted for the five consonants kb, gk, th, dh, bh, when single and non-initial, kh, muham, mchalā, gh, mcho, jahanam, th, gāhā, savaho, db, rāhā, valuro, bb, saha, tāsaho. anukha, 'the face', mekhalā, “a girdle', meglia, a cloud', jaglana, "the loins', gādlıā, 'a song', sapatha, a curse': Rādhā, Krishna's favourite,' (? consort-Ed.) badhira, 'deal', sabhā, 'a house' (7 council-Ed.), râsabha, ‘an ass.' prāyaḥ being still implied (see sūt. 23], we also find such forms, as pakhalo, palanghano, adhīto, adhano, uvaladdhablāvo. prakhala. 'very base', pralanghana, 'transgressing', adhīra, 'unsteady', adhana, 'poor', upalabdhabhāva, 'having the meaning understood PRATHAMASITHILANISADHESU DHAH (28) In the words prathama, 'first, ssthala, 'loose', nishadha, *the name of a country,' dh is substituted for th and db, as padbamo, ssdhslo, nisadbo. KAITABHE VAH (29) In the word kastabba, 'the name of a demon,' u stituted for bb, as Kedbavo. HARIDRĀDINĀM RO LAH (30) In baridra, etc., I is substituted for r: haladdā, chalano, muhalo, jahitthilo, somālo, kalunam, anguli, ingālo, chilādo, phalıha, plialıho. 8 This form 18 thus explained by the Pråkpita Sadj -sukumara : the first u becomes o by 1 20, tbe k is clıded by ii 2, and the o and u is subas ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI as haridrā, 'curmeric'; charana, 'the foot'; mukhara, 'noisy', Yudhisthira, 'name of a king'; sukumāra, 'soft'; karuna, 'mournful', anguri, a finger (?-ring-Ed.),' angāra, charcoal', kırāta, 'a barbarian', parikhā, 'a moat'; parigha, 'a club,' etc ADERYO JAH (31) The adhukāra of 'non-initial' which was implied from sūtra 1 ends here. 1 is substituted for an inicial y: as, jatchi, jaso, jakhho. yasci, 'liquorice',' yaśas, 'glory' (cf 1v. 18]; yaksa, "a demigod.' YASTYAM LAH (32) In the word yastr, a stich,' I is substituted for y: latthi. KIRĀTE CHAH (33) In kırāta, 'a barbarian,' cb is substituted for the inicial k. as, Chrlado. KUBJE KHAĦ (34) In kubja, 'hump-backed,' kb is substituted for the inicial letter. kbujo DOLĀDAŅDASANEȘU DAH (35) In the words dola, 'a litter', danda, 'a staff', daśana, a cooth,'d is substituted for the initial lecter: as, dolā, dando, dasono. PARUSAPARIGHAPARIKHASU PHAŇ (36) In the words PATHSA, 'harsh', parigba' a club', now mccuns 10 sandhi, the last is dropped by iv 1. We have thus somara and by the present rule somola W & Var Lect. suumado was accidentally omitted in notes elsewhere afl the other VISS bave somalo 9 Assassi is also the subject of the next sötra cither there are two forms in use or there ought to be some difference of meaning in the two words The meaning in the text secons jusufied by a Var Lect. madhupasti sa two MISS, but Ci Lass. last p 100 Lassea (p 195) illustrates latihi by the modern lark, 'a columa' as, Firoze Lath ·18 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI parkba, 'a moat,' ph is substituted for the initial letter : as, pharsso, pbaliho, phalba. PANASE 'PI (37) Also in the word panasa, 'the bread-fruit trec,' ph is subsescuted for p: as, pbaņaso. VISINYAM BHAĦ (38) In the word visini, can assemblage of lotus-flowers,' bh is substitured for the initial letter, as bhisani. From the express mention of the feminine (visini) we infer that the rule docs not hold in the neuter visam, «the lotus-fibre.' MANMATHE VAH (39) In the word manmatba, 'love', u is substituced for che inicial letter: as, vammabo. LAHALE NAH (40) In the word lābala, is substituted for the inicial letrer: as nābalo. ȘAȚSAVAKASAPTAPARŅĀNĀM CHHAH (41) In these words cbh is substituted for the initial letter: as, chhatthi, chhammuho, chhāvao, chhattavanno. shasthi, the sixth day of the lunar fortaight'; sanmukha, "kārtikeya'; śāvaka, 'a young animal'; saptaparna, "a kind of tree.' NO NAH SARVATRA (42) Initial' is no longer implied herc. for a single n everywhere: as, nai, kanaam, vaanam, mānuso. n 1$ substituted 10 Two MSS read lohala, 'made of uron, for the unknown word lahala, but as Hema-chandra (see note 4, sút 38), recognises the word, as well as three, if not four of the MSS. of Vararuchi, it is probably correct. Hema-chandra's rule is also found in the Prik Sanj ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 19 nadi, la river'; kanaka, 'gold'; yachana, 'speech'; mānuşa, "human'. SAȘOH SAH (43) s is everywhere substituted for ś and ș: as, (s) saddo, nisã, an kusa; (5) sandho, vasaho, kasāam. sabda, 'a sound'; nisa, night'; ankuśa, 'an elephant's hook'; sandha, a eunuch'; vriṣabha, 'a bull'; kasāya, brown'. DASADIŞU HAH (44) In the words däsa, etc., b is substitured for ś: as, daha, caraha, vāraha, teraha." daşa, 'cn'; ekādaśa, eleven'; dvādaśa, 'twelve'; crayodaśa, 'chirteen.' (cf. ii. 14, for the change of d cor.] SANJNAYAM VĀ (45) When the word is a name, the subscitution of b fors in dāsa is opcional: as, dahamulo, dasamuho; dahavalo, dasavalo; daharaho, dasaraho. daśamukha, 'a name of Rāvana'; daśabala, a Bauddha teacher'; Dasaratha, 'the name of a king.' DIVASE SASYA (46) In the word divass, a day,' b is substituted" for s: as, dia SNUŞAYAM NHAĦ (47) in the nord snusa, 'a daughter-in-law,' mb is substitured for ș, as sonbi. 11 It may be wonih #hile to trace the steps by which freyod 13 becomes trahe. By i S,*c have irryOdasa, by it. , ül. 3. trodds. by ll. 14, 44, seoraha sod, Qcally, as the cand o mect is nodbi, by iv. 1. laco is elided. 1: Two NISS.mate this rule opioaal (by contouic id from $.45). and 233 diaio, which is the usual forin ia the flagi.

·SECTION THE THIRD UPARILOPAH KAGADATADAPAŞASĀM (1) The eight consonants k, g, d, t, d, poş, s, are elided when standing first in a conjuncc; and the remaining letter, if it is not at the beginning of the word, is doubled by sütras 50, 51 of this section. Thus, [k.] bhattam, sitthao. bliakta, 'devoted'; sikthaka, 'bee's-wax' (neur.). [8.1 nuddho, sınıddho. mugdha, 'foolish' (? charmed-Ed.); snigdha, 'kınd'.* [d] khaggo, sajjo. khadga, a sword"; sladaja, the fourth note of the gamut'. [t.] uppalam, uppão. utpala, 'a blue lotus'; uepāca, 'a portent'. [d.] muggo, muggaro. Mudga, 'a kidney-bean'; mudgara, 'a hammer'. [P] sutto, pajjatto. supta, 'asleep'; paryāpta, 'adequate'. (sb.] gorghi, nipphuco, gosthi, 'an assembly' (i group-Ed.); nișthura, 'harsh'. [s.] khalsam, neho. skhalıta, 'stumbling': sncha. 'love'. 1 Sotras 50, St are constantly required in carrying out the following sOtras Varauchi's plan with regard to conjuncts is, first 10 enjoin the ellson of certain letters (satras 1-8), then in other cases (sOtras 99). to enjoin the substitution of a single letter for the conjunct, but whether the change bethus an elion or a substitu uon, in either cusc, by sOtras 90 200 S1 this letter is doubled, unless it be, or (sDira 54), or at the beginning of a word • ( plea1105-Ed.)

·THE PRĀLRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 21 ADHO MANAYAM (2) The consonants m, n, and y are clıded, when standing last in a conjunct, and clie remaining letter is doubled, as before, by sūtras 50, 51. Thus, [m.] sossam, rassi, juggam, vaggi. susma, 'light'; raśmı, '3 fay'yugma, 'a pair'; vāgmın, 'eloquene'. [n] naggo. nagna, 'naked'. [y.] somnmo, joggo. saumya, 'mıld'; yogya, 'fic'. SARVATRA LAVARAM (3) The letters 1, ut , are always clided, whether they stand first or last in a conjuct, and the remaining letter is doubled as before. Thus, [1.] ukkā, vakkalam, vikkavo. ulkā, 'a corcli', valkala, 'bark', viklava, 'agicated.' Ju.] loddhao, pikkam (cf. 1. 3). lobdliaka, 'a hunter'; paksa. 'cooked'. [..] akko, sakko. arha. "the sun', sakra, Indra'. DRE RO VĀ (4) In the conjunct dr, thc elision of r is optional: thus we have dolo or drolo, chando or cliandro, ruddo or rudro. droha, mischnel'. chandra, the moon': Rudea, 's demigod.' SARVAJRA-TULYESU NAH (5) In words like sanajñs, the vis eladed: 19. Jivrajo, ingi?}]O. ? Or .as there laudusetia keticia the isoleensla Pr11.1.

·22 THE PRĀLRTAPRAKASH OF VARARUCHI sarvajña, 'omniscient'; ingitajña, “knowing signs'. This elision of n takes place in all words which are similarly derived from ña, 'to know'. [This explains the tsilya of the sūtra.] SMASRUSMAŠĀNAYORADEH (6) The first letter of śmaśru, 'the beard,' and śmaśāno, 'a cemetery,' is elıded : as, massū, masānam. MADHYAHNE HASYA (7) In the word madbyābna, 'noon,' ħ is elided as, magybanno. HNAALAHMESU NALAMĀM STHITIRORD. DHVAM (8) In the conjunccs, bn, hl, bm, the letters n, l, m are respectively written before the h: as, puvvanho, avaranho, kalhāram, alhado, vamhano. pūrvāhna, 'fore-noon', aparāhna, afternoon', kahlāra, "the white water-lily', āhlāda, "joy', brāhmana, brahman'. 'a Our rules as an instance, YUKTASYA (9) This is an adbskāra [cf. 1. 1] and is implied in the succeeding sūtras to the end of the section. are henceforth to be understood as supplying a substitute for a conjunct. attbi for Astbs (by sūtra 11) will serve The use of the word 'conjunct shews that these substitutions are not intended to apply to final letters, since the second member of a final conjunct is sejected by Pān. viii. 2, 23. STASYA THAH (10) tb is substituted for the conjunct st: as, latthi, dirthi. yastı, 'a stick'; drsti, 'sight'.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRALĀSA OP YARARUCHI 23 as, atibi. ASTHINI (11) In the word astbi, a bonc,' tb is substituted for the conjunct STASYA THAH (12) This substiçuted for st. This sūtta rcvokes sūtra 1, a hich would enjoin the elision of the s, as being the first member of the conjunct st. hartho, samattho, thuī, thavao, korthuho. hasta, "the hand', samasta, all', stuti, 'praise', stavaka, 'a nosegay', kaustubha, “Krshna's jewel'. NA STAMBE (13) In the word stamba, 'a shrub;' th is not substituted for as, sambo is c. the s is elided by 111. 1). STAMBHE KHAH (14) In the word stambba, 'a post,' kh is subsçituced for st" as, kbambbo. STHANAVAHARE (15) In the word stbănu, firm, kb is substituted for the conjunct, except when it significs Siva as, kbani. Why do we make this exception? When 10 signifies Siva, it is sbanii (by s. 12). SPHOTAKE (16) In the word spoolaka, 'a boil,' kb is substituted for the conjunct as, kbodao, RYASAYYABHIMANYUSU JAH (17) I is substituted for the conjunct ry, and also for the conjunct in the two word: sayya and abbimanyu 35, kajam, sejjà, ahımajjů. Kārya, 'co be done', sayyá. 's bed'; Abhimanyu, “Arjuna's son.'

·24 THE PRÄKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI TÜRYADHAIRYASAÜNDARYASCHARYAPARYAN. TEŞU RAH (18) In these words is substituted for the conjunct ry, (and as by s. 54, and h are acves doubled, s. 50 is here inoperative.) tūram, dhiram [cf. 1.39], sunderam, achchheram, per- 1 antam türya, 'a musical instrumene', dhairya, ficmuess', saundarya. "beavey', āšcharya, 'wonderful', paryanra, limet SORYE VA (19) In the word sürya, 'che sun,', is optionally substatuted for ry. a5, siro, or else by s. 17, sujjo. CHAURYASAMESU RIAM (20) la words like chaurya, riam is substitured for ry, as, choriam, sociarn, vīriam, chaurya, "cheft', Laurya, 'heroism'*, vacya, “heroism.' From the use of the plıcase 'like' in the sūcra, cluis is a class, which can only be determined by authority (cf. 1. 2]. PARYASTAPARYAŅASAUKUMĀRYESU LAH (21) In the words paryassa, «allen', paryana, *2 saddle'. saubamärya, "youthfulness,' I is subscituted for ry: 25 pallatekam, pallānam, soamallam. RTASYA TAH (22) t 15 substituted for it, as, kevatrao, natçao sattui. kaivartaka, 'a fisherman', narcoks, an actct'13stahu. an actocis.' (? Yatour-d) * We may bere seltsce the steps by which saubamärjan becomes Soamallari Byi 22, 41, it becomes soemdryam (the & being ellded by (L.) the prescat sir, sila lit. $0 Sives II (or 1) 10d be a Is shorteoed bclore the conjucot by 10 (xes noteSec 11 ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 25 PATTANE (23) t is also subscicuced for the conjunct in pattana, 'a cown ;' as pattanam. NA DHORTĀDIŞU (24) is not substituted for it in the class dharta, etc. Thus we have dhūtto, kicci, vatcamāṇam, 'vattā, āvatco, samvattao, nivattao, vattıā, atto, karcari, muttī, (y being elided in these words by iii. 3). dhūsta, 'a gamester'; kirti, 'fame'; vartamāna, 'exiscing' vārtā, tidings'; avarta, 'a whirlool'; samvarcaka, 'Baladeva' nivartaka, 'returning'; vartıkā, , a wick'; ārca, pained'; kartari, 'a knife', mūrti, 'form.' GARTEDAH (25) In the word garta, 'a hole,' d is substituted for 11: gaddo. GARDABHASAMMARDAVITARDIVICHHARDI SURDASYA (26) In the words gardabba, 'smell'; sammarda, trampling': vstardı, 'a covered cerrace'; vichbards, 'a fine building' (?), d is substituced for rd: as, gaddaho, sammaddo, viaddi, vichhaddi. TYATHYADYAM CHACHHAJAH (27) ch, chh. 1. are respectively substituted for ty, thy, dy; as, as, [ty] nichcham, paclichakhham. nitya, 'constant'; pratyakşa, 'perceptible.' [tby.] rachchhā, michchliā, pachchham. rathya, 'a road'; mithya, 'falsely'; pathya, 'proper' (:). (dy.) vaijā, vejjam. vidyā, “knowledge'; vaidya, 'medical.' (? doctor-Ed.)

·26 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI DHYAHYORJHAH (28) zb is substituted for dby and by: as, [dhy.) majjham, ajjhão. madhya, 'middle'; adhyāya, 'a chapter.' [by.] vajjhao, gujhao. vāhyaka, 'external'; guhyaka, 'secret.' SKASKAKŞAM KHAH (29) kb is substituted for shk, sk, and ks: as, '[shk.] mukkham, pokkharo. muska, 'a licap,' (masc.); puskara, 'a lake.' [sk.] khando, khandho. skanda, 'skanda'; skandha, 'the shoulder.' [ks] kliado, jakklo. ksata, 'wounded', yaksa, 'a demigod.' AKHYADIȘU CHHAH (30) In aksbs, etc., chh is substituted for ks: as, achchhi, lachchhi, chhunno, chhicam, chihuddho, uchchhutto, sarıchchham, uchchhū, uchchhā, chhāram, richchho, machchluā, chhuam, chhuram, chhetchm, vachchho, dachchho, huchchhi. akshi, 'thie cye'; laksmi, beauty', kshunna, 'bruised, ksīra, 'milk, ksubdlia, 'agitated', utksipta, "tossed up'; sadriksa, like', iksu, ‘chc cane' (cf. 1. 15); uksan, “an ox', ksāra, black sale'; tiksa, 'a bear'; maksikā, 'a fly'. Asuta, sneezing', ksura, a razor', ksetra, 'a field'; vaksas, 'the breast'; daksa, Dahsa', kuksi, the belly', etc. KŞAMAVRKSANESU VA (31) In the words ksama, 'patience'; urksa, ksana, 'a moment, a feast,' cbb is optionally substituted for ks: as, cbbami or kbama; vacbebbe or nokkbo; cbhanam a trec', ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OT VARARLCHI 27 or kbanam. It should be observed that the cbb is used in urksa when & is substituted for, [of. 1. 32], and in ksana when it signifies 'a feast.' ŞMAPAKŞMAVISMAYEȘU MHAH (32) mb is substituted for sbm, and also for the conjunct in the two words paksman and vismays: thus, gimho, umhā, pamho, vimhao. grīsma, "che hot season', usman, the hot season'; paksman, ‘an eyelash'; vismaya. 'surprise.' HNASNASNAKSNASNĂM NHAH (33) nb is substituted for bn, sn, sn, ksa, and śn: thus, [bn.] vanh, xanhũ. vahnı, 'fire', jalinu, Jahnu'. (sn.] Nliānam, panhudam. snāna, 'bathing', prasnuta, .flowing.' [sn] vinhū, kanho. Visnu, Visnu", krsna, Krsna' (111. 61]. {ksn.] sanham, unbam. ślaksna, 'small'; tiksna, 'sharp.' [śn.] panho, sinho. Praśna, 'a question', śiśna, 'penis.' CHIHNENDHAH (34) In the word cbshna, a mark,' ndh is substituted for the conjunct: as, cbindham. SPASYA PHAH (35) ph is substituted for sp puppham, sappham, nipphão. as, 4 Lassen (Gymnosoph P 21) explains In this sease as desideratum est, optatum,se, doctrinæ hujus conditoribus constitutum It is especially used to introduce an additional rule of a Commentator ·28 THE PRĀLR1APRAKISA OF VARARUCHI puspa, 'a Aower', śaspa, 'young grass', nispāya, without water.' SPASYA SARVATRA STHITASYA50 (36) ph is substituted for sp, wherever it is found (chat is, in the beginning of middle of a word): as, phanso (cf. 1v. 15), yhandanam. sparśa, touch', spandana, 'a chrobbing'. SI CHA (37) St is also sometimes substituted for sp: as, padiseddbi for pratisparddhin, 'a rival' (cf. 1. 2]. VASPE ASRUNI HAH (38) b is substicuted for sp in the word väsfa, when it signifies, 'a cear': as vābo. Why do we specify this signification? When it signifies, hot vapour,' we must use vappho (in accordance with s 35). KÄRSÄPAŅE (39) In the word kārsāpana, 'a certain weight, b is substituted for the conjunct. as, kābāvano SCHATSAPSAM CHHAH (40) cbb is substituted for the conjunccs ścks, ts, and ps. thus, [ścb.] pachchhimam, achchheram, [ts.] vachchho, vachchharo, (Ps ] lichclıbā, juguchchha. paśchima, 'western', āścharya, 'wonderful'; vatsa, a call', vatsara, 'a year', lipsā, 'desire' (7 covetousness-Ed.), jugupsā, 'censure.' VRISCHIKE NCHHAH (41) In the word vnicbika, 'a scorpion,' nchbas substituted for ścb, as, vinchbuo (cf. l. 15) S Though all the 1155 (Etcept W) read Senatra sthitarya it is not clear by the words are needed in this sätra ·THE PRÄKRTAPRAKÄSA OF VARARUCHI 29 as, NOTSUKOTSAVAYOH (42) In the words utsuka, 'regretting,' and utsava, 'a feast,' the substitution of chb for is (enjoined by s. 40) is forbidden; we have therefore ussuo and ussavo (by 111. 1, 50). NMO MAH (43) m is substituted for nm, although (by s. 2) m is properly elided when it is the second member of a conjunct: as, jammo, vammaho. janman, 'birth'; manmatha, 'love'. [cf. 11. 39] MNAJNAPANCHĀSATPANCHADASESU NAH (44) n is substituted for min and in, and for the conjunct in the words pancbāšat and panchodāsa: pajjunno, janno, vinnānam, pannāsā, pannaraho. pradyumna. “Kāma'; yajna, a sacrifice'; vijñāna, *knowledge'; panchāśat, 'fifty', panchadaśa, 'fifteenth.' TALAVRNTE NTAH (45) In the word tālouinta, 'a fan,' nt is substituted for the conjunct: as, tälbuentasm. BHINDIPALE NDAŇ (46) In the word bbındspāla, a dart,' nd is substituced for the conjunct : as, bbindivālo. VIHVALE BHAHAU VĀ (47) In the word vihuala, 'agitated,' bh and b arc optionally substituted for the conjunct : as, vebbbalo, vibolo [for c of the first form sce i. 12). ATMANI PAH (48) In the word alman, 'self,' p 15 substituted for the conjunct: ss. appa. KMASYA (49) p is substituted for the conjunct km: as, ruppam, ruppini.

·30 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA CF VARARUCHI rukma, 'gold', Rukmini, Laksmi.' The Commentator remarks that this and the preceding sūtra (which might otherwise have beca united) arc separated, because the latter of the two (s. 49) is absolute, while thc former (s 48) is only partially applicable, as ātmen admits of another form (as attā, by 111 2. cf. var. lect v 46] besides appa SESĀDESAYORDVITVAM ANĀDAD (50) Wherever after performing an elision or substitution enjoined by a rule, a single consonant comes to represent a conjunct, this letter is always doubled, except in the beginning of a word As examples of such, after eission bhutcam, maggo. bhukta, 'caten' (the k clıded by 111 1), mārga. 'a pach" [the r elided by 111. 3] As examples of such, after substitution. latghi, ditchi, hattho. yasti, a stick', dristi, 'siglie' (111 10); hasta, che hand' (u 121 Why do we except those which are ac the beginning of * word? Compare such cases as, khaliam, khambho, thavao. skhaliwa, 'fallen' (che selded by all. 1], stambha, 'a post' (111. 14] stavaka 'a nosegay' (m. 12). VARGESU YUJAH PORVAH (51) When the doubling enjoided by the previous sútra cakes place, whether in regard to the first or the second member of the conjunct, wherever the single representative is an aspirate (that is, the second or fourth letter of its class ) 6 The Prölyta Senasva explains sui «Yuç iti samānam dvitiyachturthidiaan sanjos ·THE PRÄKRTAPRAKASA OF VIRARUCHI 31 it is to be doubled by prefixing its own non-aspirate: in che case of the other letters, of course they chemselves are their own duplicates. Examples by elision: vakkhānam, aggho, muchchhā, nijjharo, luddho, nibbharo. vyākhyāna, “explanation', argha, oblation', mūrchhā, fainting', nirjhara, 'cascade', lubdha, 'greedy'nirbhara, 'excessive.' (?-Ed.) Examples of substitution: ditthi, lacthī, vachchho, vippharıso, nitthāro, jakkho, lachchhī, atthí, puppham. drsci, *sight', yasti, a stick', vaksas, the breast' [cf. iv. 19), visparśa, 'couch', nistāra, 'ctossing', yaksa, 'a demigod’, laksmi, beauty' (?-Ed), aschi, 'a bone', puspa, 'a flower'. NIDADIŞU (52) In the words nidā, etc., the medral letter is doubled, although it is not a conjunct: as, neddam [for the escc 1. 191 sotram, pemmam, vāhirtam, ujjuo, jannao, Jovvanam nida, a nest', srota, 'a river', preman, affection* vyābota, 'pronounced', Iju, strughe', Janaka, 'ebe name of a king', yauvana, 'youth'. AMRATAMRAYOR BAH (53) In the words amra, 'the mango', and tāmra, 'copper', b 15 employed in the doubling enjoined by sūtra 50 as Ambam, tambam." 7 For this difficult sutra of the Var Lect Four of the MSS of Vararuchi read avvam, etc two seem to read as above, which is clearly supported by Hema-ch , the Prāk Sarvasva, Prāk. Sadjiy, and Saoks Sara If it be correct, I suppose the successive changes are amam (by i 3) theo (by 11 501 ammam, but here s 53 interposes, and we have ambam or amyam The only other way of explaing it seems to ·32 THE PRÄKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI NA RAHOH (54) rand b are never doubled: as, dhiram, türam [iii. 18]. jihã [i. 17. iii. 3], vāho (aii. 38). dhairya, firmness'; cūrya, 'n musical instrument": jihvā, 'a longue'; vāşpa, 'a tear'. ANO JRASYA (55) When jó is prcceded by the proposition ā;' its substiture (by sūtra 44) is not doubled: as, ānā, ānaccī, for kjña, ājñapti, “an order'. Why, “when preceded by ä"? In sanna for sanjñā, 'a name', the rule does not hold." [NA VINDUPARE ] (56) A letter, which immediately - follows anusvāra, is not doubled: as, sankanco, sanjhā, for sankrānta, "gone'; sandhyā, ‘rwilight'. The k and ph would otherwisc have been doubled by sūtra 3, 28, SAMASE VĀ. (57) In a compound word, the doubling is optional, whether in the case of an elision or substitution; as, narggāmo or maigānio, kusumappaaro or kusumapaaro; devarchui ar devathuī, āņālakkhambho or anālakhambo. nadigrāma, 'a village by a niver', kusuznaprakara, 'a nosegay', devastuts, 'praise of the gods”; alānastambha, an clephant's post' (for this, cf, 111, 14, and iv. 29). SEVADIŞU CHA (58) In the words sevā, etc., the doubling of the medial letter its also optional: as, sevvā, sevā, ekkam, cam, nakkho, naho; devvam, be by reading amyvam, 1€, the y 1$ substituted for ther and then doubled. 8 This instance is not a good one, if the next süt. be genuine. wbich forbrds the doubling of the n after the anusy, of sam Probably this led to the var. lect., vinnatu - vijñapti. 50 ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKÁSA OF VARARUCHI 33 daīvam, asivvam, asivam, tellokkam, teloam, nihitto, muhio, tunhuikko, cunhio, kannāro, hanıāro, diggham, dīham, catrī, rāi, dukkhio, duhio, asso, aso, 9 issaro, Tsaro, vissāso, visāso, nissāso, nīsäso, rassī, rasī, mitto, mio; pusso, puso sevā, 'service', cka, 'one', nakkha, 'a nail", daiva, 'Eate', aśiva, 'unlucky', trailokya, "the three worlds', nihita, 'entrusted', tūsnīka, 'silent', karnıkára, the tree so called', dirgha, 'long', rātri, 'the night, duhkhita, 'wretched'(? Aflicted-Ed.); aśva, a-horse', īśvara, "God', viśvāsa, *confidence', niśvāsa, a sigh', raśmı, a ray', mitra, *friendly', pushya, “the eighth lunar asterism.' The alternative can be considered in two ways, in words like sevā, there would have been no occasion for the doubling, except for this rule, in words like dorgha, the doubling is alrcady enjoined by other rules [~ g. 111. 3, and 111. 50), and therefore the option granted by this is required to dispense with their operation.20 VIPRAKARSAH (59) This being an adhakāra will be implied in the following sūcras. yuktasya still continues to be implied from s.9. We are therefore to understand that the subject of the succeeding sūtras to the end of the section will be the separation [vsprakarssa] of conjuncts. KLISTASLISTARATNAKRIYASARNGESU TATS- VARAVATPORVASYA (60) In the words klista, etc, the conjunct consonants divided, and the first consonant, which has no vowel of its arc 9 I should prefer aso (ef 2] though the MSS and the Pr, Sanj bave oso 10 For this rule, cf Lass, pp 215-7, who would crplain some of the 105tances by the force of the acceat 3 ·its 34 THE PRĀS RTAPRAKASA OF VAR ARUCH own, suffers vocalisation, and becomes sounded with the original vowel 11 as, kilittham, silictham, raanam, kırā, sārango (or in crude form 'sāranga'.) klista, distressed', ślista, embraced,' ratna, 'a gem", kriya, “an action,'śārnga, 'horny.' KRSNE VĀ (61) In the word krsna, the separation of the conjunct shn is optional:; in the case of separation, the vowel must be supplied as before, lacce, however, the option is definitely restricted, for the separation is impecative, when krsna mcans 'black,' as kasano, buc is forbidden when it means "Visnu," as kanho [111. 331. IH SRIHRIKRITAKLANTAKLESAMLĀNASVAPN- ASPARSAHARSARHAGARHESU (62) In the following words thc conjunct is divided, and the first consonant suffers vocalisation as before, but the inserced vowel 1$ 1, and not the original vowel. sitī, hin, kırīto, kılanto, kileso, milānam, sivino, phariso, hariso, ariho, gaciho ści, “beauty', hri, shame', krita, 'bought', klānta, 'wearied', klesa, 'distress', mlāna 'withered', svapna, sleep', sparśa, "touch', harsa, “joy', atba, 'worthy', garha, ta censurer.' AH KSHMÄSLAGHAYOH (63) In the words kshma, the earth,' and slagba, 'praise, " the conjunct is divided as before, but the first consonant is sounded with 4, as, kbamā salabā 11 At the same time the new syllable so created is of course, subject to previous rules, and thus the first consonant is sometimes elided by il 2. Thus we have ratna ratang and then by il 2) ranna, aad 10 65 padmo paduma and finally pauma ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKAŠA OF YARARUCHI 35 SNEHE VĀ (64) In the word sneba, 'love', the division of the conjunct is optional, but when it does take place, the first consonant is sounded with , as in the preceding sūtra: as, sanebo, nebo. (For the second form, cf. iii. i.] UH PADMATANVISAMEŞU (65) In padma, 'a locus,' and words like tānui (fem. of tanu, slender,') such as lagbui (fem. of lagbu, 'light') etc., the conjunct is divided, and the first consonant is sounded with u instead of the original vowel: as, Paümam, tanni, labui, JYAYAMIT (66) In y, a bow-string,' the conjunct is divided, and the first consonant is sounded with i, instead of the original vowel: as, jiā.

·SECTION THE FOURTH SANDHAVACHĀMAJLOPAVISESĀ BAHULAM (1) Ach is here of course the pratyābära, or technical cerm for all the vowels. When vowels arc in sandhi, or in a state of immediate conjunction, various kinds of vowels and elusions arise 1. Various kinds of vowels 25, jaunaadam, jaunāadam, naissotto, naisotto, vahumuham, vahūmuham, kannauram, kannaüram, roveanā, sıravcanā, plāpīam, plāpsam, siāsiam, siāsiam, savomuo, savomūo, saroruham, sararuham. yamunācata, 'thic bank of the Jumnā', nadısrotas, "the river-stream,' vadhūmukha, 'having a woman's face',' karnapūra, 'the mimosa strīsa', sirovedanā, “a pain in the head,' pitāpīta, drunk and not drunk', sitāsıra, 'white and black', saroruha, 'a lotus.' Various kinds of elision tāaulam, rāulam, tuhaddham, tuhaaddham, mahaddham, mahaaddham, pāvadanam, pāavadanam (vill 5], kunbhāro, kumbhaīro, pavanuddhaam, pavanoddhaam. rājakula, 'a royal family', tavārddha. half of thee,' mamācddha, 'half of me', pādapatana, prostration at any one's feet', kumbliakāra, 'a potter', pavanoddhata, cossed by the sind.' When a conjunct consonant follows, it is always the first of the two meeting vowels which is clıded (when there is any clision at all, which is not always required) From ele use of babula, or 'variously,' in chic sūtra, We conclude that these changes are in some cases absolute, in others they admut of different forms, hence, when other forms 2. as, arc met ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCII 37 with, they are still to be considered as here provided for in the laksmana or Sūtra.' UDUMBARE DORLOPAH (2) In adumbara, 'copper,' du is elided : as, umbaram. 1 The Comm. of this sūtra is obscure, and its cxamples corrupt. and the MSS. afford little aid; but the Prāk Sadjiv, by its use of the sutra in its Comm. on other Sitras throws some light upon its meaning. Heae we continually find it quoted to explain any apparent irregularity in the sandhi of a Prākfit example, which is not provided for by any definite rule. For instance, let us take the word teraha - Sans. Trayodaša, and trace the successive changes by which Vararuch brings out the Prakrt form. By i.5, we have treyodása, by u 14, 44, tre, oraha, and by is 2, 11. 3, seoraha , but we have no rule for the clison of the o, cxcept iv, 1. which is adopted by the Prik San). Bhamaha, in his frst list of examples, appears to extend the rule beyond its legitimate applicatioa, and includes uader at the various castances where the faals of feminine nouas 10 8.1, and a are optionally shortened la composition (cf. Lass., P 290], as in sahumuham or rahümuhar, etc, or where Acuter words 10 as admit, when compounded, of two forms in o ora, as siro- or sira-scand. (The Arst three pairs of ex. are sivco also in the Comm of Hema-ch, sol. 3, dirghahras) au mlhovrtaa) The forms in the line of the Sans text, plaplam, etc, are very doubtful, as well as their Sans. interpretation. Savomuo is certainly corrupt, and ncıther of the Saas. cxplanations given in the MSS is satisfactory. That ta DE scems tnc best, if sc correct it to Sari Omsla, but the two Prik. forms still need some correction. In lines 9, 10, if we make the corrcetions pd.pdos adenom, and add the form pornoddhaam in 1 10, he way adopt the reading of BDEW as given ia the text, and their Saos. explads. tions as given ia the var lect Thc liocs 1-3 after sut 1 ch. IV of the text beginning with the word 'fanyogaparc arc pot without did culty Lassen ba. 511 en 1 1 as a neu 101ra, but I prefer taking it as an additional observation of the Comment to ciplain such a form is Nianuddhaam Parenodlhgen would have been equally correct, bur not paranandhaan. as the cluso3 dclore a conjurat (where it takes place at all), must be that of the formet sowel. Simuarly ia tbc Dlatt. Aiva, rol. Is. 114, on the wond rarorcunst, the Stor remarks (324 although by the rulc 'loro shah,' which caoist tbc clution c! the preceding yoxsl, ha a second (ellost, it should be rsyuser par still by the la mucoc of the day's the clucn is astadsgidse t&rs jadran reilprelomu sts' lacra 4-1 fire alla 11,8 16'larrel 331. 141h2:11.xl:nulo ·38 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI KĀLAYASE YASYA VĀ (3) In kālāyasa, 'iron,' ya is optionally clided : as, Kalasam, kaläasam. BHĀJANE JASYA (4) In bbājana, 'a vessel,' ja is optionally clidcd: as, bhānam, bbāanam. YAVADĀDIŞU VASYA (5) In the words yāvat, etc., v is optionally elided : as, jā, jāva; tā, tāva; pārão, pārävao; anuccanta aņuvattanta; jiam, jīviam; cam, cuvam; ca. evva; kualaam, kuvalaam. yāvat, 'how far'; rāvat, 'so far'; pārāvata, dove'; anuvastamāna, 'following'; jīvita, life'; evam, eva, "so'; kuvalaya,' 'a blue lotus,' etc. ANTYASYA HALAH (6) The 'opcion' of the preceding sütras ends herc. A final consonant is always elided : as, jaso [cf. iv. 18, 19]. naham, saro, kamma, jāva, tāva. yaśas, 'glory; nabhas, "the sky'; saras, 'a lake'; karman, a deed'; yāvat, 'how far'; tāyat, 'so far.' STRIYĀMAT (7) ā is substituted for the final consonant of a feminine word : 15, sariā, padivaā, väā. sarit, 'a river'; pratipad, the first day of a lunar forcnight'; väch, 'speech'. RO RA (8) rá is substituted for a final 2, in a feminine word: as, dhurā, girā. dhur, 'the carriage-pole'; gir, 'speech'. NA VIDYUTI (9) i is not substituted for the final letter of vidyus.

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKÁSA OF VARARUCHI 39 "lightning' (by s. 7), but although a feminine noun ending in a consonant, it follows sūtra 6, and becomes vipi. SARADO DAH (10) da is substituced for the final d of sarad, 'autumn,' and thus we find sarado (for its gender, cf. S. 18). DIKPRAVRŞOS SAĦ (11) Similarly sa is substituted for the final sıbılant of diś, 'a region,' and prāurs, 'the rainy season': as, disā, pāuso (for the change in gender, cf. s. 18; dis continues feminine as before)." MO VINDUĦ (12) anusvāra is substituted for a final m: as, acbcbham, vachchbam, bbaddam, aggım, ecc.' ACHI MASCHA (13) When a vowel immediately follows, m may optionally remain, or, in other words, sandhi in this case is allowed: as, phalam avabarat or pbalamavabarat, 'he gathers fruit'. NANORHALI (14) ansvāra is substituted for the dental and palatal nasals when a consonant follows, and so also is mé (as we infer from the preceding sūt.): as, anso or amso, kanso or kamso, vanchaniam or vamchaniani vinjho or simjho. ? 'd tantum valt regula, non dicendum esse dika et pray18.' Lass last 3 As this and the two following rules merely refer to Prakst ortho crapby, they are of no importance in an English translation, and can hardly be understood, except by those who understand the original cit. 4 There can be little doubt that this addition of Bhimaha's is rong, the Pril Sao (though corrupt) is utent about it. Hema. chandras correspondids SOL. (i 24). 15 añanano galant. Na na na na inerer sthine, rychjane pare, anusidro theat/' ta the cx anse and dansa Bhimaha Appears to consider the nail asa dental, ia coasequence of the dental sibilant which follows it, ·40 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI ansa, 'a part'; kansa, 'the name of a king'; vañchanīya, 'to be tricked'; vindlıya' 'the Vindhya mountains' (vinjha =vindhya,, by iii. 28). VAKRADIŞU (15) In vakra, etc. anusvāra is inserted as an augment: 1s, vankam, tansam, hanso, ansū,' mansū, gunthi, mnantham, mañansini, dansanam, phanso, vanno, paidnsudam, anso, ahimunko. vakra, 'crooked'; tryasra, 'a triangle'; hrasva, “short'; aśru, 'a cear'; śmaśru, a beard'; grishti, 'a cow with one calf'; masta, che head'; manasvini, a wise woman'; darśana, “sight'; sparsa, “touch'; varņa, 'a colour's pratiśruta, promised'; aśva, 'a horse'; abhimukta, 'released,' ctc. MĀNSĀDIŅU VA (16) In such words as mansa, etc., the use of anusvāra is optional: as, mansam, māsam; kaham, kaha; ņūņam, ņūņa; talım, cahı (vi. 7); āsum, üsu." mansa, Acsh'; katham, how'; nūnam, certainly'; rasmin, 'in that'; āsu, fem. loc. plural of idam, 'this'. There is no definite class of words, such as mansa, etc.; but wherever, through fear of violating the metre, anusvära 13 sometimes used and sometimes omitted, the Commentator wishes such a word to be considered as included in the class referred to. YAYI TADVARGĀNTAĦ (17) When any consonane immediately follows, except b 6 5 For this masculine form of a fru, cf. Williams' sak. p. 165. #bere Bocstlost's correction (Sat. p. 217) is adopted. Asum dou are conjectural. This solra is considered also to apply to the anusvārs, which is optionally adde to the terminations of the lastr. and loc. plural, aad neuter nom. plur. etc. as, achchlichint or -hi. i achchhes or sun, i anal op-.m.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARAR UCHI 41 and the sibilants (ie., che pratyāhāra yay), Anusvāca' may optionally become the nasal of the class to which the letter belongs :) as, sarkā, sankho, anko, angam, sancharai, sandho, etc.; or we may use the option of the rulc, and say pankam, vindī, sankā, etc. Why do we use the pratyā. bāra gay in the sūtra? That we may exclude b and the sibilants, as in anso, etc., where we can only use anusvāra. NASANTAPRAVŘTSARADAH PUNSI (18) Nouns ending in n and s, and the two words prāvrs and ſarad, are to be used in the masculine gender (the final n and s being clided by süt. 6); as, kammo, jammo, vammo. karman, 'a decd'; janman, birth'; varman, 'armour'. jaso, camo, saro. yaśas, 'glory'; camas, 'darkness'; saras, 'a lake'. pāüso, sarado. prāvșslı, 'the rainy season' (cf. iv. 11); śarad, che autumn [cf. iv. 10]. NA SIRONABHASI (19) širas, "the lead', and nabbas, 'the sky' (although both end in s). must not be used in the masculine (but in the neuter, as in Sanskçe), and thus we have siram and nabam. PŘIŞTHAKȘIPRASNAH STRIYAM VĀ (20) The three words prispha .the back'; akşi, 'the cye': and praśna, a question,' may be optionally used in the feminine gender : pubi or purham, achchbi or achchbam, panha or panbo. ODAVAPAYOH (21) o is optionally substituted for the prepositions aux and apa, when in composition: as. ohäso or avahäso, osārism or avasātiam. avahása. 'laugliter;' apasărita. 'gonc out.'

·42 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI TALTVAYOR DĀTTANAU (22) da and ttana are respectively subscicuted for the affixes tal and iva (which are used in Sanskợt to form abstract nouns) : as, piņadā, piñattanam, mūdliadā, mūdhattanam. pīnatā, pinacva. 'fatness;' mūdhatā, inūdhacva, 'folly.' KTVA OŅAH (23) una is substituted for ktvā (clic affix of the indeclinable past participle): as, gohcüņa, soüņa, kāüņa, dāuņa. grihīcvā. 'having seized'; śrutvā, 'having licard'; kțievā. *having made'; dacvā, 'having given.' TRNA IRAH SĪLE (24) 174 is substituted for the affix tịn, signifying sila, *habits', or disposition': as, bhamiro, hasiro. bhramanaśīla or bhramitri, fond of wandering'; hasanaśīla or hasitri. •Fond of laughing.' ALVILLOLLALAVANTENTĀ MATUPAH (25) älu, illa, ulla, ala, oanta, inta are substituted for matup: che affix signifying 'possession.' īsālu, middālu; viárılla; mālailla; viārulla; dhaņāla, saddăla; dhanavanta, jovanavanca; rosāinta,1pāņāinci. irşāvat. 'envious'; nidrāvat, sleepy': vikācavac, 'clianged' mālāvac, 'having a garland'; dhanavar, 'wealthy'; sabdavat, 7 The Pr. Sanj. gives this sût, as Ina günah, and similarly the Sanksh. Sira, 180 (Lass. App. p. 47 ); cf. Lass. Inst. p. 367, and infra, viu, SS. 8 Cf. Pin, itu. 2. 134 aad 135. 9 Written sanda in Sak, Willams, 38,1 ; cf. Bochtliosk, note p. 166. 10 CJ. Lais. Pp. 289, 290.

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 43 ‘sounding' yauvanavat, 'youthful', rosavat, angry'; prānavar, 'alive. These various substitutes for matup must not be used indiscriminatciy, but with a due regard to the forms observed in classical authors [Sometimes we find a instead of matup, and sometimes manta : as banumā or banumanta for hanumas, 'the monkeychief', others use the substitutes illa and ulls in the sense of the affixes technically called sassikâh (cf. Pān. iv. 2, 92), as purilla for paurastya (a derivative with the affix tyak, Pān. iv. 2, 98), 'produced in the case', appulla for atmiya (a derivative with the affix cbba, Pān iv. 2, 114) belonging to one's self'. Instcad of the pronouns kom, ecc, in the sense of 'measure' (Pän. V., 2, 39), we should use keddaba, etc.; as, heddalia, hettia, jeddaha. jettia, teddaha, cettia, eddaha, trria kıyat, 'how much', yāvac (explained by Pānını as 'yac parımānam asya') as much as', cāvac, 'so much', ctāvat, "chus much.' Others add buttam as a substitute for che affix krstvas, (Pān. v. 4, 27), but the present Commentator wishes this to be considered as a provincialism 35, saabutlam for satakrita vas, a hundred times', sabassabuitam for sabastokustees, 'a chousand times That is is also frequency added 02 werd wahour changing its meaning (che t being of course clided by : 2). as bbamaro, of bbamarso, for bbramars, 'a bcc "'*) 11 Tur this paisase see ATP B 1. See Arp D I have added the cl. (critted in Vararuchi) from tbe Fr Szoj The word cu afrearsto te corruf! ct the corres rodire rules in Henarch and the Prit Sani ·44 THE PRÄKRTAPRALASA OF VARARUCHI or VIDYUTPITABHYAM LAH (26) The affix la is used at the end of the words vidyut, "lightning,' and pita, 'yellow,' without altering their mcaning: as, usjjú or vijjuli; piam or pialam. [VRINDE VO RAH] (27) In the word vinda, 'a heap,' r is optionally used after the v, without altering its meaning: as, urandam vandam. KARENVĀM RAŅOH STHITIPARIVRTTIH (28) In the word karenu, “a female elephant,' cher and пасс transposed: as, kamerā. From the express mention of the feminine, we infer that the rule does not hold in the masculine: as, karena, 'a male elephant.' ĀLANE LANOH (29) In the word alāna, an elephant's poet," the land , arc transposed (of course, as before, without their vowels) : as ānālakbambo for alanastambba (cf. iii. 57). VRHASPATAU VAHORBHAAU (30) In the word vrbaspati, 'che regent of the planer Jupiter,' bh and a are respectively substituted for v and b: as, bhaapphai (cf. i11. 36.] MALINE LINORILAU VĀ (31) In the word malina, dirty,' . and I are optionally substituted for l and respectively: as, mailam or malınam. GRHE GHARO'PATAU (32) gbara is used in the sense of grba, a house,' except when it is followed by pati, 'a master:' as gharam, a house.' Why do we make this exception'? Because we have gobapats, a householder. DADHĀDAYO BAHULAM (33) The class of words called dadbā. ctc., are irregularly used instead of clie class dangtri, etc. : as, ·THE PRĀLRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 45 dadlā, danstrā, a tooth', enlum, idanim, 'now', dhiña's or dhūdā, duhitā, a daughter', chātuliam, clācurya, dexterity', mandūro, mandūro, mandūka, 'a frog', gharc nihicam [1v. 32], grhe nihitam, deposited in the house', kandotto,. utpala, 'a blue locus', golā, godīvari, che river Godāvacı', nidālam,15 laláta, "the foreliead', bhunai, bhū, *the earth', vcluram, vaidūrya, lapis lazuli', avahovāsam, ubhayapārsva, 'both sides', māındo or mãando,16 chūta, 'a mango tree' The word ads in the sūtra is used in the sense of 'similetude' or 'class', therefore all works of common speech may be considered as comprehended under this rule, winch are used by convention in different provinces? 13 disa Sans mord se Les of also llaust und 14 C/ Sacs, dondela 18 CI Sant * (l's 16 CI Sartre 17 Al mist te eneste NSS daert 13 418 ater t Pitt el. et 1 11 fra les ·SECTION THE FIFTH ON DECLENSION ATA OTSOH (1) o is substituted for ss, the affix of the nom. sing., after a word ending in a: as, vachchho, vasaho, puriso. vrksas, a trec', vrisabhas, 'a bull', purusas, 1 man. [The a is considered to be clıded by iv. 1 '] JASSASORLOPAH (2) has and sas, the affixes of the nom. and acc plural are clided after words ending in a: ae vachchha sobants for uriksāb sobbante, The trees are beautiful.' Here the vowel a is lengthened by sūtra 11, and then the aff.x jas is clided Vachchbe niachchbaha for uriksan niyachchbata," Bring the trees' Here the final a becomes « by sūt. 12, and then the affix śas is elided ATO'MAHS (3) The e of am, the affix of the accusative singular, 15 clided after words ending in a, as, vachchham pekkhai, for uniksam preksate, He sees 3 tres.' For the anusvāra, SCC IV 1 2 TĀMORŅAH (4) After words ending in 4, né is substituted for to and ām, the affixes of the instrumental singular, and the genitive So the Prik Sanj , of the addition in D noticed in the Var Lect 2 Such is the loterpr. of the MISS. , but of yuli. 69, infra 3 The sigo s is accidentally omitted in the sotra as printed in the texL ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 47 plural: as, vachchhena, vachchhāna, for vriksena, by a tree,' urbşānām, 'of trees.' The e of the former word is caused by sūc. 12; the long vowel of the latter by sūt. II. BHISO HIM (5) bim is substituted for bbis, the affix of the instrumental plural, after words cnding in a: as vachchbebım for vriksais, by trees'. For the insertion of e, see süt. 12. NASERADODUHAYAH (6) Afcer words ending in a, a do du bs are sevcrally substicuted for riass, che affix of the ablative sing.: as, vacbcbbā. vacbcbbado, vocbcbbäds, vacbcbbabs. For the long vowel of the penultimate in the last three forms, see süt. 11; and for the first form, scc sūt. 13. BHYASO HINTO SUNTO (7) After words ending in a, binto and sunto arc substicuted for bbyas, the alix of the ablative plural: as, vacbcbbābinto, vacbcbbāsunto. For the long vowel of the antepenult., chc commentary refers us to the cba, or 'and', in sūc. 12, SSO NASAH (8) After words ending in , ssa is subscituted for ries, the affix of thc genitive sing. : as, vacbcbbassa. $ 4 The MSS write achchhond. rochchhanem 10 differently, the final anunira in these and similar forms being considered optional by Ir 16 $ Dhimaba does not recognise the forms with us rochchhehinto. ochchhesunto. but it seems plain from this very artifice of the che, that such forms are correct.sf. infra, soles v 1., 62. and Lar. P310. Hema-shaadra espressly stres a $DL., Phyesi 13*, with ccm. **hyas ise par alo direto va tharcti, rachetohinto, tochchhehinto, cle and so doci the Prit. Sarvaiy2. For ide dilacece of meaning Hetween the two forms, see Lant 310 hinto U152.. siparcats cui procedit clestas, suno loticat uase rebdica!!!

·48 THE PRAKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARLCHI NEREMMI (9) After words ending in a, e and mmi are substituted for ni, the affix of the locative sing.':; as, Vachchbe, vach. chhammi. For the elision of the final a in vechcbbe, we are referred to sūt. 13. SUPAH SUH (10) After words ending in a, su is substituted for sup, the affix of the loc. plural: as, vachchbesu. For the e, we are referred to sūt. 12. JASSASNASYAMSU DIRGHAH (11) For the final a of these nouns, ā is substituted before the affixes of the nom, and acc. plural, che ablative singular and the genitive plural: as, vachchhā. sobanti, 'the trees are beautiful' [for the elision of jas, see sūt. 2];6 vachchhado, vachcbbadū, vachchhāhi for vksāt (see sūt. 6]; vachcbhāna for vpıkşāņām (sce sūt. 4]. ECHA SUPYANINASOH '(12) e is substituted for this final a, before all the caseaffixes except those of the loc. and gen. (rii and nas);' and from che cba in the rule we conclude that the long vowel also may be used; as vacbcbbe pekkbaba, 'bchold the trees' [for the elision, of sas, see sūt. 2]; vacbcbhens for vriksena (sce süt. 4]: vacbcbbebim [sūt. 5]: vacbcbhess (süt. 10). Buc the long vowel also may be used: as, vacbcbbábento, vachchbāsunto (süt. 7]. Why do wc except the affixes of the loc, and gen. 6 Thc Comm. gives no cz. of the acc plural. It shoold be sachchha. The urual form is Fachchhe ; cf. S. 12.. 7 All the grammatians agree that sup is fers the pratyahara of all the case-aftres (formed from su, the erst afl., Lad the p of sup, the last). and the Prik, Sanj and Prik. Sarvasya refer bither nochchhehinto, etc.; cl. S. 7, notc.

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 49 sing'? Because in vachchbamms (sūt. 9] and vachcbbassat [sūt. 8], the short vowel is retained. KVACHIDNASINYORLOPAH (13) When nasi and ris, the affixes of the abl. and loc. sing., follow, in certain cases the final a of the noun is elided: as, vachchhä (sūt. 6), vachchbe [sūt. 9), (that is, in this form of the abl. we elide the final a of vachchha to avoid the necessity of lengthening it by sūt. 11; and similarly in this form of the loc. we clide it to avoid such a word as vachchhae. In vachcbhädo, etc., and vachchhammı we see the opposite; cf. also vi 61) IDUTOH SASO NO (14) In nouns ending in s and «, no is substituted for sas, the affix of the acc. plucal; as, aggino, vanno, for agnin, 'fires', vāyiin, 'winds'. NASO VĀ (15) In nouns coding in s and 1, no is optionally substituted for nas, the affix of the gen. sing. : as, aggino or aggissa. väuno or vĀussa (for ssa, see sūt. 8). JASASCHA O YOTVAM (16) In these nouns, o is substituted for jas, the affix of the nom. plur., and i and sis for the final s and u. From the usc of the cbe in the sutra we infer that no is also used as as aggio, vino, of aggino, vuno. TA NA (17) In these nouns nå is substituted for ta, the affix of the instrumental sing. 25, aggini, văună well as o 8 Thera in the Comm, which is added in the margin in some MISS to ibe s0l. must only mean here isaasthitas/bh834 (d iii 61 }, le, when o 14 ust. 1 and must ptecede it, but not in the case of no, la 107 ·50 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF YARARUCHI SUBHISSUPSU DIRGHAH (18) When sú, bhes, and sup, the affixes of the nom. sing., instr. plur., and loc. plur. follow, the final 1 ot # of these nouns is exchanged for its long vowel as, aggi, vali, aggibım vāühsm, aggisu, vaiisu. STRIYĀM SASA UDOTAO (19) In feminine nouns, 1 and o are substituted for śas, the affix of the acc plural: as, mālāü, mālão, naīu, naio, vahữu, vahữo. mālāh, ég nrlands', nadīh, 'rivers', vadhūh, 'wives.' (JASO VĀ] (20) In feminine nouns, # and o are optionally substituted for 145, the affıx of the nom. plural, in the alternative chesc follow the rule of nouns in a as mālão, malafi, and also māla (by s. 2) AMI HRASVAH (21) In feminine nouns the final long vowel is shortened before am, thc affıx of the acc. sing Málam, naim, vahum. TANASNĪNĀMIDEDADĀTAH (22) In feminiac nouns, 1, 2, 4, a are substitucd for tā, nas, ni, the affixes of the instr., gen and loc. sing.: as, nsīt, naic, naia mía, any one of wluch four forms represents "by,' 'of' or 'in' a river.' NATO 'DATAU (23) In the case of feminine nouns ending inā, two of the above subscitutions a and 7 do not take place, that is, the legitimate influence of the preceding sutra is here prohibited: as, mālāı, mālāe (not mālās, mālāž.) by;' fof,' or 'in' 'a garland.' 9 for mala, sf Lass. P 307, note 2 and Bochtl Aak. 150 on daamana (Williams'cd p 6, si also p 165,3) as, ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 51 ĀDITAO BAHULAM (24) In feminine words ending in ă, a and i are irregulacly interchanged as the final letter: as, sahamāņā, sahamāņi; haladdā, haladdi; suppanahā, suppaņahi; chhābā, chhālī. Sahamānā, 'enduring'; haridrā, turmeric' [i. 13); Sūrpanakhā, “Rāvana's sister'; chlāyā, “shade' [ii. 18].16 NA NAPUNSAKE (25) The final vowel is not lengthened in the nominative sing. of a neuter noun (in nouns ending in a chere is no rule which would enjoin it; but thosc ending in i and " but for this prohibition, mighc have come within the range of sūt. 18): as, dahim, mahum, havim. dadhi, 'curdled milk'; madhu, 'honcy'; havis, 'ghee' IJJASSASORDIRGASCHA (26) In ncuter nouns, i is substituted for jas and sas, the affixes of the nom. and acc. plural, and the preceding vowel is lengthened: as, vaņāt, dahīi, mahūi.u NĀMANTRANE SAVOTVADIRGHAVINDAVAŇ (27) When the nom. sing. is used in the vocative (this being considered by Sanskrit grammarians as only a modification of the nominative), neither the o of sūt. 1, nor the long 10 The Prik. Sanjiv, explains this sot, thus: 'strilinge sastamonds protipodilad a I ityetou prefyekam Bhavasahi lal Au (loya, doryah, Lasyarp 12): fai, f (yaya, yasyah, sosyam J); clc. The MS. Dhas these I. as Senitives (cf.Var. Lect.) added to those given by the other MSS, Tor Ati, ctc. cf. 1. 6. This cxplanation is much more probable than Bhimaha's. 11 The more common forms are randim, ctes the natal teins added by iv. 16.

·52 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI vowel of sūc. 18, nor the anusvāra of sūt. 30, are allowed: as, le vachchha, O tree', he aggi, 'O fire', hc vāu, 'O wind', he vana, 12 O forest', ho dahi, O curdled milk', he mahu, O honey.' STRIYAMATA ET (28) In the vocatise of feminine nouns, e os substituted for a before the affix sa: as, he māle, O garland.' The Commentator adds thac su is elided by iv. 6, which enjoins the clision of every final consonant (the indicatory vowel of $14 is dropped by Panini, 1. 3, 2, and therefore the s of mäles comes under iv. 6). IDOTOR HRASVAH (29) A finals or a 15 shoctened in the vocarive: as, he na, Oniver', he vahu, ' wife' SORVINDURNAPUNSAKE (30) In neuter nouns, anusvāra is substitued for the affix of che non sing. as, vanam, dahım, mahum RITA ARAH SUPI (31) In words ending in s, āra is substituted for before all case-affixes (the pratyabāra sup). as, bhaccăro, 'a husband', bhattārena, by a husband,' ecc. MĀTURAT (32) Ā 15 substituted for the r of mális, a mnother, and thic word is then declined like ottico feminincs in ā: as, máā, mãam, māāc [sūt. 23]. UR JASSASTĀNASSUPSU VA (33) 14 is optionally substituted for a final , before the affixes 1, 12 C. Pin, vi 1, 69, and Bocht! Comg.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 53 of the nom. and acc. plural, the instr. and gen. singular, and the loc. plural, (that is, in these cases, words ending in become subject to che same rules as those ending originally in u): as, blattuno (s. 14 and 16], blattunā (s. 27), bhattuno [s. 15), and bhartūsu (s. 18]. The forms wich āra substituted for : [by s. 31] are also used: as, bhattārā, bhattāre, bhatcāreņa, etc. PITRBHRĀTRJAMĀTŘNAMARAH (34) In the words pitr, a father', bbrālī, a brother,' jāmātr a son-in-law,' ara is substituted for before the case-affixes (āra is therefore forbidden): as, praram, plateņa; bhāaram, bhāarena, jāmäaram, jāmāyrena. ACHA SAD (35) In these words (puls, etc.) å is substituted for bclore $#*, chc affix of che nom. sing.; and from the che anche sūtra we infer that ara is also used: 35, piā, praro; bhäā, bhāsto, jāmāä, jāmiaro!" ATMANO 'PPANO VA (45) appana is optionally substitused for the word alman. sell': 35, appāno, appă. (For the latter form, see 111. 48). 13 The long list of tiras on rajan hich are inserted bere in tbiec VSS arc omitte in the translation, as there aan te little douts that the forme no rart of the original tcil of Vararuchi. Itey are (eurs in the Solih sira Lair 31, ncte) sa$ the Prik. Sis)but thei! diduse phrascolosy is cry diferent to Varstuchi's vical!

·54
THE PRÄKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI
BRAHMADYA ATMAVAT (47)
The words brahma, etc., are properly declined like
aiman : as,
vanhā, vamhāno, juvā, juvāņo; addhā, addhāņo.
Brahman, 'Brahmā’, yuvan, 'a youth'; adhvan, 'a path.'
Other simular instances are to be determined in conformity
with the examples given."
14 ror some further roles on Declension: see vi, 60-64.

·SECTION THE SIXTH ON PRONOUNS, ETC loc, sing, as, SARVĀDERJASA ETVAM (1) jas, the affix of the nom. plural, becomes e when it follows the class of words called sarvāds as, savvc, je, te, ke, kadare. survc, ‘all', ye, 'who's te, 'they', kc, 'who?', katare, which of two'.1 NEH SSIMMMITTHAH (2) ssim, mmi, itba are substituted for ni, the affix of the when following a pronoun savvassim, savvammi, savvatcha, tarassim, tarammi, iarattha. survasmin, 'in all', itarastin, 'in another'.' IDAMETATKIMYATTADBHYASTA INA VA (3) snā is optionally substituted for the affix of the instr. sing., after sdam, this', clar, 'this', kim, 'what?' yal, "what',taf, 'chat': as, iminā, cdinā, kınā, jina, tinā, of, imena, cdena, hona, jenu, tcha. ĀMA ESIM (4) esim is optionally substituted for om, the affix of the gen. plur, after the above words sdam, etc. 25, imesim or imîna edesim or cdāns, kesim or hāna, jesim or jāna, tosim or tana.' . 1 Yararuchi in this short stech ol froncuas, ccaLncs himself to their fxculiar la flexions and for the most part assumes the rules of Sectv : Imassim (ct söt 15) is used as loc. In in Sat [Will 4.21 3 calm is used in the fem as ells the 236. liais.

·56 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI KIMYATTADBHYO NASA ASAH (5) āsa is optionally substituted for mas, the offix of the gen sing., after the pronouns kom, yat, fat: as, kása or kassa, jāsa or jassa, tāsa or tassa. IDBHYAH SSĀ SE (6) ssă and se are substituted for nas, after the above pronouns, when chey are declined like nouns ending in s (s.6., from feminine roocs of the form ks, ps, tı). as, kissä, kiss, kiā, kie, kia, kı. 'of what woman?', jissa, jise, jīä, jie, jia, jis, of what woman', tissā, , tỉse, cīă, tie, tia til, 'of that woman'. [For the other forms given, sce v 22). NERHIM hom is optionally substituted for me (the affix of the loc. sing.) after kım, yat, tat, as, kahım, kassim, kammı, kartha [cf. v. 2]; jabım, jassim, jamo, jatcha, tahım, tassim, cammi, tattha. AHE IĀ KĀLE (8) Instead of ns in the sense of time [cf. Pán, v. 3,- 15). ühe and tā are optionally Łubstituted after the above proas, kahe, jāhc, tahe, kaia jara, tarā, and also the forms (in ve 7) kahım, cc. kadā, 'when', yadā, 'since', cadā 'then'. TTO DO NASEH (9) Instead of nasi, thic affix of the abl sing, lo and do are substituted alter the above pronouns. as, katro, kado, jatto jado, tatto, tado nouns 4 These refer to the feminine ges sing, sad correspond to the Sans Lasyak, etc See, Lass, p 322, and the Sanksh Sára quoted there It is singular that W adds striyam 15 the Sofra ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA Or VARARUCHI 57 nues. kasmāt, from what?', yasmāt, from which'; tasmāt, from that'. TADA OSCHA (10) Instcad of nass, after the pronoun tat, o is optionally subscituted: as, to, as well as tatlo and rado (the final : is dropped by iv. 6, and thic a is elided before o by iv. 1). NASA SE (11) The option allowed in the preceding sūtra still contisc 15 optionally substituted for the pronoui tat, together with nas, the affix of the gen. sing., in thic alternative, it follows previous rules as, se, tāsa, and tassa [vi. 5]. ĀMĀ SIM (12) sım 15 optionally substituted for the pronoun tas, together with am, the affix of the gen. plur.: thus, instead of tesām and tāsām, we have sım or jāņa, and also (by vi. 4) tesim. KIMAụ KAH (13) ka is substituted for the pronoun kım, when followed by the affixes of declension : as, nom. sing., ko, nom. plur., ke, instr. sing. kena, instr. plur., kebım. IDAMA IMAH (14) Simularly ima is substituted for the pronoun dam; as, smo, ime, imena, imebim SSASSIMORADVA (15) 4 is optionally substituted for dem, 'this', when followed by ssa and ssim, the Praktit affixes of thic gen 5 sc is used in the three genders, Hema ch joins sutras 11, 12 in ont as follows "vedamiadctado uasambbyar scsimau-idam tad stad ity cteşim stbloc nasimbbyám saha yathisankhyam se sio ity Idesan vi bhavatab," with examples . se, asya, tasya, tasyah, etc, sim, esbsm. tcship. tacim, etc ·58 THE PRĀKRTAPRAK ISA OF VARARUCHI and loc. sing. (v. 8, v1, 2] : as, assa or smassa, assim or smessin NERDENA HAH (16) ha is optionally substituted for ni, the loc. sing. affix, together with che da in idam. as, sha In the case of its not being so substituced WC lave (by previous rulcs), Assim, massim, imam mi. ,' NA TTHAH (17) The form ttha is not used as a substitute for no, when It follows dam, and thus sūt. 215 so far restricted from applying to his pronoun. NAPUNSAKE SVA MORIDAMINAMINAMO (18) Instead of sdam in the neuter gender, together with sh and am, the affixes of the nom. and acc. sing., we have the three forms, sdam, inam, and inamo. ETADAH SAVOTVAM VA (19) When the pronoun etad is followed by the nom. sing. affix su, the substitution of o for su (which by v. i is universal) is optional, as, esd or csa, for this. TTO NASEH (20) Instead of nast, the alfix of the abl. sing. when it follows etad, tto is substicuted, the sa being clided by sūt. csa, a ctro. (We have also the regular forms cdādo, cdādu, cdālı,) ctasmāt, from this'. TTOTTHAYOSTALOPAH (21) When the affixes tto (s. 20), and stva (s. 2] follow, the la of etad is dropped: as, 6 Hema-ch also gives inomor ·THE PRAKRTAPRAK ICA OF VARARUCHI 59 etto, from this', ettha, 'in this' (the final d having been dropped by iv. 6]. TADETADOH SAH SĀVANAPUNSAKE (22) s is substituted for the t of tad and etad in the masc. and fem., before s«, che affix of the nom. siag.. as, so puriso, 'this man', sã mahilā, this woman', similarly esa (s. 19), eso, esā. Why do we specify su? Because it does not hold in the nom. plur, ede, te, , or the acc. sing. edam, tam. •Why do we exclude the neuter?' Because we say tam, edam, for tad, etad in the neuter nom. sing. ADASO DO MUH (23) mu is substituted for the da of the pronoun adas, before the case affixes (che final s being already dropped by w. 6), and the word is then declined like a noun ending in l. as, amū puriso, *that man', amū malulã, chat woman', amūo purisā, "chese men', amūo mahılão, tliese women' amum vanam, 'this forest', amūım yanāım, these forests.' HASCHA SAU (24) be also is substituted for the da af adas, before the affix of the nom. sing. : as, aha puriso, sha malilā, aha vanam This ba does not admit o, a or anusvāra, thcrclorc remains the same in the three genders. PADASYA (25) This sūtra will exercise adbıkāra (cf. 1. 1]. The various rules which we shall go through in order, arc to be understood as supplying substitutes for a pade, or word ending with a case-affix, that is, they will not supply substitutes for the case-affixes themselves, nor for a part of the base to shich these may be added, but they are to supply substicutes for the whole word, base and affix together.

·60 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI The adbskāra of this sūtra will extend until a sabda is enjoined (or crude form in contradistinction to a padā) which we shall certify, when it occurs YUSMADASTAM TUMAM (26) The affix su is repeated from s. 24. tam and tumam are substituted for the pada yusmad, 'you', when followed by su, the affix of the nom sing.. as tam, tumam, 'you.' TUMCHAMI (27) For the pada yusmad, when followed by am, the affix of the acc sing.. tum is optionally substituted, and, from the use of cha in the sutra, we conclude that tumam also may be used. as, tum, tumam, 'thec'. TUJJHE TUMHE JASI (28) For the pada yusmad, followed by jas, the affix of the nom. plur., 1973he and tumhe are substituted: as, tube, tombe, 'ye'. VOCHA SASI (29) For the pada yusmad followed by śas, the affix of the acc plur., vo is substituted, and from the cha of the sutra we conclude that empbe and tumhe may also be used. as. vo. fushe, tumhe, 'you'. TANYOS TAY TAE TUMAE TUME (30) For the pada yusmad followed by tā and ni, the affixes of the instr, and loc sing, tas, tae, tumae and iume arc substituted as, las tac, tumac, tume, by chec,'or, NASI TUMOTUHATUJJHATUMHATUMMAH (31) yasmad followed by nas, the affix of the gen sing. the following are substituted. tuba, tupbs, sumba, lumma, 'of chee'. ANI CHA TE DE (32) For the pada yrismad, followed by an,' tlic affix of the 1 This is the afix of the upstr. ilos in ibc terminolosy of the eastern *in thec'. For the pada Ismo, ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 61 instr. sing., and also by nas, the affix of the gen. sing. (which we infer from the use of cha in the sūtra), te and de are substicuted: as, te, de, 'by thee,' and 'of thee'. TUMAI CHA (33) For the pada yuşmad followed by ăn, the affix of the instr. sing., tumāalso is substituted: as, tumās, by thee'. TUJJHEHIM TVMHEHIM TUMMEHIM BHISI (34) For the pada yuşmad followed by bhis, the affix of the instr. plue., these are substituted: tuijbehom, tumbebom, tummehım, by you'. NASAO TATTO TAITTO TUMADO TUMĀDU TVMAHI (35) For the pada yaşmad, followed by nası, the affix of the abl. sing , tatto, etc., are substituted: as, tatto, caitto, Iumādo, tumädu, tumabı, 'from thec'. TUMHAHINTO TUMHASUNTO BHYASI (36) For the pala yusmad followed by bbyas, che affix of clic abl, plur., tumbahinto and tumbasunto are substituted: as, tumbābento, lumbasunto, 'from you'. VO BHE TUJJHANAM TUMHĀNAMĀMI (37) For the pada yusmad followed by am, the affix of the gen. plur., vo, etc. are substituted, as, vo, bhe, tuba. nam, tumbānam, 'of you'. NAU TUMAMMI (38) For the pada yusmed followed by ni, the affx of the loc. sing., tumammi is substituted. as, Tuwmmı, 'in thes.' By sūt. 30, we have also the four forms, ti, be, es mue, tume. see Boebu Pipini, latrod (frachya) school of fladů Grammarians P UL.

·62 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHL as, TUJJHESU TUMHESU SUPI (39) For the padı yuşmad followed by sup, che affix of the loc. plur., tujbesu and tamhess are substicuted: as, Ingbesli, tumbesu, 'in you.' ASMADO HAMAHAAM SAU (40) For the pada asmad, "I', followed by the affix sis, ham, abam, ahaam are subscrtuted, as, ham, aham, ahaam, '1.' AHAMMIRAMICHA (41) For the pada asmad followed by the affix am, ahamm: is substituted, and from the cha of the sūtra we infer that 1€ may also be similarly subscituted for the nom.: chammı, 'I,' or 'Inc.' MAM MAMAM (42) am is repeated from sūt. 41. For the pada asmad, followed by the affix am, mam and mamam are subscicuted : as, mam, mamam, 'me.' AMHE JASSASOH (43) For the pada asmad, followed by the affixes gas and sas, ambe is substituted: as, ambe, 'wc,' or 'us.' NO SASI (44) For the pada asmad followed by the affix sas, substituted: as, ņo, 'us.' ANI ME MAMAI (45) For the pada asmad followed by the affix an [cf. sūt. 32], me and mamai are subscicuced: as, me, mamās, .by nog is me, 8 The MSS (cf.Var. Lect) gencraliy read ne, but as they all have, 1o, in $ 29, it is probably an error ; at the same time it would be well for future editors of the plays to mark whether ne occurs in the MSS All the MSS. of Vataruchi sive no in thegen. plur. (of my emendation of vi. Si be correct), but it is singular that Ilema-ch there gives both me and no.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI 63 NAU CHA MAI MAE (46) For the pada asmad followed by the affix ris, mai and mae are subscituted (and also when followed by the affix an, as we infer from the use of cha in the sūtra): as, mai mae, 'in me,' or 'by me.' AMHEHIM BHISI (47) For the pada asmad followed by the affix bbis, ambehim is substituted: as, ambebim, 'by us.' MATTO MAITTO MAMADO MAMĀDU MAM- ĀHI NASAU (48) For the pada asmad followed by the affix nasi, matto, ccc. are substituted: as, matto, maitto, mamādu, mamābi, from me.' AMHAHINTO AMHASUNTO BHYASI (49) For the pada asmad followed by the affix bbyas, ambabento and ambasunto are substituted: as, ambābınto, ambasunto, from us.' ME MAMA MAHA MAJJHA NASI (50) For the pada asmad followed by the affix rias, me, ecc. are substituted: as, me, mama, maha, mapyba, 'of me.' MAJJHA NO AMHA AMHANAM AMHE ĀMI (51) For the pada asmad, followed by the affix an, maha, etc. are substituted: as, majba,' no, amba, ambānam, amhe, 'of us. MAMAMMI NAU (52) For the pada asmad followed by the affix ni, mamamms is substitued: as, mamammi, 'in me.' From sūcra 46 we have also the forms, mai, mac. 9 Cf. Var. Lect. Hema-chandra's söt. 15," po majha amba ambam ambe ambo ambāna mamāna mabāna majjbāna āmā" amha occurs in Dr. Trithen's ed, of the Mahảyıracharitra p. 28, 12 ·64 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI AMHESU SUPI (53) For the pada asmad followed ky the affix Sup, am besu is substituted: as, ambesus, 'in us.' * DVERDO (54) The adhikära of pada ends here (cf. s. 251. sup must be repeated from the last sūt., but in the sense of the pratyabara (see v. 12, note}, and not as merely confined to the loc. plur. For the word dui, 'two,' do is substituted before the case affixes as, dobim, 'by two,' dosu, 'in two.' TRES TIH (55) For the word tr, 'threc,' before the case-affixes, ts is substituted and the word is then declined like nouns ending in :). 15, tıbım by three', tisu 'in three.'10 TINNI JASSASBHYAM (56) For the word tr, together with the case-affixes jas and šas, tinne is substituted: as, tinns ägada 'three are come'; finni pekkba, .bchold three.' DVERDUVE DONI VĀ (57) For the ward dus, together with the case affixes jas, and śas, dave and dons are substituted. as, duve, dons, wo'; we lrave also the option of using the form do (s. 54). CHATURASCHATTĀRO CHATTĀRI (38) For the word chatut, cogether with the affixes jas and sas, chattáro and chattars are substituired ; chattārs pursā. 'four men', chattāro chattārs pekkba, «behold . as, chattaro four) ESAMAMO NHAM (59) Inscead of om, as tlic gen. plur. affix of these words dui, 10 Cf Vat Lect. The i geems absolutely required by v 18 and Yi.

·THE PRAARTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 65 in 4 fr, chatur, we have the form nbam, as, donbam, 'of two', tinbam 'of three chatunbam,'1 of four.' SESO 'DANTAVAT (60) The rest of the rules for declension are the same as those for words ending Thus the sutra bbsso him, which has been given for words ending 10 4 [cf. v. 5] applies cqually co words ending in s and u, thus we have aggibem, vānbim from agg and vāji, and similarly for feminine words ending in 2, 7, and is as mālabım, nahım, vabibım [v. 19]. In the same way we have aggissa, vaussa as chc gen. sing., and aggido, vando, etc., for the abl. sing., and similarly dobim, izbom (v1. 54, 55], chaubom. NA NINASYOREDĀTAU (61) e and ā are not used as the substitutes of the affixes no and nas: [cf v. 6 and v. 9] in the case of nouns ending # and a as, aggimms, 'in the fire', vāunms, 'in the wind', aggido, agg:du, aggibs, 'from the fire', vasıdo, vāūdu, vājihs, from the wind.' E BHYASI (62) The negative is repeated from the previous sūtra. Ell is not substituted for the final letter of nouns ending in, or 1, when bbyas follows as, aggibinto, aggisunto, 'from the fires', vai binto, vausunto, from the winds.' DVIVACHANASYA BAHUVACHANAM (63) In all affixes, whether for the cases of nouns or the persons of verbs, we must use the plural insccad of the dual, 10 11 Or rather, che inham, the reading of one MS 12 Cf Var Lect E and not a secus the true tcadias because in fact the form with dis only evolved from the sutra y 12 by the aid of the chací v 7, oote), the origiaal forms being no doubt achchhehinto, etc This being pot observed by the copyists bas occasioned the Var. Lect. & S

·66
THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI
elius we must say, vichchbā, 'two trees'; vachchbahım, by
two trees', etc.; and similarly for verbs; as, chitthantı 'tliey
two scand.'
CHATURTHYAH ŞAŞTHI (64)
Instead of the affix of the dative case, we must use that
of the genitive; thus, vambanassa dehi, uamhanāņa debs,
'give to the Brāhmaṇ'; or 'to the Brāhmans.'

·SECTION THE SEVENTH ON CONJUGATION TATIPORIDETAU (1) For ta and tsp (che affixes of the ist person' in the atmane and parasmas pada), and e are mutuilly substituted : padhai, padhae for pathati, pathate, 'he recites,' THASSIPOH SI SE (2) For thās and sip (the affixes of the 2nd person sing. în che atm. and par. pada), se and see are mucually substituas, ted: as, in padhası, padhase for pathası, pathase. ITMIPORMIH (3) For et and msp (che affixes of the 3rd person sing tlıc arm, and par. pada) mi is substituted, and thus padbāmı represents both the Sans, pathame and patbe. NTIHETTHAMOMUMĀ BAHUSU (4) For the conjugational affixes in the plural, nis, ba, steha mo, my, ma are severally substituted. 3s, (1) padhantt, () padhaha, padlutthā, (3) padlîmo, padhamu, padhama. ATA E SE (5) This rule limits what would otherwise be of constant application. Tlie e and se which are subseituted by sütras and 2 are only substituted when they follow a, and not 1 The reader will bear in mind that the Hindo Grammarens follow An inverse order to ours 19 arranging the persons, their first person being our third, etc 2 The apparent con(usion 18 satras 1, 2. (as si properly=sip, not thas, ctc.) sccus jatended to prepare us tor so: 5 ·68 THE PRĀKITAPRAKASA. CE ARAR UCHI otherwise; thus we have ramae, he rejoices,' padhae, 'he recites', ramase, 'thou rejoicest,' padbase, 'thou recitest"; but not boc or bose [ho being the Prākrt for bhit by vill. 1] but only bos, he is', bost, 'thou art.' ASTERLOPAH (6) The root as, 'to be,' is elided when the substitutes [v11. 2] for the affixes thās and sup follow: as, succo si for supto'si, 'chou art asleep.' MIMOMUMĀNĀMADHO HASCHA (7) b is to be used immediately after the m 10 the affixes mi, mo, mi, ma, when they follow the root as, the clision of which still continues to be enjoined from the preceding sūtra. as, gao mlı, gaa mho, gaa mliu, gaa niha for gato'snul, 'I am gone'; gatās surah, 'we are gone.' YAKA TALIJJAO (8) For yak (the affix of the passive) ia and ja are substituted (and the personal affixes subjoined to these): as, padlığai, padhujjai for pathyate, 'ic is recited.' NANTYADVITVE (9) These substicutions for yak do not take place, when the final consonant of the root is doubled: as, luassai, gammai for basyate, 'It is laughed,' gamyate, 'it is gone. By vi. 58, this doubling of the final is optional in the verbs gansa, etc.; tlierefore when the final is noc doubled, sut 8 remains in force, and thus we have gamiai, gamijai. NTAMĀNAU SATRI SĀNACHOH (10) For the parcicipial affixes satrs and sānach, nia and mina are mucually substituted: as, padlianto, padhamāno, 'reciting.'

·THT PRĀLRTAPRAKASA OF VARARU CHI 69 as, ICHA STRIYAM (11) i is substituted (as well as the regular forms from nta and māna), for satri and sānach, when used in the feminine hasaſ, hasantī, hasamānā, smiling' (a woman), vevaī, vevantī, vevamānā, 'trembling DHĀTORBHAVISYATI HIH (12) The syllable he is to be used after the root in the future (and the affixes of che present added to this) as, hoh11, ‘he will be', hohıncı, 'they will be', hasihu, 'he will laugh', hasıhıntı, 'they will laugh'. UTTAME SŠĀ HĀCHA (13) In the 3rd person [cf. note sūt 1} of the future we are to use after the root ssã and ba, and also be (as we infer from the cha in the sūtra): as, hossāmı, hohāmi, hohimi, 'I shall be', hossāmo, hobāmo, hohimo, "we shall be' MINĀ SSAM VĂ (14) In the 3rd person sing. of the future, ssam may optionally be used after the root, superseding the personal affix mo hossam, 'I shall be'. This being optional, we may also use the forms of the preceding sūtra. [MOMUMAIRHISSĀHI STHA'] (15) In the 3rd person plural che future, bissä and brecha may be optionally added afcec the root, instead of any substitute for a plural-affix, superseding mo, mu, or ma. as, hohissā, hohitthā, 'sve shall be', hasthissā, hasihitthā, 'we shall laugh' As this is optional, we may also use the as, previous forms * 3 sūtras 15-22. are only found in part of the MSS, but Hema-ch, and the Prah Sao give then and as several of them are of some value I add Hema-chandra s corresponding rules 4 Hema ch , 165, momumunam fuisså hurlid, and 166, meh ssam ·70 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI {KR-DA-SRU-VACHI-GAMI - RUDI-DRSI-VIDI- ROPANĀM KĀHAM DAHAM SOCHCHHAM VOCH- CHHAM GACHCHHAM ROCHCHHAM DACH- CHHAM VECHCHHAM'] (16) In the 3rd person sing. of the future, instead of the roots kr, etc., kābam, etc. are respectively substituted: as, kāham, 'I will do'; dāham, 'I will give'; sochchham, I will hear'; vochchham, 'I will spcak'; gachchham, .I will go'; cochchham, 'I will weep'; dachchham, I will sce'; vechchham, I will know,' ecc. [SRVADINĀM TRIS YANUŠVĀRAVARJAN HILOPASCHA VĀ] (17) sochchham, ctc. (without the anusvāra) are substituced for śru, etc. in the future, even when the signs of the first, second, or third persons follow; the elision or insertion of hs (sūc. 12) is optional: as, sochchhii, sochchhihii, 'hew ill hear'; sochchhinti, sochchlubinti, they will hear'; sochchhisi, sochchhihisi, 'chou wilt hear'; sochchhitthā, sochchluhitthā, 'ye will hear'; sochchhimi, sochchhihimi, 'I will hear'; sochchhimo, sochchluhimo, sochchhimu, sochchhuhimu, sochchhima, sochchluhima, sochchhıssāmo (sūt. 13], sochichtssāmu, sochchbissāma, 'we will hear'. And similarly vochchiha, etc. [U-SU-MU VIDHYADIŞVEKASMIN'] (18) * Su mu are severally substituted for the proper singular 3 Hema ch , 167, kndo ham, with ex. kähan dahan ; then 168, fruganu-rudi-vidi-drsi-muchi-vacki-chkids-bhıdı-bhujām sockham gachlamı rochhom vechham, etc. The Sanskrit Grammarians frequently add an to a verbal root, 10 order to declipe it in their sūtras passini 6 Hema cb. 169, sochhadaya yadrçu (explained in Comm by bhavis) ad-ādeseşu), hulukcha vá. 7 Hema-ch. 170, dusumu vidyadışvekasminstrayānām, with the ex, hasamu alem, etc.; the Comm. adds du, dakārochchāronam bhāsāntar- See Sect. V121, ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 71 affixes in the sense of command, etc. (cf. Pāņini iii. 3 161 and 162]: as, hasau, 'let him laugh'; hasasu, 'do thou laugh'; hasamu ·lec me laugh.' (NTU-HA-MO BAHUŞUⓇ] (19) ntu ha mo are severally subscituted for the proper plural affixes in the sense of command, etc.: as, hasantu, 'let them laugh'; hasaha, 'laugh ye'; hasāmo, let us laugh'. (VARTAMÂNABHAVISYADANADYATANAYOR- JJAJJA VẤP] (20) 18 and 17 are optionally substituted for the proper affixes of the present and the definite future, and also when command, etc. are implied; there being on option, the previous forms may be retained. Thus we have in the present hopja, bojā, or boi, he is' [cf. vii. a}; baseja, hasejjā, or hasai, ‘he laughs'; (and the same form applies to the three persons in both numbers;) in the future boja, bojā, or hobis, etc., 'he will be'; and similarly in the sense of che imperative. [MADHYE CHA") (21) ija and 1jā are also optionally inserted between the root $ ārtham. S 171, sor hir va is new, as is 172, ata jasvijjahujjeluko vā, with Comm., alarātparasya sos sthāneljasu'ahi' 'eyete lucha adesa rā bbavant 8 This is Hema-ch , 173. 9 Hema ch 174, vartamānābhasiyyantyofchatyaza và For Comm , of text notes, Cb VII sut 20-23 infra, also cf. ibid for the ober interpr. in the MSS, some of which understand by vidhyādışu, 'the imperative and other teases,, Hema-ch notices the varianon cf. var. lect , P 65) but gives as above, which agrees with Pan , 111, 3.161, 162. 10 Hema.ch 175, Madhye cha svarāntad 101. svarānrad dharok prakrti-prary arayor madhye, chalarât pran ay anām cha sshane, ja jd 1a bla atah sartamanabhavis) antyor sıdhyadışu chal Tbc ex of the ·72 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHO and the affixes in the present, the definite future and the imperative: as, (Present) hoja, hojjāi; (future) hojjahii, hojjāhii; (imperative) hojjau, hojjāu. [NĀNEKĀCHAH] (22) jja and 1jā, however, are not thus inserted between the root ends in a vowel (and is therefore „monosyllabic [ckach], since a coat which ends in a consonant becomes dissyllabic by the addition of the anubandha): as, hasaï from hasa, 'to smile'; cuvarai trom cvara, 'to hasten.' But this does not preclude their being employed as finals (by s. 20); as, hasejja, -jjā; tuvarejja, -ijā, etc. IA BHOTE (23) iali is substituted for the affix after a root in a past tenise : as, huvia, lasia for abhavat, he was,' aliasat, 'he laughed'. EKĀCHO HIA (24) hia is substituted for the affix after a monosyllabic root in a past tense: as, bohia for abliūt, he was.' future are hojjal, lojjahı, hoja, hoja, pakse hohur, which I have supplied above, as all Vararuchi's MSS, omit them, except w, which erroneously reads hojjaz like the present Hema-ch also applies the forms to all the persons 11 For sütras 23, 24, cf. Lass last p 354 Some MSS seem to have 1a for ia. but the Sanksh Sāra and Ilema.ch have a The latter's sūtras are as follow, "si hi hia bhūtārthasya lastcad of the affixes of the third and other preterites (adyatanyádis pratyayo bhūtārihas) si hi and hia are substituted , and as the ia of the next rule is restricted to a root ending in a consonant, we infer that this rule applies to onc ending 10 a vowel as, kāsi, kahı, kahtà for akārşıt, ekarot, chakāra from hr."-"yanjanad ja For the affixes of the third and other preterites, after a root ending in a consonant, ia is substituted as, huvia, for abhūt, abharat, babhava, etc," huy being a form for bhi, by vin i.

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OP VARARL CHI 73 ASTERĀSIH (25) ası 15 substituted sor asts in the singular of a past tense: as, as, āsı rãā for asīd tajā, 'there was a king," NICHA EDĀDERATA ĀT (26) e is substrcuted for nicb, the causal affix, and an a in the first syllable of the root becomes ā: as, hārer, hāser for kārayatı, 'he causes to do,' hāsayatı, the causes to laugh.' AVE CHA (27) äve also is substituted for nsch, as well as e karāver. kārāves, hasāvei for kārayatı, 'e causes to do," ksāsayarı, the causes to laugh.'1 AVIH KTAKARMABHAVESU VÃ (28) āvs is optionally substituted for nich, [1] when kta (the affix of the past participle) follows, and [11] when the object and the action are signified (1.6, in the passive voice): as, [i.] karāviam, hasāviam, or kāciam, hāsıam, for kārıta, 'caused to do,' hāsıta, 'caused to laugh'. [11.] karāvijai, hasāvijjar, or bārijjai, hāsijjas, for kärsate, he is caused to do,' hāsyate, he is caused to laugh.' [NAIDĀVE] (29) e indave ire not substituted for neck shea kia follows, passive thius we have only kāram, karā. vism, kānas, kørāvijjal. or in this voice 12 The Pr Sanj adds panashirid sogabheda éderanadésartha ie, this sötra is separated from the precedipg (cf 101 49) because the substitution for the lontial a us pot cdjoined here' Bhimaba allows both forms ·74 THE PRĀKITAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI ATA Ā MIPI VA (30) ā is optionally substituted for the final of a root ending in a, when mıp follows; as, hasāmı or hasami, 'I laugh'. ICHCHA BAHUŞU (31) s is substituted (as well as a) for the final in tlic ISC person plural: as, hasimo, hasāmo, hasimu, liasāmu, ‘we laugh'.18 KTE (32) i is substituted for the final a when kta (the affix of the past participle) follows: as, hasiamm. padhiam for hasitam, 'laughed,' pachitam, *recited'. ECHA KTVATUMUNTAVYABHAVISYATSU (33) When the affixes ktvā, tumun, and tauga follow, and also in the future tense, c is substituted for a; and also se as we infer from the cha of the sūtra: as, hascūna, hasiūna, having laughed'; haseum, hasium, 'to laugh; baseavvam, hasiavvam, (it is) to be laughed'; hasehi, hashit, he will laugh'. LADESE VA (34) is optionally substituted for a final , wherever it is followed by a substitute for 1 1* (or in other words, in any person of any tense); as, haser or brasai, 'he laughs'; hasendi or hasanti, 'they laugh'. 13 This ā seems option al by sût. 30; hence we have such forms as hasamu ; cf. st. 4. 14 Cf. Pân ni 4, 77.

·SECTION THE EIGHTH BHUVO HOHUVAU (1) For the verbal root bbi, 'to be,' bo and buva are substicured: as, hoi, huvaſ, he is', hohti, buvanti, 'they are'. KTE HUH (2) When bbū is followed by kta, che affix of che past participle, bu is substituted: as, huam,been'. PRĀDER BHAVAH (3) When bha follows a preposition, as pra, etc., bhava is substituted: as, pabliavaſ for prablıavatı, “le prevads': sambhavai for sambhavatı, "he is born.' TVARAS TUVARAH (4) For the root tvar (nstvarā) 'to hasten,, tuvara is substituted, as, tuvarai, hc hascens'. KTE TURAH (5) When tvar is followed by the participial affix kia, tuita is substituted; as, curiam [for the s, cf. vol. 32), GHUNO GHOLAH (6) For gbuna (wluch in the dhātupācha or 'glossary of soots,' is arranged with gburns in the sense of rolling') gbola is substituted: as, glolsī, 'he rolls'. 1 Or perbaps huar , f Var Lect ·76 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI NUDO NOLLAH (7) For the root nud (nuda), 'to send', nolla is substituted: as, nollai, 'he sends'; paņollai, 'he drives'." DONO DOMAH (8) For the root da (din), dūma is substituted : as, dūmai, 'he is pained.' PATEH PHALAH (9) For the roof pap (pats, given in tlic dhātupātha with ata, in the sense of 'going'), phala is substitueed: as, phaltam hiaam, 'my heart is gone' (?). PADEH PÄLAH (10) For the root pad (pada); pāla is substituted: as, pālcı, 'he goes'. VŘŞAKŞŞAMRŞAHRŞAMRITO 'RIH (11) art is substituted for the of the roots ursh, etc.: 25, varisaī, 'lt talus'; karisai, 'he drags'; marisaī, 'lic bears patiently', harisaī, 'he is glad'. ĶTO 'RAH (12) ara is substituted when a root ends in r; as, mr. 'to die,' maraī; sp, 'to go', sarai; vị, 'to choose,' varai. KRINAH KUNO VĀ (13) kuna is optionally used for the root kr (dukin): as, kunai or karai, 'he does.' JRBHO JAMBHĀAH (14) For grbh (rbhi), 'to yawn', jambhāa is substituted : as, jambhāaī, 'he yawns.' 2 Others read lona for nolla, and two MSS.insert both rules, but thus only proves that it is an old Var. Lect. In Sect. iv, we have some instances of a similar transposition of the nasal, as āņāla, etc 3 The Prāk Sanj. reads pāțeh phâlah, and restricts it to the casual ·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 77 GRAHERGENHAĦ (15) For grab (graba), 'to seize,' genba is substituted. as, genhaī, 'he seizes.' GHET KTVẶTUMENTAVYESU (16) gbet is substituted for grah, when followed by ktvä, the affix of the indeclinable participle, tumun, that of infinitive, and tavya, that of the future participle: as, ghettuna, “having seized', ghettum, 'to seize", ghettavvam, 'to be seized. KRNAH KA BHUTABHAVISYATOSCHA (17) ka is substituted for the root kr, in the past and the future tenses, and also (as we infer from the cha of the sūtra) when the affixes ktvā, tumun, and tavya follow. as, kahia, he did' {for this, cf. vit 24), kāhui, lie will do', kaūna, laving done', kāum, 'to do', kaavvam, 'to be done'. SMARATERBHARASUMARAU (18) For the root smr, 'to remember,' bhara' and sumara arc substituted: as, Bharai or sumarai, 'he remembers' BHIYO BHAVIHAU (19) For the root bhi (nsbhs), 'to fear,' bha and esha arc substituted bhai or vibai, 'he fears' as, 4 If it be the correct reading in the cxamples, we must read gher or ghett for ghe Cf Var Lect and transl , notes iy 23, and vur, 55 5 Hema ch smarer jora jura bhara bhala ladha vimhara sumara posara pambuhah 6 Bhaain and bhaissadı are found in Sak (Williams') pp 176, 15, 254,1 ·78 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI (JIGHRATEH PĀPĀAO) (20) For the root gbrā, 'to smell,' pā and pāa are substituted: as, pāı or pāai, 'he smels' MLAI VĀVĀAU (21) For the root mlar, 'to wither,' vĀ and vās are substituted 25, as, vāl or vāai, .hc withers TRIPASTHIMPAH (22) For the root trp (trpa, given in the dhārupātha with trimpa in the sense ołóbeing pleased') thımpa is substituted: thimpai, ‘he is pleased.' JNO JĀNAMUNAU (23) For the root na, 'to know,' jāna and muna are substi. tured jānai and munai, 'he knows, JALPERLO MAH (24) m is substituted for the l of the root jalp (galpa). 'CO speak articulately' as, jampai STHADHYAGĀNĀM THĀAJHĀAGAAH (25) For the roots stha, 'to stand,' dbyar, "ro meditate,' gas, 'to sing' (given in the dhātupātha in the list kas, gai, yat in the sense of 'sound'), tbka, zbāa and gās are respectively substituted thāantı “they stand', jhāanti, ‘chey meditate', gāanti, 'they sing' [THAJHĀGĀSCHA VARTAMĀNABHAVISYAD- VIDHYĀDYEKAVACHANESU) (26) For the roots shiba, dbyas, and gas, when followed by the singular affixes of the imperative, the future, and the present, shā, jā, and gã are severally substituted, as well as, ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 79 as the substitutes mentioned in the preceding sūtra (as we infer from the cha in the present one): as, thāi or thaai, he stands', thālı or thahut, he will stand'; thāu or thāau, let him stand'; and similarly jhāi or jhāai, bāhu or phāahsi, jhāu or jhāau, gāt or gaas, gālu or gāahui, gâu or gāāu. [KHADIDHAVYOÙ KHADHAU] (27) For the roots kbad (khādr), 'to eat,' and dhão (dhāvu), "to run,' kha and dha are substituted in the preceding sūtra : as, khāı, 'he eats', khāhi, he will eat', khāu, 'ler him eat', and similarly dhāı, dhāhur, dhāu. GRASERVISAH (28) For the root gras (given in the dhātup. In the list grasu, glasu, in the sense of 'cating') visa is substituted: as, visai, 'he eats.' CHINAS CHINAH (29) For the root cbs (chin), 'to gather', china is substituted: as, chinas, 'he gathers' KRINAH KINAH (30) For the root kri (dikon). 'to buy,' kına is substituted, as, kinai, the buys' VEH KKECHA (31) kke is the substitute for kri, when preceded by the preposition us, and kına also, as we mufer from the cha in thic sūtra vikkei or vikkınai [for the kk, cf. 111. 50]. 'he seils,* UD-DHMA UDDHUMA (32) For the root dbmā, 'to blow,' when preceded by the preposition st, uddbumā is substituted: as, uddhumā. as, ·80 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA or VARARUCHI 25 SRADO DHO DAHAH (33) For tlic root dbi (dudbān), 'to hold,' when preceded by che particle stad, daba is substituted: as, saddahai, he believes'; saddahiam, 'believed.' AVADGAHER VAHAH (34) For the root gāb (gäbū), 'co churn,' crc., when preceded by the propositions ava, vāba is substituted: as, ovāhai or avavāhai, 'he bathes' (cf. iv. 21]. KĀSERVASAH (35) Preceded by ava' is continued from the foregoing sūtra. For the root kās (kāsy), 'to cough', when preceded by ava, vasa is substituted: ovāsaī or avavāsaī, 'lie coughs.' NIRO MĀNO MĀŅAH (36) For the root mä (mär), 'to measure,' when preceded by che preposition nit, māna is substituted: as, nimmāņai, 'he makes.' KSHIYO JHIJJAA (37) For the root kşı, 'to destroy,' zhsija is substituted : as, jlujaī, the destroys.' BHIDICHHIDORANTYASYA NDAH (38) For the final of the roots bhed (bhidsr), 'to break,' and chhod (chhador) 'to cut', nda is substituted: as, blundai, 'he breaks', chhind3ī, he cuts.' KVATHERDHAH (39) For the final of the root kuath (kvatha), 'co boil,' dha 15 substituted: as, kadhai, 'he boils.' VESHTESCHA (40) dba is also substituted for the final of the root vest (uesta), to surround': as, veddhal, 'he surrounds, This and the preceding sūtra, 3 ·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKĀŠA OF VARARUCHI 81 on which might otherwise have been united, are separated account of the latter of the two. (s. 40); which enjoins a -substiçute for a final conjunct instead of a single consonant, and therefore comes within the range of Secc. iii. 5!,!! UTSAMORLAH (41) For the final of the vest, la is substituted, when it is preceded by the prepositions ut and sam: 25, uyvellai, samvellai. RUDER VAH (42) For the final of the root rud (ruder), 'to weep,' va is substituted: as, suvai, 'he weeps. UDO VIJAĦ (43) For the final of the mot vij, preceded by si, va is substituted: as, uvvivai, 'he trembles.' VRDHERDHAH (44) For the final of the root ordb (urdhu), 'ro increase,' dba is substitued: as, vaddhaī, the incrcases." HANTERMMAH (45) mma is substituted for the final of the root ban. (bana), "to strike': as, hammaî, he strikes.' RUŞĀDINAM DIRGHATA (46) In the roots rusb, ccc. the vowel is lenigchend: as, rūsai, túsaī, sūsai, for rusyalı, 'lie is angry'. tusyati, 'he is pleased', susyatı, 'he dries." 7 None of the MSS write the er with ddh, but that given above secos the natural coplanation of the jagavibhaga uttararthak. The Pril. Sao i$ corrupt bere, but secais to allow a second fordelthal (by til. 10), 1 giVES RO copl of yogan bhaga, cls, and this would have rather required nity driha (d 11. 49). 6 ·82 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI CHCHO VRAJANRITYOH (47) chcha is substituted for the final of the roots vraj (uraja), "to go,' and not (niti), to dance': as, vachchaí, 'he goes'; nachchai, the dances." YUDHIBUDHYORJHAH (48) jba is substituted for the final of the coats yudh, 'co fight,' and budb, 'ro know:' as, jujjhaī, hc fights,' vujjhaî, he knows.' RUDHER NDHAMBHAO (49) ndha and mbba are substituted for the final of rudh (rudhor), "to hinder:' as, rundhai, rumbhaï, he hinders.' MRDO LAH (50) la is substituted for the final of the roor mid (mida), 'co grind:' as, malai, he grinds.', SADLRPATYORDAH (51) da is substituted for the final of the roots sad (sadlr), 'to decay,' and pat (patly), 'to fall:' as, sadai, 'he decays;' padaſ, the falls.' SAKADINĀM DVITVAM (52) The final of the roots bak (saklr), ctto, is doubled: as, sakka1,9 laggan, for saknoti, 'he is able," lagati, he adlicrcs. SPHUȚICHALYORVĀ (53) The final of the roots spbug (sphuţa), 'co blossom,' and chal (chala), 'to tremble,' is optionally doubled: as, phutçaī or phudai (the ț. when it is not doubled, becoming d by il. 20); challai or chalaï, 8 Nachchanan = norlanam, Sak. (Williams"), p. 165, 1. 9 cf. sakkanom:=falnomı; Sak. (Williams'). p. 108, 2.

·THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA or VARARUCHI 83 PRĀDER MĪLAH* (54) The final of the root mil (mila), 'co wink,' is optionally doubled, when it is preceded by the preposicions pra, etc.: as, pamillai, pamilaī.10 BHUJĀDINĀM KTVĀTUMUNTAVYEŞU LOPAH (55) The finals of the roots bbuj, etc., are elided, when the affixes ktuā, tumun, and tavya follow: thus from bbu we have Bhottūņa, bhottum, bhottavvam; for bbuktvā, "having eaten,' bhoktum, 'to cat,' bhoktavyam, 'to bc caten.'- Similarly from uid, 'co know,' vertūna, vettum, vestavvam; and from rud, to weep,' cottūņa, rottum, rottavvam.' SRUHUJILODHUVĀM NO 'NTYE HRASVAH (56) Ac the end of the roots štu, 'to hear,' bu, 'to offer,' 16. "to conquer,' li (lūri), 'to cut,' dbi (dbin), 'to shake,' na is to be employed, and the precedeng long vowel is to be shortened: 2s, sunai, lunai, jinai, lunai, dlıunai. BHAVAKARMANORVVASCHA (57) At the end of these roots, when the passive" 15 11 10 Some of the MSS seem to take präder as equal to pra-pūnasya, but of vill. 3. The Prák Sanj agrees with the text, and also gives cxamples with pra aad ut, addicg mlla ih kim, milar 11 If the above te the correct text (and it is also found in the Pr. Sanj ) luna as well as und will be the Prátit equiv for And, cf. ir 23, transl. note. The Pr San) (which alsays bas tunasina) explains the 11 by t 58 12 Karmon=our passive, bhdia is the im persocal fassine of a neuter vcrb.

·84 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI signified, vua is to be employed, but na may also be used, as we infer from the cba in the sûrra : as, suvvai ot sunija [vil. 8), huyvai or hunigiai, or jivval or linijjas, luvvai, or lunițjaï, dhuvvai or dhunijai. stūyate, 'it is heard', hūyate, “it is offered', jiyate, 'it is conquered,' etc. GAMADINẤM DVITVAM VÃ (58) In che case of the roots gama, etc., the final letter is optionally doubled in the passive, (cf. val. 9.). as, gammai, gamijjai, rammaſ, ramijai, hassai, hasijja1 gamyate, 't is goac', ramyate, 't is played'; hasyate, "It is laughed. LIHERLIJIHAH (59) logba is substituted for the root lsh (liha), '60 lick,' in the sense of the passive as, 11jhaï, '1t is liched.' HRKROR HIRAKIRAU (60) For the roots br, and kr bira and kira are scverally substituted in the sense of the passive: as, hirai, 'It is seized', kirai, 'it is done." GRAHER DIRGHO VĀ (61) A long vowel is optionally substituted for the short a in the root grab, in the sense of the passive. as, gāhujjai or galajjal, 'it is seized.' KTENA DINNADAYAH (62) dinna, etc, are used as irregular forms for some participles with the affix kte: thus, dā (dudan), 'to give,' dinna, 'given', rud (rudır), 'to scep,' runnam, 'wept,' tras (trasi) 'to fear,' hittham, alarmed', dah (daha). .co burn,' daddham, burned', ranj (ranjı)'to be attached to,' rattam (?), 'attached to.'

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKISA OF YARARUCHI 85 KHIDERVISURAH13 (63) For the root kbid (kbsda), 'to be distressed,' visiira is substituted. as, virahena visūrai vālā, the maiden is distressed by the absence of her beloved.)' KRUDHERJURAH (64) For krudb (krudba), 'to be angry,' jūra is substituted: as, jūrai, he is angry'. CHARCHESCHAMPAH (65) For charch (cbarcba), to study.', champa is substituted as, champaï, 'he studies,' TRASERVAJJAH (66) For tras (trasi), 'ro fear,' vajja is subscicuted: as, vajjaī, 'he fears'. MRJERLUBHASUPAU (67) For mm (mrju), 'to cleatise,' lñbha and supa are subscicuted : 25, as, lubhai or supał, 'he cleanses.' VUTTAKHUPPAO MASJEH (68) For masy (tumasjo) to be immerged,' uutta (?) and kbuppa are substituted vuttai, khuppai, 'ho is itnmerged.' DRSEH PULAANIAKKAAVAKKHĀĻ" (69) For the root drś (drésr), 'to see,' pulaa, nokka, and avakkba are substituted: as, pulaaī, niahkai, avakkhai, 'he sees'. 13 W continues to refer the remaining sutras to the passive but the adbikára of sūt. 57 ended, no doubt, at sūt 62. 14 The Prak Sany reads this sut. "Drisch pulaa niachchha anaklhasachcharah," tbc Sanksh Sara has a sutra, given by Delius (Rad ·86 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI SAKESTARAVAATIRAH (70) For the’root sak (saklı) 'to be able tara, vas, and tira are substituted: as, tarai, vaai. tīrai, 'he is able.' SEȘĀŅAMADANTATĀ (71) The anubandhas of the remaining roots are clided, and the roots themselves considered as ending in short a: tlus, bhram (bharamu), 'to wander,' bhamai, 'he wanders'; chub (chubi), 'to kiss,, chumvaï, "he kisses'. Prāk) "Drśeh pulaa-[Cod - naa] - Machchhe - ayakkha-[Cod - jha)- sachchavo-pekkhāh," so that no doubt we should correct Vararuchi's niakka to niachchha, which is probably meant 10 the ex. of v. 2 [cf. P. 46). In the 'Mahāvīra-charita' (Trithen's ed) we twice find the form puloa (p 99, 3; puloanto chitthadı, p. 100, 10, asoavanıāsammuham puloedi] which is the only form I have met with like pulaa in the plays. Hema-ch gives the forms niachchha, pechchha, avayachchha, avayajha, vajja, sachchava, dekkha, oakkha, avaklha, avaaklha, puloa, pulaa, nid, avaāsa, pasa.

·SECTION THE NINTH NIPATAÐI (1) This section will treat of particles (nipātā”), following the method of the Sanskrit grammarians. HUM DANAPRCHCHHANIRDHARANEȘU () hum a particle used in the sense of giving, asking, or speaking emphatically: as, bum genha appano jiam, 'go take your lifc': 'hum sāhusu sabbhāvam, 'wish good to the good"(?); hum huvasu tunhikko, 'come, be quiec,' VIA VEA AVADHĀRANE (3) via and vea are used in the sense of asseveration: as, cvam via, evam vea, 'so, certainly." O SOCHANĀPASCHATTĀPAVIKALPEŞU (4) o is used in the sense of indication, remorse and indeci. sion; for examples the Comment, refers us to the gårbāh, of poems, written in Prākļi." IRAKIRAKILĀ ANISCHITAKHYANE (5) ira, kira, and kila are used in doubtful assertion; as, pekkha ica tena hado, 'sce, he was possibly killed by him. 1 As this Section treats only of interjections,ctc, I have col traoslated all the examples in full. 2 Sce Lass. App. p. 189. 3 The Prákft of these first nige Sections [ Lassca's 'Dialectus Præcipua') 15 sxcultarly the poetic dialect. It is called the Måhårstri ID 213.32. The Sauraseal 1s the form employed in prose.

·88 THE PRĀKNTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI HUM KKHU NISCHAYAVITARKASAMBHAVA- NEȘU (6) berm and kkbu are used in the sense of resolution, doubt, or reflection; as, hum rakkhaso, "What! is it a Räksasa?' NAVARAH KEVALE (7) navara is used in the sense of 'only' : as, navara- annam, 'Only boiled rice.' ANAMTARYE NAVARI (8) navari is used in the sense of immediate sequence, then.' KINO PRASNE (9) kino is used in the sense of a question: as, kino duvvasi, Why are you agitated?' AVVO DUHKHASUCHANASAMBHAVANESU (10) avvo is used in the sense of distress, indication, or reflection: as, avva kajjalarasaranjichim.. achchhīhim, "Alas! (I am undone) by those eyes tinged with collyrium,' etc. ALAHI NIVARANE (11) alāhs is used in the sense of opposition: as, alābı kalahalėsena, 'Enough of this petty quarcelling.' AI VALE SAMBHĀŞANE (12) ai and vale are used in the sense of addressing a person: as, ai mūlam pasūsai, 'Is the root dried up?' vale kim kalesi avale, "Come inaden, what are you thinking of?' 4 Perhaps this should be nayaram ; cf. Ratnāvali p. 26, 12, 'saranam havaram ekam.' Cf. Lenz. Uryaśī, App, p. 15.

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA or VARARUCHI 89 NAVI VAIPARITYE (1) naus is used in the sense of contrariety: as, navi taha pahasaī vālā, 'Not caen the maiden smiles." SU KUTSAYAM (14) si is used in the sense of censure. as, sú sivino, Sleep) for shame!' RE ARE HIRE SAMBHAȘANARATIKALAHĀKS- HEPESU (15) TC, are, and bire arc used in the sense of addressing a a person, or of delight, or quarrelling: as, re mā karchi, Ohi do not do it!' etc. MMIVAVIĀ IVĀRTHE (16) mmiva, msva, and usa are used in the sense of 1.4, like': as, gaanam mmiva, (miva, or via,) hasanam, 'Black like the sky.' (AJJA AMANTRANE] (17) ajja is used in the sense of courteous address :/ as, apa malānuhäva him haress. What are thou doing, oh illustrious one?' SESAH SANSKRTAT (18) The remainder (se, all that has not been treated of]. whether rules for letters. genders, add bite derivatives, composition, or affixes, etc., must be learned from the Sunshst granimar (as Präkst assumes this as its basis). they are omitted here fron feit of stelling the treatise beyond tes proper size. 3 moricain, roeren.' Intdws, Laits J. de 115S cerlaing It by N13171c sense el perteik er torta lo me. 41,71 Thir 36 it cou* fusios els fets fou WISS la inte ·SECTION THE TENTH PAISĀCHI (1) The parśāchi is the dialect of the pišāchas,' or 'goblins,' which (like the oclier dialects) is cxplained in chis section by definitions and examples. PRAKRTIỊ SAURASENI (2) The original of thus dialect [s.co, that which forms che base on which its peculiarities are engrafted) is the sauraseni for che Präkrit dialece peculiar to prose; cf. xii. 1). VARGĀNAM TRIIYACHATURŞAYORAYJORA- NĀDYORADYAU (3) Instead of the third and fourth letters of cach class, when single and non-inicial, we must use the first and second respectively (s.c., k for g, and kb for gb; ch for 1, and chb for zh, etc.]: as, gakanam, mekho, tāclā michchharo," ctc. gaganam, the sky', meghiah, 'a cloud'; rājā, sa king': nirjharaḥ, 'a cascade, etc, IVASYA PIVAH (4) 'like': kamalam piva mukliam, .A face like a locus.' piva is used for as, 1 I know of no instances of this dialect in any of the plays; the tākşasas who are introduced in the Venisamhârg speak a kind of arddha-magadhı ( sf Lass p. 411], without the two peculiar features of the patsácbı, the deatal nasal, and the substitution of hard for soft consonants 2 This is not a good ex, as it should be a single letter. I omit be temaioing examples, ·THE PRÄKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI 91 NO NAĦ (5) n is used for n: as, taluni for taruni, 'a girl.' STASYA SATAH (6) sata is used for ste: as, kasacam mama vartai, 'l it my sorrow,' SNASYA SANAH (7) sana is used for sna: as, sanānam for snānam, 'backung.' RYASYA RIAH (8) Tla is used for rya: as, bhārtā for bhāryā, 'a wife.' INASYA NJAH (9) ñj is used for jñ: as, viñjūco, for vijñāta, 'known.' KANYAYAM NYASYA (10) ng is substituted for my in the word kanya, 'a girl': as, hanjā. JJA CHCHA (11) cbch is used for the it. which in the Saūrasenı dialect 18 substituted for ry (of in 17] kachcham for häryam, 'to be done.' RAJNO RACHI TANASINASNISU VA (12) ricbi is optionally used for raisnt, 's kin,,' before tloc case a fixes of the instr., abl., sen , and loc. singular 31, inir, ridina or rangi, abland gen riclino or 18j. lax., sieluni os 10711 •Why do me scaly zb-se casng? Because we luare in nom. sing, ricta, 16. tir;.ri.lindmy, and acc. flur ranjo by stran 3. 9. as,

·92
THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI
KTVASTONAM (13)
tinam is used for ktva, the affix of the indecl. past
participle: as,
dāvūnam for datyā, 'having given,' etc.
HRDAYASYA HITAAKAŅ (14)
hitsaka is used for the word bțdaya, 'the heart': as,
hitaakam harasi me taluni, Maiden, thou ravishest
my heart.'

·SECTION THE ELEVENTH MĀGADHI (-). The Māgadhi is the dialect of the Māgadhas, and ic is here explained by definitions and examples. PRAKRTIH SAORASENI (3) The original of this dialect is the Saurascní. SHASOH SAH (3) ś is subscituted for ş and s: 35, māsc, vilāse, for māsah, 'a bean,' and vilāsah, *coquetry" (for the final e, cf. s. 10). JO YAH (4) y is substituted for j: 15, yāyade for jāyatc, "he is born.' [For the d, cf. xii. 3.) CHAVARGSYA SPRSTATA: TATHOCHCHA- RANAH (5) The palatal letters are pronounced with but a very sligkit contact of the congue with the roof of the mouth (*spris!ata) . 1 This sätra is very unintelligible as it stands in the MSS with srastard, and Lassen's conjecture of assafata doci not seen satisfactory, the above is merely siven as a con,cctural emendation The athyantera.prayants, or internal clort is the utterance of the palarata i prorsily srrista, tecause the crsies of ufteracce are in certact', but in that of the semi-vowels (of which y certainerds to the ralatalı) it isat irrits, tocauic Icic they dut slights touch, **5 1 sure to be meant by the Sarti Sira . "- *aun ma-29-18.11. Asta properly refers to Er veral, tuicy tert perhari mean timply list 5771fa ta ary cast. 'c ru'c **** 1. icles to risttict of red wa522'127 the ri'z'alt182) 1:3 tk. feedle 1200. et ftult the airltatetasarit lor.11-11 let's 1.9. Intust the interest Pi111 1«! Lan ·94 THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI ta HRDAYASYA HADAKKAH (6) hadakka is substituted for brdaya, 'the heart': as, hadakke ālale mama, 'respect in my heart'. (?) RYARJAYORYYAH (7) yy is substituted for ry and rj: as, kayye, duyyane for kāryan, 'to be done,' durjanah, 'wicked.' KȘASYA SKAH (8) sk is substituted fr ks: as, laskaśe, daske for rākşasah mon,' dakşah, 'clever'. ASMADAH SAU HAKE HAGE AHAKE (9) For asmad, I', followed by the nom. affix su, hake, bage and abake are substituted : as, hake, hage, or ahake bhaņāmi, 'I speak.' ATA IDETAU LUKCHA (10) s! is continued from sūt. 9. When su follows a noun ending in a, i and e are substituted; elision of the affix is also optionally allowed : as, eś läā, ese pulise, cśa for cșa rājā, “this king,' eșa purusalı, 'this man.' KTĀNTĀDUSCHA (11) # is substituted when the affix su follows a word ending with the affix ked, and also (as we infer from the cha of the sūl.) we may optionally use the : or e of the preceding sūt., or even elide the affix: as, hasidu or haśıdı, haside, haśida, for hasicah, 'smiling.' NASO HO VĀ DIRGHATVAMCHA (12) ba is optionally substituted for rias, the affix of the gen. sing., and at the same time the preceding vowel is lengthened: as, puliśäha or puliśaśća dhane for puruşasya dhanam, the man's wealth.'

·THE PRĀKRTAPRAKASA OF YARARUCHI 95 ADIRGHAS SAMBUDDHAỦ (13) When the affix su follaws 2 noun ending in a, in che sense of the vocative, the a is lengthened; as, pultsā āgachchhha, “Approach, oh man.'-Why do we say in the sense of the vocative?' Comparc Vamhanaśía dhane, 'che brāhman's wealth.' CHITTHASYA CHIȘTHAH (14) Chatha is the Māgadhi substitution for chrşba, the Saürasont form of sbțba, 'to stand: as, puliśe chisthade, che mm scands.' KRINMẶNGAMAM KTASYA DAH (15) da is substituted for the affix kta in the verbs kr (alsıkın). 'to do,' my (miri). 'to dic,'gam (gamis). 'to go': 3, hade, made, gade for houcah,, donc'; nritah, dead': gatah, 'gone." KTVO DĀNIĶ (16) dani is substituted for the affıx kova: 15. saludāni gade, after liaving bornc it, he sent'; haridini Jade, after braving done it, he came.' SRGALASYA SIALASIALESIALAKAŅ (17) for śrgils, 'a jachal,' we liave these three substitutes: siālā, sāle, śrālake. As thc Migadai dialect is of considerable interest. I tave ade the followios atridgcocot of items cbaouras corrcirondiss ouat And immediately follow those on the suraxal C1. AFP C cia eta pari masathisho Yar ai 10) 05. Toer 1819 (st War IL } Str 1 grle, 3d Comm. Cerato Schuir (c. 1* COCI, CIT; ! ia tecid gelma (1. scrolling the rule copes to beat.5.1.1) 11, %: I. 4:31:a. att). More ·ex 96 THE PRĀKILTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 200. thastha oh sah ‘The cerebral † joined to the dental s, 18 used for fi apd shih as, bhasta for bhatja, laste for Lasthiam, fustu for susthu"? 291. stharthayoh stah, with uvastide (upasthia), astav ail {artharatı ?) [The writing of rtha in the MSS. is doubtful ] 292. jad; ayam salt. 'y is substituted for, and dy and an initial y does not becomc/(cf. Var, 11 31): as, jānādi, viyya, etc. 293. nya nya-ja-fijām njah. 294. vrajer lah, with ex. raſadı=vrajall, 'he goes'. 295 chhasya Scho 'nādai, with ex. gafcha (sachchha), pūschadı [prchchhani). 296 ksasya shah [cf. Var. xi. 8, the ska is here written with tha nhvamaliya) 297. skah prekşāchaksoh [thus she is not written with the hå. mūliya); with ex. peskadı=preksate, and achashadı = achalsale. 298. Insthas clusthah, with ex chishthadi (cf. Var. x1 14) 299. avarnad ya naso dahahIcf. Var xı 12) 300 amo daha vā, with ex sayanahd or śayanānan. 301. aham-vayamor hage (cf. Var x1.91 302. Segam saurasenivar (cf. Var. X1. 2]. 2 This remarkable sutra 13 borne out oy the MSS of the Miſichchhan katika (cf. Stenzler, preface ), which however have the palatal sibilant, but 10 Prinsep 8 Giraar Inscription [Bengal As Soc Journal, yol vii. p 278] we find the deatal as above 3 One MS has sta for stha 4 This d 13 merely an 'ir' or grammatical technicality, and is added to an allix, to imply that the word which is to receive the affix must drop its final vowel and any consonant which may follow it, cf. Panini, V1, 4, 143 Vararuclit bever uses this $180 ·SECTION THE TWELFTH [The twelfth Section treats of the Sauraseni dialect, or that modification of the Māhācāsţrī for Prākṣit properly so called), which iš úsually found in the prose passages of the dramas. In consequence of the loss of Bliāmaha's commentary on this Section, many of Vararuchi's Sūtras are obscure and corrupt; Hema-chandra's corresponding rules are given in Appendix C, but even these leave many difficulçics unexplained. I have not attempted a translation of this Seccion, but have contented myself with adding few cxplanatory notes; cf. Lass. App., pp. 49-58.] 2 (3) This is clearly explained in Hema-ch, 260, 267. (4) Tavado=vyāpriah. (5) pudo or puddah=putrah. (6) siddho = grdhrah, (8) The Mābārāştri forms, by ni. 5, arc savvalio, etc., while the prose forms by this sūt. are savvanno, etc. (9) ia is the proper prose form of the indecl. part. ; cf. Hema-ch.271. (10) kadua, gadua- lila, gatva, cf. Hema-ch. 272. (11) This allows such a form as sanant for the neuter nom. ot acc. plural, as well as the Mābár vandi (v. 26). (12) Cf. Hema-ch. 269, (13) bhavissadi, hai issadı, huvissadi ate the common prosc forms of the futurc of bhu, got the contracted forms hossam, homimi, etc. (14) de is used for the root då as dedi-dadan; but dansam=ful dasyami. 115) kirpiutustuen hikinwri.."), 'n manat 10 versc. (36) Chiffhauskha, as chiffhadi (cf. vi. 63, xi. 14). (17) Sumara is the prosc form for smr: the other form in vui. 18 is poctical (18) C/. v 14, Var. Lect (19-20). These are conjecturat. * Achchhe is used in frosc for the root as, to be!' is, ochchh&mi=esmi." Lanco (p. 3) quotes from 10c Szolnb. Sira a:hchhal, echchhonti, eitcatarrha or echchketa. 7 ·98 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI "anthi is used in prose for the root as, 'to be, with the personal affix tip ie, asti (21) This is conjectural, cf Lass App, 56, and Sanks Sara, 15 If correct it would imply that ssant is optionally substituted for the affix of the first (third person sing of the future and also that the previous vowel may be lengthened as Karssam or karısam, for karışyăm7 (22) ittht is the prose form for stri, 'a woman' (25) This allows the form vaam, 'we, as well as the amhe of vi 43 (26) f we adopt Lassen s first conjecture neh ssitthau this will refer to vi 2, and prohtbit the locative form in mm from being used in prose As the form in him (as, tahim, etc ) is also found 10 prose, Lassed proposes a second conject, neh ssi hutt hah , but as thus rule only refers to vi 2 and him would still remain by virtue of vi 7, reh ssuthau is DO doubt the true reading (27) The armanepada affixes are not used in prose, cf, Lass p 380 (28) This sut is corrupt, but seems to imply that e may be used before any personal affix, as in the Mahar by vir 34 (29) This scems to imply that e may be used for the first person of the imperative or potential (cf Lass App ] as bhave for bhaveyam but this is very doubtful The cha would imply that the common form [v11 18 2) may be also used (30) Cf 11 18 (31) 1f Lassen s conjecture is correct the forms of a 35 are not used in prose (32) This sut is important as fixing the name of the principal Prakſi dialect with which the Sauraseni so nearly agrees All the rules therefore of Sections 1--1x equally apply to the prose or the poetical Prakrt with the exception of the points mentioned 19 this Section ·APPENDIX ·APPENDIX A [The Ms. W contains many sutras, which are not found in any other; some seem to be taken from Hema-chandra or the Prākſta Sanjivani, but others it is not casy to trace to their source. Those which have already been given in the notes (as in p. 15, note 49. etc.) will not be repeated hero. None of those which follow can have any claim to be considered as Vacaruchi's and many indeed at once betray a spurious origin. ॥ स्मरस्मेरयोर्मश्च ॥ अनयोर्मस्य लोपः स्यात् ॥ सरो सेरो। चकाराद् घसरादो लोपः। घसरो इत्यादि ॥१॥ ॥र्धग्धयोष्ठः॥ ग्ध इत्येतयोः स्थाने टकारादेशः स्यात् ।। घट्टर' विअट्टो। वर्धते विदग्ध । इत्यादि ॥२॥ ।। संयोगपूर्वो हसः ॥ सर्वत्र संयोगपूर्वो हस्खो भवति ॥ किती। णियाती। पत्थि। कीर्ति। निष्कांत । नास्ति इत्यादि ।।३।। ॥ दीर्धादिषु या ॥ दीर्घादिपु' शब्देष्यादी हलो या स्यात् ।। दिग्धो दीदो। यदो यादो॥ दीर्घ बाध इत्यादि ॥४॥ ॥ इम स्यपश्च ॥ ल्यप् प्रत्ययय हम आदेशः स्यात् चकारात् का-प्रत्ययस्यापि ॥ यिदसिम पदिय । सुमरिम फरिम ॥५॥ . This is added after in. 6. Alter fil. 9. 3 Here and often elsewhere W has a double as tests, which I have corrected. 4 Tus and the next, altern . 5 Cr.n55. O This and the next, alicr ir. 23; bosh belong to Sect. III, ·102 THE PRIKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI ॥ को ऽपि दुअ॥ क्ताप्रत्ययस्यापि दुअ आदेशो भवति । गदुअ कदुब।।३॥ ॥ भवद्भगवतोरात्व"॥ भवद्भगवच्छन्दयोरात्वं विधीयते ॥ भवा भअवा कुणइ । संयोधने। हे भवं हे भव ॥ ७ ॥ ॥ जस्शष्टां दा ॥ एपां दा स्यात् ॥ भवदा ॥ भवंतः । भवतः। भवता ।।८॥ ।। उस्डस्योदर्दो ॥ भवदो एयदो। एवं भगवत् ॥९॥ ॥ एवं सप्वताधिकारादेशेषु ॥ अफारादीनां परे अताधिकारादेशा भवंति ॥ अग्गिस्स वाउस्स । अग्गीदो वाऊदो। अग्गिम्मि वाउम्मि ॥१०॥ ॥ तत्समास्ते येपु न विकार.'। उक्तलक्षणघशाद्येपुयेपु विकारो न दृश्यते ते ते शब्दाः प्राकृतसमा चोद्धव्याः। यथा पुरंदर इत्यादि ।॥ ११ ॥ ॥ ल्यप् कारे हीअ॥ भूते काले ल्यप्पत्यस्य हीअ इत्यादेशो भवति। होही । पढहोस । हसहीअ॥ भूय । पाठ्य ।। हस्य॥१२॥ ॥ हेहिमा"॥ हि तापे । सस्य धातोहिमादेशो भवति । हिमइ ॥ १३॥ ॥ जयतेर्वा जि इत्यस्य वा कारो भवति। जिण जिअइ ।। १४॥ 10 7 This and the two next follow v. 44 8 After v.60. 9 The last sūt in Book vi, a long list of ex, is omitted. After vii. 24 [cf. note to vu 23). this sūt seems unaccountable After vill. 6, This sūt. comes after W's version of vill 56 (hence the na kāra) which in W follows viii, 14; (cf. Var, Lect] II 12 ·APPENDIX A 103 । नोपसर्गस्य ॥ स्मृ इत्येतस्य सोपसर्गस्य भरसुमरौ न स्यातां ॥ विस्सरइ । पस्सरइ । अणुस्सरइ । अहिस्सरह ॥ १५ ॥ ॥ खिदेरविभूरौ"॥ खिद दैन्ये । अस्य जूरविसूरौ भवतः।। जूरइ विसूरइ ॥१६॥ ॥ राजेरेहः ।। राज दीप्तौ। अस्य धातोरेहादेशो भवति । रेहइ ॥१७॥ ॥ इपेमहः ॥ इप इच्चायां ॥ अस्य धातोर्महादेशो भवति । महइ ॥ १८॥ ॥ व्यर्विभः॥ व्यध ताडने। धातोर्विभादेशो भवति । विभइ" ।। १९॥ ॥ अतेश्चरखः॥ अद भक्षणे । अस्य धातोश्चरखादेशो भवति । चरस्पइ ॥२०॥ ॥ दाधाणोडीङामेत्य कर्तरि॥ एपां" फर्तरि एत्व स्यात् ॥ देह घेइ उड्डेइ । ददाति दधाति नयति उड्डीयते ॥ २१ ।। ॥ कथेई ॥ कथ वाफ्यप्रवंधे। अस्य धातोस्थकारस्य हकारो भवति । कहा ॥२२॥ 13 This sūt, follows and restricts vi! 18, the m being elided by t 2. 14 This and the five next sūtras follow yo. 37, W also has visāls un vil. 63, which proves this to be an interpolation, 15 Cod.n- 16 Cod mabita 17 Cod Ubbbbu, whcase Delius coaject, vijjba, 18 Sic Cod. the skb may be an error for kbkb. 19 lomit the recapitulation of the roots. This and the next, after viit. 38. 20 ·104 THE PRAKRTAPRAKISA OF VARARUCHI ॥ कष्टेप्टः ॥ कष्ट विपाके। अस्य धातोरस्यस्य टत्यं भवति। कटइ । कटयति ॥ २३ ॥ ॥ वचवदोश्च ॥ एतयोरंस्यस्य द्वित्वं वा स्यात्। चकारादोत्वं. च॥ वोच्चइ वोचइ। घोल्लइ वोलह ॥ यक्ति वदति। वदो दो ल इति लत्वं ॥ २४ ॥ ॥विकरणानामनियमः। विकरणानां शब्दानामनियमो भवति ॥ होज्जइ । हविज्जइ । हणिज्जइ। हम्मइ । वेत्थइ । धत्थइ । कीरइ ॥ भूयते हृयते हन्यते गृह्यते क्रियते इत्यादि ॥२५॥ ॥ उपमायां विअव्वौ“ ॥ २६ ॥ ॥ इतिशजस्य पदांते त्ति ॥ १७ ॥ ॥ उ क्षेपविस्मयसूचनासु ॥२८॥ ॥ मनागर्थे मण ॥ ३९ ॥ ॥ हे भो आमंत्रणे ॥ ३०॥ ॥ आम् स्वीकृतौ ॥३१॥ ॥ शटितिशब्दे झत्ति ॥ ३२ ॥ 21 22 After vm 53, the Coininentary's cbakara 1s wrong as there is no sur for otvam Cf Il 12 (1) 23 After vu 71 before ajaesa babslam, of Var, Lect, P81 24 This and the next after 1x 3. I omit the Comm and ex as being needless in sutras on nipatah 29 Cf114 26 This ar d the next after ix 8 27 Aftet 1x 13 28 This and the remaining sutras are inserted after 1x 15 (being immediately preceded by the Var Lect,, of sūt 9 qv. an notes) ·APPENDIX A 105 ॥ दाहिणो दक्षिणे वा ॥३३॥ ॥ अप्यर्थे विपी पदांते ॥ ३४ ॥ ॥ तंस तिर्यगर्थे ॥३५॥ ॥ शनैः सणिसं ॥३६॥ ॥ द्वित्थं ब्रीडितभीतयोः ॥ ३७॥ ॥ हत्तपराहत्तावभिमुखपरामु खयोः ॥ ३८ ॥ ॥ वाहिरै बहिः ॥ ३९॥ ॥ उण पुनः॥४०॥ । अंतो अतरर्थे ॥४१॥ 29 With Comm daksınāsobde dabino nopētyate tikslpena, dabino pavano 30 For this, of vuil. 62, note, the ex. given is bulbam darsbütte 2m=bbstāsmi drustva rajnem 3. The Pr Sany and Hemaach both allos buite to be used in the sense of abbomukba, df. Affendix B.; W's csis buitim kaam ·APPENDIX B ON PAGE 35. (IV 25.COMM.) The passage enclosed mu brackets is only found in AC and stands in A as follows: कचिदा मतुपोन्तस्य मंतो (altered in a later hand ta -त्वो) त्या दृश्यते कचित् । हणुमंतो। इल्लालावपरे प्रायः शैषिकेषु प्रयुज्यते। पुरोभवं पुरिल्ल । आत्मीयं अणुल्ल । परिमाणे किमादिभ्यो भवंति एवैद्दहादयः । एहहो । फित्तिमं । पचिों। जेत्तिौ। जेद्दहं । तेत्तीअं तेदहं कृत्ये साहः । नमित्यन्ये देशो शब्दः स इप्यते साताहूत्तं। सहसुत्तं। जातो' या स्वार्थिकः कः। जातो स्वार्थ ककारः प्रयोक्तव्यः। C:न्यस्य मत्तो ता 2 Cसालु. 3 Cat and T- in aext line: Chas no other Var Lect. worthy of notice The division of the passage into sūtras (proposed by Lassen, dt. Inst., p. 93) is open to several objections: The silence of the MSS. BDEW; there being no instance of a sūtra, mucli icss of several sūtrās, being found in AC alone, although the other MSs, contain sutras not found in AC. 2. The two MSS. themselves do not seem to give them as sūtcas, as in cvery iastance, if we separate off part as the sūt., dlie Comm, is thereby rendered incomplete. 3. The Passage needs hardly any alteration to run at once into verse, with a ·APPENDIX B the examples interposed between each line, with the exception of the last cwo lines, of which more presently. As printed in the text, I conccive the passage to be quoted by the Scholiast at the end of the Comm. on sūt. 25, for it should be borne in mind that the first three verses still refer to che affix matup, which is the subject of that süt., and the fourth seems only added becausc other Grammarians (styanye ), liad introduced 2 pronominal affix, which the author of the verse mainfalns to be merely a provincialism. The Prāk. Sanj. in the course of its corrupt Comm. on sūt. 25. gives appullam and punillam (explaining the former by åtmiyam, and the latter by purobbavam paura styam) and then adds Bhavetlām (sic) matupo 'ney asya akārastu tatba kuachst, hanumā banumanto, sankbyāyā) krivaso buttam abbrmukhye 'pis drsyste; pancbabuttem, pana cbakstuas, cbbahutlam satkrstuas, saabuttam sasakritvas; peabuttam, priyabbimukham; sstau kimyaltadeladbbyab parımānc iftabas ( iliaddabau?), kettsam, keddabam, kim parimānam asya koyar, jestlam jeddabam, yavat, etc. Thiese to be given as new sūceas, but follow in the course of the Comm. Afte these comes a new sútra. "Svārtbe ko vā, esminarbe prälspadikäs kapratyayo bhavasi vã, bbamar40, bbramare pakse bhamaro," 13th other similar ex. Hema-chandra in a corresponding following sūtras, which may have occasioned the incoduction of the lines in Bhimalia at all. do not appear passage has the 4 This sense of sbhinukba is fire to build by Hems.ch. also, se infra Cl. the spurious sut. of W (Vo 35) App. A ·108 THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OG VARARUCHI ॥ यत्तदेतदो ऽतोरित्तिअ एतल्लुक् च ॥ एम्यः परस्य डावादेरतः परिमाणार्थस्य इत्तिअ इत्यादेशो भवति । एतदो लुक् च । यावत् जित्ति। तावत् तित्ति । एतावत् इत्तिसं। ॥ इदंकिमश्च डेत्तिाडित्तिलडेदहाः । इदंकिंभ्यां यत्तदेतद्भ्यश्च परस्यातोर्डावतोवों (54) डित पत्तिअ इत्तिल पद्दह इत्यादेशा भवंति । एतल्लुम् च । इयत् एत्ति एत्तिलं एहह । कियत् । केत्तिमं कित्तिलं केद्दहं etc. ॥ कृत्यसो हृत्तं ॥ with ex. सअहृत्तं सहस्सहत्तं । कथं प्रियाभि- मुखं पिअहृत्तं । अभिमुखार्थेन हृत्तशब्देन भविष्यति । ॥ आल्विल्लोल्लालवंतमंतेत्तेरमणा मतोः॥ One ex. of manta is hanumanto, of stta (sic) mānartto, mana, dhanamano ; kechın-mādesam apichobbants, banumā. After three unimportant sūtras we have ॥ डिल्लडुल्लौ भवे ॥ भवे ऽर्थे नाम्नः परी इल्ल उल्ल इत्येतौ डितौ प्रत्ययो भवत । पुरिल अप्पुल्ल etc. ॥ स्वार्थे कश्च वा ॥ स्वाथै कश्चकारादिल्लोल्लो डितो प्रत्ययौ घा of tra. gavuiro, of then comes भवरः। Hema-ch, therefore, and the author of the Pr. Sanj. both confirm che corrections wluch I have made in the text, down to p. 36, line 2, the only part which is left uncorrecced being the two succeeding lines. These will not readily run into verse, and certainly bear strong marks of being a sur. and mutilated Comm. The jatan at the commence. ment seems inexplicable, and the absence of any ex. proves that the Comm. is imperfect. Whether we should read it svarthe ko vă, or whether under the jalan there is hid some ·APPENDIX B 109 allusion to Hema-chandra's illollau ditau is doubtful; but as it stands, jātais is almost unintelligible, and certainly is unsupported by either of the Gramm. who are our authoritics for the meaning of the whole passage (Cf. che Schol. quoted by Stenzler, Introd. Mộchchhak., p. vi., .which also partly runs into verse). All the MSS. agree in adding svartbe in the Comm. of sūt. 26, which is a strong argu. ment for a sūtra like this having dropped out here.

·APPENDIX C HEMA-CHANDRA'S CHAPTER ON THE SAURASENI DIALECT [As the twelfth Section of Vararuchi has no Comm. and is therefore in several places corrupt, I have added an abridgement of Hema-cliandra's corresponding rules from the MSS. 200 (a) and 17: (b) in the Walker Collection in the Bodleian. This and the sutras of the Sanksh. Sāra (Lassen App., p. 51) great correcting Vararuchi. The numbers affixed are given from b, which numbers all che sūtras. The Sauraceni Bhāsā cakes up SS. 260—286 of the fourth Pāda.] are of use in asau TO DO 'NĀDAU SAURASENYĀM AYUKTASYA (260) saurasenyām bhāsāyām anādāv apadādau vartamānasya takārasya dakāro bhavati, na ched varnāntarena samyukto bhavatı (Var. XII. 3) ADHAS KVACHIT. (261.) varnāntarasya adho varcamānasya tasya do bhavati, kvichillaksyānusārena , mahando, andeuram. VĀDES TÄVATI. (262.) Wich examples 'dāva,''cīva." Ā AVANTRYE SAU VENO NAH. (263.) Eno nakārasya āmantryc sau pare ākāro vā bliavac: ; blio kanchusā, pakse blio tavasst. (a is optionally substituted in the voc. for the n of words ending in en.) ;

·APPENDIX C 111 ► MO VĀ. (264) ẩmantryc sau nakarasya mo vã bhavat, bho rõam, ccc. BHAVADBHAGAVATOH. (265.) āmantrya iti nivittam ; anayos sau pate nasya mo bhavati, bhavam, etc. (In this and the preceding rule the final m becomes anusvāra ; cf. Var iv. 12 ) VÀ RYY0YYAH. (266 ) tyasya yyo vā bhavalı , ayyautto, pakse apja (cf. Var. 111. 17, X. 11). THO DHAH. (267.) The Comm. adds “apaļādas' (Vas. x1, 3) IHAHACHOR HASYA. (268.) dh is substituted for the b of tha, and the Präkrt suffix of thie ad pers. plur. imperative (which Hema ch, calls bach, cf. Var, vis. 19) as idhia or iha, 'here,' hodhia or hoha, 'beye BHUVO BHAH. (269) The Comm. adds vã with ex. bhodı, hodi , bhuvadı. luvadı , bliavadı, liavadı (Var. XII. 12 ) PORVASYA PURAVAĦ (270.) The Comin. adds va. KTVA LADONAU (271.) Wich ex. bhavsa, bhodúna, havia, hodūna (the MISS. have for 14, but both frequently pricey for s) pakse, bliottā, lactā (Var, xu 9). KRGAMO DADUAH (272) übliyām parasza kesāpratyay asya. die adua ityādeio bhavatı : gadus, ecc. (Var. Xll. 10) DIR ICHECHOH (273) tādinām ady atrayasz' adyasya 'ichicchív 11 vikurss or clicclios schine dir bliznati, cui aliram, dedi, blicdi.

·112
THE PRAKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI
ATO DESCHA. (274.)
akārāt parayor ichechos sthāne deh (chakārād diścha)
bhavari ; gachchhade, gachchhadi ; ata iti kim, nedi,
bhodi.
BHAVISYATI SSIH. (275.)
The Comm. adds •hissāhām apavādah' (cf. Var, vii. 12.
13) with cx. bhavissidi, gachhissidi.
ATO NASER DĀDODADO. (276.)
akārātparasya nases schānc ado ädū ityādeśaū ditaū
bhavataḥ (cf. Sanksh. Sāra, 9; and Lass. App. p. 54).
IDĀNIMO DANIM. (277)
(Cf. Var. xi. 15, Var. Lect.)
TASMAT TĀ, (278.)
·MO 'NTYANNO VEDETOH. (279.)
antyān makārāt para idetos
parayor nakārāgamo vā
bhavatı.
EVARTHE YYEVA. (280.)
HANJE CHETYAHWĀNE. (281.)
(This and the remaining sutras refer to nipātāb.si
HIMANAHE VISMAYANIRVEDE. (282.)
NAM NANVARTHE. (283.)
AMMAHE HARŞE. (285)
SEȘAM PRAKŔTAVAT. (286.)
1
The ex. Siven are
Skire, juttam nimam. juttaminam,
e küre, kim nedam, kimedım, evim nedim, evsmedam.'

·APPENDIX D ON PAGE 32-33 (III. 58) are It has been stated in the little Introduction to Prākļu Grammar prefixed to this work, that Lassen has established the principle that a long vowel is shortened before two consonants; with the two subsidiary rules, (a) if the long vowel be retained, one of the consonants is clided, and (b) a short vowel before two consonants is occasionally lengthened by eliding one of them (cf. Inst. pp. 41-49). There can be no doubt that these continually confirmed by the later Prākſt; but how arc we to account for the fact, that Vararuclii nowhere states them in his sūtras? The MS. W has indeed a spurious sūtra, Sumyoga-pārvo-brasuah, (see App. A. 3), whicl», though certainly not Vararuchi's, seems to affirm the first ; yet the Prākſca Sanjīvani, an elaborate commentary on Vararuchi (for an account of which sec preface), never recognises it, cven in cxplaining such a change as that of *āścharya' to 'achchliera' (see note, p. 3). Bhamaha tesorts to an arcifice to include a partial application of (b) in i 27; and the Sanksh. Sāra allows (6) in its 19oth rule, (dorghab) ad sd ssl lupia-vyañjanci' (Lass. App. p. 47). But it is only Henta.clindra who sistens them clearly anche cwo following rules: (Pada 1. sūt. 42) Lupta.ya ra-va-sa-sa-sām sa-sa-sām dirgbah ; - 'wliçrever a w, s, or s is elded, which precedes or follows an ś, or s, the preceding voive! is lengthened: as, paisai, sīso āso, päso, etc., for pāsyali, isya, aśvā, pusya eico'-(Pāda 8 ·THC PRAKRTAPRALISA OR VARARUCHI to 11. sūt. 90) na dergbānusvārāt (which follows a sūc corresponding to Var. ill. 50, 9 v.), che doubling previously enjoined [cf. Var. 11. 50] is forbidden after a long vowel or an anusvāra (for the latter, of. Vor. 111 56], whether these have been introduced by previous rules (lāksanska] cr are the original letters of the word [alaksanıka] as nisaso for misvasa (where the s is lengthened by Hemachandra's rule quoted above), isaro for īśvara (when the 7 is originally long), and similarly phaso, pāsam for sparsa and pārsva,' etc. Blāmaha by the examples given in his commentity on Vararuchi 11. 58, would seem include such words under it: but surely if Vararucht had intended this rule to exercise such a wide influence he would have expressed himself more clearly, and would have specified the class by a better denomination than savādı, as he had before done in a similar casc in 1. 20 by tundu riipesu, which at once defines the class of words to which it applies, sec Comment, ad locum. Nor is there any reason, if such principle had been recognised by him, for his inserting such a sūtra as viui 46, as the words therein specified would have at once come within its influence, without needing any further "remarh. Are we therefore to interpret the silence of Vararuchi cvidence that the principle in question grew up gradually in Prakrt, and only became fully recognised in later times? as ·APPENDIX E. HEMACHANDRA'S SÜTRAS ON YOWELS IN SANDHI (Cf, Var. iv, 1), (pādai. sutras 3-9). (As Vacaruchi is defective in this part of Prākrt Grammar, the following sūtras from Hema chandra are added to supply the deficiency I have omitted many of the examples, as these are often obscure and corrupt from the general absence of Sanskrt explanations. Lassen has discovered many of these rules by induction from the instances in the plays, cf. Inst., pp. 167-9,] 3 dırgha brasvaut mitbo urtlar Vettau samase svarānam dirgha-hrasvau bahulum bhavatah, mithah parasparam, brasvasya dırghah , (antarvedib) antāvei, kvachin na bhrvati, "juvaiano,' kvached vikalpah, (pati gribam) paībırm, parharum, etc.. diryhasya lirasvah [examples obscure in MSS ]-- vacid vikalpah, jaunaadam 24uniadam, natsoitam nassottam, wahumuham vabamubam 1cf. note, p 371. 4, padayoh sandhar vå.-Sanskrtoktah sindhih sarvah prāhrte padayor vyavasthitavibhásaya bhavatı , väsesi tāsa esi [= vyāsa isb?], visamaavo visamedavo (explained in marg. by visamätapsb], cc.- Padayor it pai, cte.Bahulādlikācāt kvachid chapade 'pi, kābis, kābs. kim? păr, For thu, see Preface.

·116 THE PRÄKRTAPRAKASA OF VARARUCHI 5. ne yuvarnasyāsve. ivarnasya cha, e uarnasya asve varne pare [16., followed by a different vouel], sandhir 03 bhavats....asva it kimi puhavīto [=prithvi +īša). 6. cdotoh surre.-ekāra okärayoh, parc, sandhir na bhavati. 7. Svarasyodurite.-vyanjana-sampriktah svaro, vyanjane lupte, yo 'vašisyate, sa “udyrtta ila uchyate (sco, 2 vowel, which has lost its original consonant by clision, is called udurita), svarasya, udvrttc svarc parc, sandhir na bhavati. [Cf. Lass. Inst., p. 170]. 8. tyādeb.—-ip-ādīnām svarasya, stvare pare, sandhır na bhayatı; hoi ilia = bhavatı iha- 9. luk.-svarasya, svare pare, bahulam lug bhavati; nīsāsūsāsā=niśvāsochchhvāsau (niśvāsa + uchchlıvāsa). [Cf. note cransl. p. 37] ·INDEX OF PRAKĄT WORDS OCCURRING IN THE FOREGOING PAGES A. ( 37 ) Av=ayı, 1x. 12 (not ap). Ansū=aśru, iv. 15 (for gender, cf. note p. 39). Anso=ansah, iv, 14=aśvah, iv. 15. } Akko=arkah, 11. 1. 111 3. Aggī=agpih (v. 14 18. vi 60, 61. Aggho=arghah, 11. 1 Ankuso=apkusah, 11. 43. Ankoankah, iv. 17. Ankollo=ankothah, 11. 25 (Saos. 'ankoloh'?) Anguli=aogurī, 11. 30. Achchha=as (root), xii. 19 (Saur.)? Achchhamsakşı, iv. 12, 20. Achchhirakşı, 111, 30 iv. 20. Achchhariam=āscharyam, X11. 30. (Saur.) Achchheram=āscharyam, 1. 5.111 18, 40. Ajaso=ayaśas, 11 2. Ajja=ano, ix. 17 (ārya or adya ? Ajjbão=adhyāyah, 11. 28. Afthi=asthi (neur.), iri, 11, 51. Anuttanta, =anuvart- Anuvattanta,) māna, 1v. 5 Annahavaanam=anyathāva. chanam, 1 14. Atulam=atulam, 11. 2. Attă, attānorātman, v. 46 (var. lect.) Atto=ārtah, ni. 24 Atthi=astı, xii. 20 (Sour.) ? Addhā, addhāno=adhvā, v 47. Adhiro=adbirah, 11. 27. Apāro=apärah, 11 2. Appā, apgānorātmā, 11 48. V. 45, 46. Appullam=ātmiyam, 1v. 25 Amú=asau (declined), vi, 23 Ambam=amrom, ul. 53 (cf note transl.). 1 As this Index is intended to comprise chiefly ths useful Prškrt words, I have not always inserted those Prškſt examples which only reproduce the Sanskrt forms ugaltered, aod also ia case of nominal and pronominal inflexions, I have often contested myself with a single Seneral reference Wherever the Präkt from differs in gender from the Sanskrt, I have noticed the discrepancy ·} V) 118 PRĀLRTAPRAK IGA Amso-ansah, iv 14 Ahaam=aham, u 40 Amha, Ahale=aham, (Māg), xi 9 Amhānam, =asmālam, Ahamraham, vi 40. Amhe, SI Ahanımıraham, mām, vi 41 Amhe=vayam, asmão, vi 43. Ahijāı=abhijätih, 1. 2. Amhehim, etc,=asmābhih, Ahimajjū=abhimanyuh, 111 etc 47, 49, 53 17. Aribo=arhah 111, 62 Ahimunho=abbimuktah, iv. Are, particle, 1x 15 15, Alähi=alam ix 11. Aliam=alīkam, 1. 18 Ā. ( T ) Alhado-abladah, 111, 8 Avakkhaī= paśyati vini 69 Aado=āgatah, 11 7. Avajalam=apajalam, 112 Āidi-ākritih, 11 7 Avaranho=aparābnah, in 8. Audi=āvſıtıh, 1 7 Avari=uparı, 1 22 Anattıājñaplih, 111 55 Avavāsairavakāsate, viii 34 Ānā=ājñā, 111 55 Avavāhai=avagahate, vi 34 Ānalakkhambho,) =alānas. tambhah, Avabarai=avaharatı, iv, 13 Analakhambho, J: 57 y 29 Avahāso=avahasah iv 21 Ādaro=adarah, 11 2 Avahovāsam=ubhaypārs. Āpelo=apıdah 1 19 vam, 1y 33 Āmelo=āpıdah 11 16, Avasariam=apasrtam Āvatto=āvartah 11 24 (v1) Āsasit vu 25 Avvorabo, ix 10 (cf Lass ĀSo=aśvah, 1 2 (11 58?) p 369) Āsu asum=āsu (conject) iv. Asivam asivvam=aśivam 111 16 58 Ābijai=abhijātih, 1 2 Asu asum iv 16 infra Aso (or rather 'aso,' cf i 2)= I() aśvah 111 58 Ia=iti, 1 14 Assa, assim=asya, asmin, vi Iarassim, etc =ıtarasmin 15-17 2 Asso=asvab, 1 2 111 58 logalo=angärah 1 3 11 30 Aha=asau, adas vi 24 Ingiajo=ingitajcah, in 5 1V 21 , See asu, VI ·119 INDEX Inam Ingiango=ingitajāah, Xil 8. Udū=rtuh, i. 29. 11. 7. (śAUT.) Uddhumãi=uddhamati, vill. 32. lnam idam, vi 18. Uppalam=uipaim, m 1. Idam Itthi=stri, X11.22 (saur.) Uppão=utpåtah, di, 1, Ubbbavai= udbhayatı vill 3. Ima=idam (crude form), vi, Umbaram=udunbarm, iv. 2. 14, 15, 16. Umbă=aşmā, 111, 32. Iminā, imena=anena, vi. 3, Ulavo=ulapah, 11. 15. 14. Uluhalan=ulükbalam, 121, Imesid=csām, āsăm, vi. 4 Uvvivaī=udvijate, VIN, 43 Isı (īsı ?)=işat, 1. 3 Uvvellai udvestate, V11f 41. Isi = rsbih, : 28 Uvasaggo=upasargah, u 15. Issard=isvarah, 11, 58 Ussavo=utsavah, 11. 42. Iha=idam (loc. sing ), vi. 16, (cf.vl.) 37. Ussuo=utsukah, !11. 42. 1. (1) īsālū=írşāvān, iv25. E. () Isaro=isvarah, 111. 58. Eazeva, iv. 5. Eam=ekam, n. 58-evam, U.(3) iv. 5. Va, uaha=pasya, paśyata, 1. Eāraha=elādasa, 11. 14.45 14 (Cf. transl note). Elam=ekam, I. 58 Ukkā=ulks, 111 3. Enhamsidầnum, 1v, 33 Ukherosulharah, 1 5 Ett131, =etavat, 1y 25, Ukkhaam, ullha= utkhātam, Comm. (cf App 1 10. Eddaham, B) Uchchha <ukşd, Ilt. 30. Ettoretasmas, vi 20, 21 Uchehhitto=uthspiah, Ertha=etas.is, VE 21 (or tu 30 rather 'adra', of Lass. p. Uchchhù ilshub,1 15. 129) 111. 30, Edam etad, enam, vi ?2. Ujjuo (Tijukah), 111 52. Ediná, edeņa=cteda, vi. 3 Uttarijam, Edesiai, sutariyam, Edina, setesám, etāsām, Uttariam, 11 17. Edinam, ·120 PRĀK RTAPRAKASA Erāvano=airāvatah, ti, 35, 11 11 Eriso=idrišah, 1 19, 31 Evva=eva, iv 5 Esa, e$i, eśe=eshah, X1 10 (Mag) Esa, eso=eshah vi 19 22 0. (377) Okhalam=ulukhalm 121 Qvahairavagahate, viu 34 Ovāasai=avakäsate, viil 35 Osāriam=apasarıtam iv 21 Ohāso savahāsah iv 21 K ( ) Kannaüram =karnapūram Kannaūram,) 1V 1 Kaneru=Karenuh (fem only) iv, 28 Kanho=Krsnah, 111, 33 61 Kattari=Kartari 111 24 Katto kado-kasmāt, vi 9 Katttha, kammi, etc=kasmin, vi 7 Kadua=kritvà xu 10 (Saur) cf Hema ch App C Kando;to=utpalam (Sans kandotah? ) iv 33 Kamandho=kabandhah (Sans hamandhah?) 1 19, Kammorkarman, iv 6 18 Kamso=hansah iv 14 (note tr) Kayye=kāryam, xi 7 (Mag) Kara-Kr (dukrın) viu 13 X11 15 Karıdān=lritvā, x! 16 (Mag) Karısa=hris (root) vii 11 Kariso-karışah 1 18 Kalambo=hadambah 11 12. Kalunam=harupam, 11 30 Kalharamukahlāram ini 8 Kasatam=kashtam, . 6 (Pars) Kasano=krinah, 111 61 Kasāam-keşīyam i 43 Kaha laham katham iv 16 Kahim ctc -kasminu 7.8 Ki=h; (duhrn) viu 17. 1 Kaam--artam 27 V 23 (cf note) Kalavo=Laitavah (?) 1 36 Kaia=kadā vi 8 Ka=lapih, n 2 Kaurao-kauravah, 1 42 Kausalo=kaušalam (?) 1 42 Kachcham=Karyam x 11 (Pais) Kanja=lanyā, x 10 (Pais) Kadjai=hanyakū xil 7 (Saar) haợc='plah, 21 15 (Mag) Kadhai=lvathatı, ya 39 Kadhoram=Lathoram ii 24 Kanaam=kanalom, at 42 haniro Lannie karnılarah 111 58 ·INDEX 121 111. 57. B. Kāūņa=hritvā, iv, 23. viii. 17. Kuna-(dukrn), v111. 13. Kātūnam=kritvā, X 13. Kumbhaāro, kumbha- (Pars ) Kumbbāro, kārah, iv. 1. Kālāsam, Kālāa-=kālāyasam, Kusumappaaro, kusumaiv. 3. Kusumapaaro, praharah, Kāsa=kasya, vi. 5. Kāham=karişyāmi, vi. 16. Kedhavo=kaitabbah, 11 21, Kālāvano=kārsāpanah, jn. 29. 39, Kettiam, 1=kiyat, iv. 25. Kāhia=chakāra. vm. 17, cf. Keddaham, S Comm. cf. App. vii 24. Kahe-kadā, vi 8. Kerisokıdrsah, 1, 19; cf. 1. Ki=krtih, 1, 28 31. Kichchă==krtya, 1 28. Kelāso=kailāsah, 1 35. Kinā=kena, vi. 3. Kevatçao=kaiyartakah, 111 22. Kınaï=krīpāti, viii, 30, Kesim=keşām, kāsām, vi, 4, Kino-kionu, 1x. 9. Koftimam=kutimam, i 20. Kittīs=kirtih, 111, 24. Kotthuho=kaustubhah, 1. 41. Kıra, kila=kıla, 1x 5 11 12. Kirsā=kriyā, 111. 60 Komvizkaumudi i. 41. Kirito-kritah, 111. 62 Kosambi=kausâmbi, 1 41. Kilanto-kläntah, ki 62 Kosalo= kausalam (?), 1. 42. Kilittham, klıştamn, 111, 60. Kkhu=khalu, ix, 6. Kilesoklesab, 111, 62, Kilittam=kirptam, 1 33. Kıvā=lſpā, 28 Kisi=krisbih, i. 28 Khaiom=lbāditam, 1. 10. Kissā=xasyāh, vi. 6. Kbaggo=khadgah, 1, 1 Kia, kia, kii, kie.=hasyah, vi Khanam=Lşapam, in 31. 6. (cf. v. 24, transl. note). Khadoskhsatah, u1. 29. Kirar-kriyate, vill, CO Khando-skandah, 11: 29 Kise=kasyāh, vi. 6 Khandbo=shandhah, i11. 29. Kualaam, kuva-=kuyalayam, Kbamakşamā, 31 = IV, S. kshmā, 11. 63. Kulheao=laukseyahah, 1 44. Khambho-stambhah. 14, 90. Kuchchbizkusih, 11. 30. Khaliam=shhalitam, i. 1..0. Kl (1) ·122 PRAKRTAPRAKASA Khā-khãd (root), V131.27. Khăiam=khāditan, s. 10. Khānū=sthăpuh, 111 15. Khujjo-kubjah, 11 34. Khuppa--masj (root), viu 68. Khodad=sphoțakah, m. 16. Gimho=grışmah, 11 32. Girā=gir, iv. 8. Gunghi=grıştıh, iv. 15. Gujjhao=guhyakah, 111. 28. Genba=grah (raot), vi, 153 gzhāna, 1x 2. Gotfhī=gospbī, i11 1 Golā=godāvari, iv. 33 G. (1) Gh, Gaā=gadā, 11 2 Gauravam=gauravam, 1. 43. Gao=gajah, 11. 2. Gaggaro-gudgadah, 11, 13 Gachchbam=gamışyāmi, vit. 16. Gade=gatah, xı 15 (Mag ) Gaddosgartáh, 11 25 Gaddahozgardabhah, n. 26. Gadua=gatvā, xii. 10. (Saur ) Gabhainam=garbhitam, 11. 10 Gammai, Gamijai, samyate, VII 9 Gamiai VII 58 Gartho=garhah, 11 62 Garuam, guru, gurvī, 1 22. Garui. ŠICÍ 111 55). Gahavai=gphapatih, iv. 32. Gabijai, gāhi-=gplyate, viii 61. Gabiram=gabhiram, 1. 18. Gā garga1-((root) vill. 25 26 Garavari=gaurvam, 1 43. Gaha gåtbı, 11 27. Gifthủ=guỵth, 28. Giddho srdhrah. X1 6 (saur )? Ghaņā=ghrnā, i 27. Gharam=grham, iv 32, 33. Ghe. 1 =grah (root), vl. 16 Ghet, (cf. trans!) Gheüga=gphutvā, iv. 23. Ghcita vyam granītavyam, vili 16. Ghettüna=grihitvā. VIII. 16 (cf. note, transl) Ghetiūnam=grhiivā, X. 13 (Pais ) Ghola=ghuna (root), vil. 6. Ch. (9) Chaitto=chaitrah, 1 36 Chautth=cbaturıbı, 1 9. Chauddha=chaturdasa, 11. 14. Cbauddaha=chatudası, 1 9 Chadu, chādu=cbātu, 1 10 Chatunham (chaupham?) chaturnām, vi. 59. Chattāri, =chatyurah, chaturah, vi 58. Chattāro, Chandimi-chaodrika. 1 6.

·INDEX 123 1. 10. Chando, chandro=chandrah, Chhāhā,-1=chbāyā, u 18. v. 111, 4, 24, Chamaram, cbã=chamaram, Cbbiodai=chbinatti, vill. 38 Chbtram=kşıram, iu. 30 Champaicharchayati, vni. Chuansujutan, 111. 30. 65. Chhunuo=kşunnah, 111. 30. Chalai, callajschalat, vi11. Chhuddho = ksubdhah, 111.30. 53. Cbhuram=kşurah (masc.) Chalano=charanah, 1 30. 111, 30, Chātuliam=chāturyam, iv. 33 Chhettam=kşetram, 111 30. Chittha=sthā. xt1 16. (Saur); cf, vi 63 x1 14 Chinai=chipoti, viu 29. J.(5) Chindham, chihnam, 1. 12. 111 34. Jaā, jai=yadā, 1 11 Chendha. Jaiā, etc.=yada, vi. 8 Chilādo=krātab, 11. 30, 33. Jaunaadam, Chistha=şthā, X1, 14 (Măg) yamunătatam, Chihurorchikurah, 11, 4, Jaunāadam,) iv. 1. Chumvai (-ban)=chumbati, Jauná=yamunā, 11. 3. v11 71 Jalkho=yakshah, 11.31 131 Chotthi. 29, 51. chaturthi, cha. turdası, 1. 9, cf. Janjoyajñah, xı. 7. (Saur.) Choddahi, 11 44. Jatthi=yaştıh, 11.31 (cf. Dote, Choram=chauryan, m. 20. Jadharam=jatharam, 11 24 Chh. ( 33 ) Jasnao=janakah. 1 52. Chhatthiz başthi, 11. 41 Jauno=yajõah, 111. 44, Chhanam=Lşanam (kşa Janhū=jahauh, 111 33 nah?), 311 31. Jatto, jado=yasmāt, vi. 9. Chhatta vanno=saptaparaah, Jacapai=palpati, wu 24 Jambhāaī=jrmbhate, viii. 14 Chhamakşamá 311, 31. Jamno-japana, 111, 43 1 18. Chhapmubo=promukbah, Jaso=yaśas, 1 31. 1y. 6, 18 Jaba, jabā=yutba, 1 10 Chhāram-kşāram, m 30 Jahano ( nam?)=jaghanam Chhāraotsaiakuh, it 41, (neut) 1 27. 2 er ) 1.41 11 41.

·12+ PRAKRTAPRAK TSA Jh, (9) Jhā, jbāa=dhyai (root) viii 25, 26 Jhija=kşi (root), viu 37 Th (3) Thu thậa=sha (root) V111 25, 26 Thiam=sthitam, v 13, 22 D (3) Dando=dandah 11 35 (cf Xin 31) Dasano=daśanah, 11 35 Dolā=dola, 11 35 (cf xu 31) Jahıtthilo=yudhishthirah 1 22 11 30 Jā=yāvat iv 5 Jāna=jā, (root), viu 23 Jamauo=jāmatrkah 1 29 Jamāā, aro=jamata v 35 Java=yāvat, iv 5 Jasa=yasya, vi 5 Jahe=yada, vi 8 Jina=ji (root), visi 56 57 Jina=yena, vi 3 Jivvaisiyate, viul 57 (cf vil 9) Jussā etc=yasyah, vi 6 Jiam=jivitam 11 2 iv 5 Ju je, etc=yasyah vi 6 (cf V 22) Jia=jya, 111 66 Jiviam=jivitam iv 6 Juhā=jibwa i 17 m 54 Jujjbai = yudhyate vin 48 Juguchchba=jugupsa in 40 Juggam=yugmam 112 Juvā juvāno=yuvā, v 47 Juggam=yugmam 111 2 Juvā, juvano=yuvā v 47 Jöra=irudh (root) viu 64 Jettiam. =yāvat, iv 25 (cf App B) Jeddaham Jevvareva, x11 23 (Šaur ) Joggo=yogyah in 2 Jovanavanto=yauvanalin iv 25 Jos vanam=yauvanam : 41 N. (0) Naanam=payanam 112 Naaram=nagaram, 11 2 Ņaiggāmo=nadigramah 111 57 Naisotto=nadıśrotas iv 1 (cf ili 52) Ņu=nadı il 42 v 19 22 29 11 60 Naicāmo=padigrānah, 111 53 Naisotto -nadıśrotas, iv 1 Naulam=nakulam, 11 2 Nallho-pakhah 111 58 lasgo=nagnah 111 2 achchai=nſtyatt vatı 47 Naftao Tenactalahi 11 29 111 52 ·INDEX 125 Nebo=spehah, 11, 1. 64. No (ne varlect)=nah, v 44,51. Ņomallıā=navamallıkā, 1. 7. Nolla=nud (root). vi. 7. Nhānam spānam, 11. 33 T. (a) Taā tai=tadā, 1. 11, Taanim=tadānım, 1 18, Taſam=tritiyam, 1 18 Tai, tae, etc.=vajā, tvayı, VI 30 Nado=natah, 11. 20. Navara=kevala, ix. 7. Navari, particle, 1x. 8. Navı= a + api, ix 16. Naham=nabhas, iv. 6. 19 Naho=pakbah, 111 58. Nābalo=jābalah (?), 31, 40 ; cf var, lect. and pote, transl Ņiachchha (?)=drs, vini 69; ef. note, transl and v. 2. Nichcham=pityam 112 27. Nijharoznırjharah, in 51. Nithuro=oisthurah, 111. 1. Nidālam=lalatam (Sans. nitālam, iv. 33 Niddă=nidrā, 1 12 Niddálū=pidrāvān iv 25. Nippbāo=nışpyāyah 111 35. Nimmānai=nirmāti, viii 36 Nivattao=pivartakah, 111, 24 Nivido=nividah, 11 23. Niyyudam=piryrtam, 1. 29 Nuvvude=nirvrtih, 11 7. Nisadho=pışadhah, 11 28. Nisāsnisā, 11 43 Nis sāso=niśvāsah 111 58. Nihasosnikaşab, 11. 4, Nibo, =arhitah, 11 58 (cf. IV, 33, Nibitto, Visāso=niśvásah, 111. 58 Nunam, nūna=pūnam, iy 16. Neuram= nupuram. i 26 Neddam=nidam, 1 19. 11. 52. Neddā=nidra, 1, 12 Taja=tadā, vi 8 Tartto, etc =tyat, vi. 35. Tam=tad, tam, vi. 22 Tam=tvam, vi 26. twām (?). vi 27. Tansam=tryasram, iv. 15. Tanam=trinam, 1 27. Tanui=tanvi, 111 65 Tambam (?)=tāmram, 111 53 (cf note, transl) Tambo-stambah, il, 13 Taraſ, tiraï=śaknoti, vi 70. Talaam=tadāgah (masc), 11, 23 Talaventaam=tālavrntabam, 1 10. Taluni=taroni, x 5 (Pais) Taha, tahā=tatbā, i 10. Tabı, -m=lasm10, tarhi, iv 16. VI 7. Tu=tāvat, iv 5. Tariso=tādşıšah, 1 31. Talavenfaam=tālavſntakam, 1 10 Täva=távat, iv, 5, 6 ·126 PRĀLRTAPRAK ISA V1, 6. Tasa=tasya, vi 5 11. Tesım=teşām, tāsām vi. 4 Tähe=tada, vi 8. To, tatto=tasmāt vi 10 Tinā=tepa, vi, 3. Tondam=tundah (masc), 1 Tinni=trayah, trio, vi 56, 20 Tinham=tiksnam, iu 33 Tti=ill, 1 14 (CJ App A, 27 ) =trayānām, vi. 59, Tissā, tise, tie, -ā, etc,=tasyāh, Th. (9) Tīluim tisu tribhih-gu, vi Thavozstavakah, 11, 12 50 Thānū=sthānuh (śrva), 111 15 55, 60 Tujjha, tumha, etc =tava, vi Thimpa=irp (root), vil 22 Thuisstutih, 111 12 31 Tujhc=yuyam, yuşmān, vi 28, 29 (Yushmad declined, D. (E) vi 26-39) Daichcho=dartyah, 2 36 Tunho,-hilho=tūşnikah, 1158 Daivam=daivam, 1 37.1 58. Tum, Daissam=dasyāmi, xi 14 =tvam, tvam, vi Tumam, 26, 27. (Saur) Tumāırtvayā, vi 33 Dansaņam=darśapam, iy 15 Tumo, tuba=tava, vi, 31 Dachchham=drak$jām. VII. Turiam stvaritam. vii. 5 16 Tuvara=tvar (root), viu 4. Dachchho=dakşahi, 11 30 Tuhaaddham, Dattham=daştam or driş- =tavārddham, tam, iy 12. Tuhaddham, JV 1 Davaggi=dāvāgnih, 1 10 Türam=türyam, in 18, 54 Dasamuho=dasamukhah, 11 Tüsai=luşyatı, ville 46 45 Terte, vi 22 =tava, tvayā, Dasaraho=dasarathah, 11 45 vi 32 Dasavalo=dasabalah 13 45 Teltiam, =tavat, iv 25 Daha -dasa, 11. 44 (cf. App B) Teddabam. Dahamuho=daśamukhaḥ. 11. 45. Teraha=trayodasa 11 14 44 Daharaho=daśarathah 11.45. Teraho=trayodasah, 1 5 Teloam Dahavalo=daśabalaḥ, 11 45 7=trailokyam 1 35 211 58 Dahım=dadhi, v. 25. 30 Telloklam Dashe=dalgah, x1 8 (was.)

·INDEX 127 Debi-dehi, vi 64. Do, dondvau, vi. 57. Donham=dvayoḥ, vi. 52 Dobātam, dobājaizdvidhi. kritam, dwidbālriyate, 1 16. Dohim, etc =dvábbyām, etc. VI 54. Dohalo=dohadam (neut), 11! 12 (cf. transl, note) Dohu, droho=drobah, 111 4 Daugardatvā, iv. 23. Dādımam=dádimam, 11 23. Dädbã=danştrā, iv, 33 Dalūnan=datvá, x 13 (Pais) Dalıman=dādimam, 11 23. Dāvaggi=dāvágpih, 1 10 Dāham dasyāmi. vi 16 Diaro=devarah, 1 34. Diaho=divasah, 11 2 46 Disgham=dırgbam, ni 58 Digthi-drisbțih, 28 11 10. 50. 31. Dinnam-dattam, viti 6? Disã=dis, iv. 11, Diham=dirgham, 111 58 Duallam, duülam=dukülam. 1, 25. Duiam=dyniyam, 1 18 Dukkho=duhkhitah, ili 58. Duyyane=durjanah, ai 7 (MūB ) Duvesdrav, vi 57. Dunario-daulātikah, 1. 44. Duhjiam, duhājjal=dvdha. Afterp. dudhakriyat, 16 Duho=dulkhitati, fu 58 Dumal-dunout, 1,8 Dcotc (a1a), tayan 32. di sl. 14 (Sar) Dearo=dcvarak, 1. 34 Desatthul. deyathul. Rdeias. tulit. th. 37 Denam-dalom, 1 37 112 SS Dh (5) Dhanam-dhanam, ry. 12 Dhanavanto. dhanayan, Dhanálo, 25 Dhammillamadhammillah (masc): Dhammellati Dha=drav (dhalu) 1,37 Dhia=dukită (Sans dhidi'). 12 24, 33, Dhiram-dhuiryam, 1 39, 1 18, 54 Dhunai-dhupo11, VIII 56 Dhuttordburtant, 111 4. Dhurārdhur, sy 8 Dhurai edhoy Atr. 111 Dhunijai $. Dhodiaduhiti, is 33. augyat. p. (0) Paadam. façan=fralajar. Palbalo.arraltalah is 27 ·128 TRĀLTITAPRAKASA 11 27 Pauam, pāuam-pråkritam, i. Panbudam=prasnutam ill 10 33, Pautti=pravſttiḥ 1 29. Pattharo, -thâro=prastarah, Paumam padmam, 111 65 1 10 Pauro= paurah, : 42 Pabhavai=prabhavati, 111.3. Paurso=pauruşah, 1 42, Pamillai, -ilai=pramılatı, vill Paottbo=prakosthah, 1. 40, 54 Pachchakkham (sic leg)= Papho-paksmam, 111. 32 pratyakşam, 111 27. Parahuoparabhrtah. 1. 29. Pachchham-pathyam iti. 27 Paribhavai=parıbhavatı vila Pachchhimam=paschymam 3 111 40 Palaaghana-pralanglanan, Pajjatto=paryāptah, 11 1 Paįjunno-pradyumnah, 119 Palittam=pradiptam, it 12. 44 Pallattham=paryastam iu Patjanam-pattanam 112 23, 21 Pada-pataki, 118, Pallanam-paryānam, 12 21. Pada=pat (root), Vu 51. Pavatthoprakoşthah, 1 40 Padı=prati, cf u 8, note, Pavanuddhaam, pavanod. transi dlatau, Pavanoddhaam, 19. 1. cf. Padansudam=pratisrutam 1y. note. transi 15 Pasuttam, pās prasuptam, 2. Padyvai, pādı -pratipad, 1 Pasiddhi, pão-prasiddhih, i 2 iv.7. 2 Padıvaddı=pratipattıh, it 7 rabajo, pabaro = prahārah, (ct transl note) Padısaro=pratisarah, 11 8 Pabo==pathio. 1. 13 Pagısıddhi, păd: pratispaid. Pă, pła=gbră (r001). vi 20. dhip. 2. n. 37: cf. note, Pžavaçanam=pādapatanam 1v. 1. (cf. note transi) Pachamosprathamah, 11 28. Pauam=pråkytam, i 10 Pannaraho-papchadaśah. u. Pīuso=pravssb, iv, 11, 18 Padısıddhi-pratisparddhin, bo Pangasi-panchisat, ni 44. 2 111 37. Panh3, -ho-praśnah, 1:1 33. Püçüinto=prānasal iv 25 Puplampadiyam, 18 1 10 p 108. 14. 30.

·INDEX 129 Pārão, pārāvao=parāvatah, iv. 5 Pālei=padyate, viii. 10. Pāvadanam=pädapatanam, iv 1. (cf. note transl) Pā, piano=pitā, v 35 Plāpiam piā=pitāpītam, iv 1 (?) Pikkam=pakvam, 1 3. 1 3 Piggham=pistam. 1 12 Pivasiva, x 4 (Pais) Pram, pialam=pitam - alam, iv, 26, Pinattanam, Pinada, Puftham, Pujthi, Pudo, puddo=putrah, Xit 5 (Saur ) Puppham=puspam, 111 35. 51. Purıllam=paurasiyam 11 25. comment; cf. App B, and transi. Puriso=puruşah : 23 Pulaai=paśyatı, 11. 69, c Pekabai, peclichbai=prehşate, v. 14, var lcct, cf. xii. 18, and, p. 85. Peftham=pıştam, : 12. Pendam, pin-=pindam i 12. Pemmam=preman 111 52. Qy. 'pemmo"? cl iv. 18. but 19 Rata , p. 26, 12, pemmam) Perantam=paryantam, 1 5 111, 18 Pokhharo=puşkarūh, a 20 Il 29, Potthao=pustalam (neut), 1 20 }=pinatā, iv. 22 "} =pristham, iv 20 Ph. (7) Phanso=sparsah, 111 36. 1 15. Phanaso=panasah. 11 37 Phandapam=spandanam, 111 36 Phariso=sparsah, 111 62. Pharuso=parusah, 11 36 Phaliam=pajitam (?), viu 9 Phalıha=parikhi, 11 30, 36 Phaliho=parisha). 11 30 36. Phaliho=sphafikah, 11. 4. 22. Phuitat, Phudai Bl. Bhaapphal= puaspatıb 19.30. Bhatravo=bharyaḥ, L 3, P85. }=sphugate.v11 53 Pulsha=puruşasya, XI 12 (12) Pusvanho=parsiḥngh, 111 8 Puso, pusso=pusyah 111 38 (Query půso, cf. App D! Puhail=prutas1, 1 13. 29 : Terus Ji tegel **. ***** 9 ·130 PRĀLRTAPRAK TSA 3 Bhattam=bhaktam 1:1 1. Bhattáro=bharta, y 31, 33 Bhaddam=bhadram 1 12 Bhamai=bhramati, vịu 71 Bhamiro=bhramanaślah, iv 24 Bhara=smr (root), vu 18, cf p 24 Bharanijjam,l =bbaraniyam, Bharaniam, 11 17 Bharaho=bharatah, 11, 9 Bhâ=bhi (root), vin 19 Bhaanam=bhājanam, iv 4 Bhāā, bhāaro=bhratā, v 35 Dbānam=bhajanam iv 4 Bhāriā=bhārya x 8 (Pais ) Bbiogārozbhirogarah 1 28 Bhingo=bhrogah, 1 28 Bhindivalo=bhindipalah 111 46 Bhindai=bbinatti, Vin 38 Bhısını 11 38 Bhuttamabhuktam 111 50 Bhumaā (?)=bhuh, iv 33 Bhc=vah (yuşmakam), vi 37 Dhottuna=bhuktrā vu 55 M (#) Maam=mſtam i 27 Mai, mac=mayā mayı, vi Maulam -lo=mukulam, : 22 11 2. Maūro=mayūrah 1 8 Mauho=mayükhah 1 8 Mao=madah 1 2 Mansam=mansam, iv, 16 Mapsü=smaśru (neut) 1v 15 Maggo=märgah 112 11 50 Machcbha=makshıkā, 111 50 Majjha=asmad (base) (asmad declined vi 40 53 ) Majjhanno=madhyahnah, 111 7 Majjham=madhyam nu 28 Made=mrah, 11 15 (Mag) Madham=mathah (masc), 11 24 Manansinmadasvidi I 2 iv. 15 Manduro mandulah, 1y 33 Mantham=mastam iv, 15 Mam mamammam vi 42 Mara=mp (root), vi 12, Marisa=miş (root) vi 11 Mala=md (root) vil 50 Malınam=malinam av. 31 Masānam=śmasānam mn 6 Massu=ſpaśru (neut ) 11 6 , cf jy 15 Maha majjha etc =mama, VI SO 46, 52 Natto ctc =mat vi 48 Hailam-malpam, ty 31 Maudam=mulutam 1 22.31 Mahaaddham, =momard- Mahaddham dham iv 1. cf note transi Mahuam=madhukom i 24 Mahum=madhu. v. 25-27, 30. 1 ·INDEX 131 Mãando=nākaodah, 1v. 33 Müdhadā=müdhaja v 22 Maā=māta, v 32 Mebalã=mekhalā, u 27 Māuo=mātrikah, 2 29 Mebo=megho, 11 27 Măindo=cbatah (mākandsh). Mekho=megho, x 3 (Par) 19 33 Mottā=muktā, : 20 Mõnansınızmanasvios, 1,2 Moro=majurah, 1 8 IV IS Moho=mayükhah, 1 8 Mānuso=mānugah 11 42. Mhva=iva, 1x 16 Mala=nālā v. 19-24 yi 60 Mbi, mho, mbu, mha=iscal Malãillo=mālāvan, ir 25 smah, v1: 7 Masam=mānsam, wv, 16 Mainko=prgãokah, 28 R. (1) Miomitrah, 10, 58 Raanam=ratnam, 1 60 Michchha mubyā, 111, 27 Raadam=rajatarp, 11 2.7. Mattos-mitrah, ti se Rachchhúztatkyrte 27 Milānam=mlānam. 67. Rannam'=aranyam, : 4 Msva=iva, 1x 16 Ranno, •Inā=täjñan, -12, v Muingo=ardangah, 1,3 38. 42. Mukktom=muskah (mase) Rattam (?)=raktam, viti 62 111 29 Rafliruh, 58 Muggaro=mudgarah, is 1 Ramanujam, rampņiyam. Muggo=mudgah, 126 1 Ramaniam, ?! 17 Muchchhizmürchtā, 19 5) Ramijai, Kamyale, 1 58 Mudjuano Daudzāyanah, 1 Rammai, 44 Rass, rasistasmin, ul 2 58 Mura sejna (root), 322423 Rāaulam, Tõulam=iájak ulan, Munito=mssālsh, 1 29. 14.1 Mutti=mürttih, tu 24 Raizrāji, 36 (declared. Muddho=musdhah, ul. 3644) Muham=bukham.te 27 Raino, rispat, .pi 1.-3 Muhalo=mukharah, 1 0 43 Moghatrapamanadhan am Rålsrättih, it 58 jy 2: Ráche rajo, 12 {Poid) 3 Inelcom coatlotails oçcun ia lc Pration la ibe AC 1 the 11 am vral!

·132 PRAKRTAPRAKASA 49. Rāsaho=rāsabhaḥ, ii. 27. Lubhai=mārşti (mrij), viii. Rāhā=rādhā, ii. 27. 67. Richchho=çikşah, i. 30. iii.30. Lonam=lavaṇam, i. 7. Riņam=şam, i. 30. Loddhao-lubdbakaḥ, i. 20. Riddho=iddhaḥ, i, 30. iii. 3. Rukkho=yřikşah, i. 32, iii. 31. Ruņpan=ruditam, viii, 62. V. (a) Ruddo, rudro=rudraḥ, iii. 4. Vaai=śaknoti, viii. 70, Rundha=rudh (root), viii, 49. Vaaņam=yachanam, ii. 2, 42. Ruppaņ=rukmam, iii. 49. Vaam=vayam, xii. 25. (Saur). Ruppiņī=rukmiņi, iii. 49. Vaideso=yaideśaḥ, i. 36. Rumbha=rudh (root), viii. Vaideho-vaidehaḥ, i. 36. Vaïram=vairam, i, 36. Ruva=rud (root), viii. 42. Vaisampāaņo=vaišam. Rūsaï=ruşyati, viii. 46. pāyanaḥ, i, 36. Re, particle, ix. 15. Vaisāhosvaišākhaḥ, i. 36, Rochchham=rodigyāmi, vii. Vaisio=vaiſikaḥ, i. 36. 16. Vakkalam=valkalam, iii. 3. Rotlüna=ruditvā, viii. 55. Vaggi=vāgmi, jit. 2. Rosainto=roşavān, iv. 25. Vankam = yakram, iv. 15. Vachchai=vrajati, viii. 47. Vachchharo=vatsaraḥ, iii. 40. Vachchho=vſikşah, i. 32, Laggarlagati, viii. 52. iii. 31. (declined v. 1--13, Lachchbi=laksmi, iii 30. 27. VI, 63). Lattlī=yashtiḥ, ii. 32. (cf. note transl., ii. 31). vakşas, iii. 30. Saskase=rākşasah, xi. 8. iv. 18. (11āg... Vajjai=trasati, viii. 66. Lahut=laghvi, iij. (5, Vajjhao=vāhyakaḥ, iii, 28. La=rājā. xi. 10. (Klāg.). Vanchaniam=vanchadiyam. Lichchha=lipsā, iii. 40. iv. 14. Lijjhai=lihyate, viii. 59. Vadısam- vadisam, ii. 23. Luna=!(root), viii. 56. Vaddhai-vardhate, viii, 44. Luvvat, luņijjai=lūyate, viii. Varam=yanam, iv. 12. $7. Vannos varpah, iv. 15. L. (3) Vachchho= { vatsah, ii, 40.

·INDEX 133 X11 24 Vanhi=vabpih, 111 33 Vattamānam-vartamānam, 111 24 Vattia=yartikā, ii 24. Vaddho=yrddhah i 27 Vandam=yrodam, iv 27 Vappbo=vāspah (uşman) 111 38 Vanichaniam=vanchaniyam (?) iv 14 Vammaho=manmathah, 11 39 111 43 Vammo=varma, iv, 18 Vamhaõja=brahmanyah, X11 7 (Saur) Vamhano-brāhmanah, 111 8 (cf vi 64) Vamhä, vamhinos brahmā V 47 Varai=vpnoti. v1.1 12 Valahı=vadabhih 1 23 Valam= vyalikam. : 18 Vale particle, 1x 12 Vasahı=vasatih, 119 Vasaho-pishabhah. 1 27 Varaba=dvadasa, 11 14, 44 Vavado (?)=vyapr.tah xu 4 (ſaur ) Vahıttam=vyābrttam, u 52 Vaho=vāşpah, jı 38, 54 Via=lia, 1x 3, 16 Vaddı=vitardıh, 112 26. Vianā=vedana, 1 34 Viano=vyajanam (neut), 1 3 Vianam=vitapam, 11 2 Vārıllo, viārullo=vskäravat, IV 25. Vunho=yitſsnah, 1 28 Viudam=viyrtam 1 29 117 Viulam=vipulam 1 2 Vinhiam=yşnhitam, : 28 Vikkavo=yıklavah, 111 3 Vikkinai. tavikrinite v110 31 Viller, Vichchbaddı=vichchhardih, m 26 Vijā=vidyā un 27 Vujjuli, vijjū=vidyut, IV 26 1Y 9 Viochhuo=ışchilon 1 1S. 28 111 41 Vinjo=vijnah. xu 7 (Saur) Vinjeto=yijnalah, . 9 (Pais ) Viajbo=undhyah, 1 14 Vsdaso=sitapah 1 20 Vuonanamsviripom. 111 44 Vint i=yismuh i 12 11 33 Vipphirariso=yisparsah, si 51.62 I imho=virdhyoh. 14 Timboevayah 11 32 11 43 Vahırosbadhirah 1 27 Vahumuham Svadho. Vahūniuham mulbam. } IY 1 Vahd-vadboh, : 19 21, 29 160 Vå varmlai (root) 11 21 Vui=ic, 18 7 Vaasadapam se rja. Valssājuh (declined. 14- 18, 27 i 60 61) ·134 PRAK RTAPRAKASA 17 Visai ( 7 )=grasate, viii 28 $ () Visam=visam, 11 38 Visievrshi, 1 28 Śahidánı=sodhvā, 16 Visūra=khid (root), viis 63 (Māg) Vissaso=viśvāsah iu 58 Śiālá, etc =śrigālaḥ X1 Vabalo=vihvalah, 111 47 (Māg). Viciam=viryam, 11 20 S (7) Visattho=yisvastah, 1 17 Vasambho=viśrambhah, 1 17 Saadborsakatah, 11 21. Visaso=viśvāsah 111 58 Saahuttam=śatak ritvas, 1V Viha=nıbbi (root). vi 19. 25 (cf. App B) Vuzhaî=budbyate, vili 48 Saā, sai=sadā. 1 11 Vuttai (?)=majjati, vidi 68. Sairam=svairam 1 36 Vuttanto=yrttāntah, 1 29 Samvatto-samvartakah, 111 Vandayanam-vindāvanan, 24 1 29 Samvudam=samyrttam, 1 29 Veaeva, ix 3 Samvudi=samvrith, il 7 Veana=vedană, 1 34. cf. Samvellai==samveştate, VIII 1V 1 41 Vechchbam=yetsyāmi, vi. 16 Sankanto=sapkrāntah 111 56 V«jam=vardyam, 11 27 Sankā=sanka, wv. 17 Vediso=yetasah 1 3 11 8 Sakka=sak (root). vilt 52 Veddharvestate, vill 40 Sakho=śakrah 11t 3 Venhu=vişnuh, 1 12 Sachāvam=sachāpam, 11 2 Veltūna viditvā, viti 55 Sajjo=sbadjah uu ! Vebbhalovihwalah ini 47. Sanjadosamyatah 1 7 Veluriam=vaidītyam, iv 33. Sadjādossamyătah, 11 7 Vellivallih, 1 5 Sadhả=sațā, u 21 Vosyah vi 29, 37 Sada=sad (1001) vi 51 Vochchham=yakshyāmi Vi1 Sancho=snehaħ, in 64 16 Sanghavjam =sansthapitap Voram=badaram, 1 6 Santhāviams Vrandam=ypndam. IV 27. Sandhoshandhah, i: 43 c. A Sunnat=sanjôi ni 55 1 10 4 linnalliyljariik would be a better example of sote transt ·INDEX 135 Sannam=slatenam, 111. 33. Saddaba=sratt-dbā (root). viii. 33. Saddālo=abdavās, iv. 25. Sapānam=spānam, x. 7.(Pais.) Sappbam=śaspbam, iii. 35. Sabbarī=sapharī, ir. 26. Sabhalam=saphalam, 11. 26. Samattho=samastah, ni. 12. Samiddhi=sampddhih, 1. 2. Sampatti=sampalth, iv. 17. Sampadı-samprati, 11. 7. Sambhava=sam + bhi (root), VIII 3. Sammaddossammardah, 111. 26. Sara=ssi (root). v. 12. Sarado=farad, iv. 10. 18. Sararuham. ? =saroruham. Saroruham.s IV. 1. Sari-sarit, iv, 7. Sarichchham=sadr.sam. i 2.11. 30. (cf. i. 31). Sarıso=sadīšah, 1. 31. Saro-saras, iv. 6. 18. Salaba=slaghi, 111. 63. Savaho=sapathah, 11. 15.27. Salomuo,-muo=(?). iv. I (cl note traps) ) Savnajjo=sarvajnah, 111. S. Savijo=farajäsh .. 9 (Pars ) Savanno=sarvajdaħ. Ill. 8 (Saur ) Savitha, etc. =$ansmit. Sahamānā,-ni=sahamāpā, v. 24 (for this sūl.cf, note trapsl) Sahassahuttam=sahasralſt. vas, 1v. 25 (cf. App. B.) Sabă=sabbā, u 27. Skarossāgarah, i1. 2. Sámiddhi=samțddhih, i. 2. Sārango=śärngah, ini. 60. Sārichchbam=sadřkşam, 1, 2. Sãyo=sāpah, ii. 15. Sivasi, vii. o. Sulo=śrigālah, i. 28. Stásram=sitāsıtam, iv. 1. Singūro=śrngärah. i 28. Siffbi=srıştıh, i. 28. Sıdhilo=śithilah, 11. 28 Sipiddho=snigdhah, 111, 1. Sinha=śiśnah, 111. 33. Sitthao=sikthalam (neut.). ni, 1. Sındūraſ=sirdúram. i. 12. Sindhavam=saindhavom. 1. 38. Sibh,=śiphä. 11. 26. Sım=teshäir, tāsām. 11. 12. Siram=ģiras, iv, 19. Sırascani, siro-=$roscdacj, IV. 1. Siri=sri, t. 62 Silijbam=slıspam, ui 60. Siviso=siascah, 1,3 m, 62. Suistam=sitásitan. 1. 1. ST!! :ros Sarah, il, . Sito =siste, i 17. Suns=sulnıb, 11. 7.

·136 PRAKRTAPRAKASA Soriam=śauryam, 111 20 Sossam=śuşma, 111 2 (cf. 111 32?) IV 25 Suuriso=supuruşah i 2. Sujjo=süryah, 111 19. Suna=śru (root), viu 56. Sundo=saundah, 1 44. Sunderam=saundaryam, 1 5, 44 11 18 Sutto=suptah, 111, 1, vii 6. Supa (?)=mrj (root), vili, 67 Suppanada,-i=surpanakhā, y 24 Sumara=smr (root). viii. 18 11 17 Suvvai=śruyate, viii. 57, cf va 9 Sü, particle, 1x 14 Sui==suchi, 1 2 Sūro=süryah, 111 19 Susaissusyati. Visi 46 Se=tasya, tasyāh, vi. 11. Sechcham=saityam, 1 35. Seja=sayyā, s 5.1 17. Sendüram=sindüram, i 12 Sebhālia=sephälikā, 11 26 Sevā, sevvā=sevā, 111, 58. Selo=failah, 35 So=sah, vi 22 Soamallam=saukumāyam, 1 22 11 21 Souna=srutvā, iv. 23. Sochchhom=śrogyāmi, v.1. 16 Sonhi=snuşá, 11 47. Sottam=srotam, 11 52. Somālo=sulumurah, 11 30 (cl. note transl) Sopimossaumyah, 111 2 H (2) Hanso=hrasvah, iv 15 Hake, hage=aham, xı 9 (11āg) Hadakke=hrdayam, xi, 6 (Māg) Hanumanto, =banumān. Hanumā, Hattho=hastah, 111 12,50 Hado=hatah, 11 7. Ham=aham (asmad decl vi 40-53, Hammai=hanti, vai 45. Harisa=hr9 (root), viti 11 Harisa=barşah, 111 62 Haladda, 1 =haridrā. 1 13 v. Haladdi, ) 24 (on the latter sut of note trans! ) Halio-hålikah, 1 10. Havım=havis, v. 25 (cf. 1v 6) Haśıdu, di, de, dabasıtah. X1 11 (11āg) Hasai, hasanti=hasanti, vit V 58 Hasauto=hasan, v4, 10 Hasıro=hasanašilah, iv. 24. Hassai. 1 =hasyatc. VII. 9 Hasijjal.) Hallo=hililah 1 10 Hiaam=bpıdayam, 1 28 Hitaalam=bfdayam. X. 14 (Pais )

·INDEX
137
Hittham=trastam, viui 62 (cf. Huvasubhava, ix 2, cf. vit
App. A, 37).
18.
Hiri=hcíh, 111. 62.
Ho=bbū (root), viii. 1.
Hire, particle, ix 15.
Hojja, hojjā=bhavatı, bhavi.
Hırar=lcyate, viil 60.
şyatı, cic, Vi. 20 (cf pote,
Huam (bữam?)=bhūtam. Vill. transl.)
2.
Hossam, etc. =bbavișyāmi,
Huna-zhu (root), vii. 56, 57.
Huva=bhū (root), vill. I. Hohitthā
Huvvai, hunijjai=hūyate, vil Hohissā
57.
Huvia=abhavat, vit. 23; cf. Hohja=abhūt, vii. 24 (cf.
note transl.
note trans.)
VII 14.
}=bhavişyāmah.
VI. 15
The End
llenachandrashesitant lerms, llam, telhem, and farliam